Home

REACH Interface Author™

1. oooocccccccccccnconononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnininoss 31 1 23 Traditional REACH Features version 3 Or Carlier ccccccccccccecccccceceeeeeeseaeesssseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 31 1 3 Overall Strategy and Layout of the REACH Interface Author SO tWare ooooccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininininos 33 LA Usino Scanmino KeyDO AU Secs ssa a A R 35 1 4 1 First Scanning Option Single Switch A aos 37 1 4 2 Second Scanning Option Dual Switch Scanning cs000e0ecdeesesccseeesedeseecssenseenesscdensesenscenstees 37 1 4 3 Third Scanning Option Inverse Single Switch SCcanniOg ooocccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnoos 38 1 4 4 Scania and Smart ss ia 38 1 4 5 Scannine and Smart Keys Tecno 38 1 4 6 Using Scanning with ClickAssist Tecla e A A a AAA 39 ES Using REACH Ms Hot Authorne FP Gatures i n 39 L6 Using REACHIMs Home Keats 41 E7 Usm Speech Options with REACH AS AAA SAA A 41 1 7 1 Usesol Specchi Feedback TO E erre teste state teen A E AA need 42 1 7 2 Uses of Speech Tool for Finding Letters Auditory Keyboards cccccsceeessseseesssesseesessesseeeens 43 1 7 3 Usesor speech Tool for Pido W OLS dit ada 43 1 7 4 USES OF Speech Speer My At CIC MCAl OM seissen E iia la 43 20 The REACH Button Dar ccno E EE 45 Zol Button Meni a A N 45 22 Buton Doubek Clas TA E T 46 29 Buton Dran Yaris a E T E AE E E 46 DAs Baon R
2. Perhaps one of the most powerful and innovative of all REACH features is the REACH Keyboard Author option which starts when the Make option is selected from the Keyboard menu All of the keyboards that come with REACH were created using this program After selecting Make two windows are presented First the REACH Keyboard Author window is displayed see Figure 71 Second the keyboard window is displayed see Figure 72 Y ou might want to hide the Menu Bar and Keyboard to make it more visible especially if the keyboard is large In addition to the two main windows a third window appears asking you to indicate whether you want to Make a New Keyboard or Open and Change a Keyboard For more details on the steps involved in making a new keyboard see section 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard For information on modifying an existing keyboard see section 5 2 3 Changing an Existing Keyboard ime 792 209 Modified Figure 72 REACH Keyboard Author Keyboard window as it appears when first authoring a new keyboard Before you start creating or changing a keyboard it is highly recommended that you read the following section first section 5 2 1 Basics of Keyboard Authoring Read this Section First Also if you are making a new keyboard it is highly recommended that you read the section that provides a general suggested strategy for authoring keyboards section 5 2 2 Suggested General Strategy for Authoring
3. To see an example of using one key to speak or type two different things when in REACH select the Foods speech keyboard foods kbd When you press the key with the apple on it it says apple However when you press the key with the waiter on it which has been defined as a shift key and then press the apple key 1t says May I have an apple please Key Action Text Entry Box The text entry box just below Key Action Type is where you enter the action you want to be performed when the key is pressed If you find that there is already text listed there it probably is the label for the key which was automatically entered by REACH because you have the Use the label of the key to create the key action option turned on in Keyboard Details 140 Whatever you enter into this text box will be spoken 1f the When pressed speak the contents of the key option 1s selected see next section and typed if the When pressed type the contents of the key option is selected see next section In addition any special keys special functions or macros see later sections entered into this box will be executed when the key 1s pressed If there is not already a blinking text caret inside this text entry box click your mouse inside the text entry box until it appears Next type the letter or words you want to be typed when this key is pressed If you want the key to do special things e g perform an Enter action perform a macro fun
4. F pwell Time fioo 4 El el ie O sec 3 secs Pause Optic Step 2 Choose the Set time 23 Wobble Time hoo 4 al el vies O sec 3 secs ES Pa Smart Keys Step 3 Choose the Go time Smart Lists E Time lio a El E P Home Keyboard 0 sec sl See Favorites Step 4 Set how steady the pointer must be before Dwell starts cnt Word Prediction Steadiness 2 _ el ap a Unsteady Very Steady X 00 Cancel Help Figure 27 The Dwell Timing page of Settings 60 There are three time periods associated with the REACH dwell that can be thought of as corresponding to start dwell ready and set go occurring at the end of set Click on the Timing topic under Dwell in Settings to display the Timing page of Settings is displayed see Figure 27 In the first three steps you can adjust the time associated with each of the three time periods by dragging the slide adjustments or by clicking on the buttons at the two ends of the slide adjustments You can adjust each of the three periods from 0 1 to 3 0 seconds however REACH will not allow the total dwell time to be less than 0 3 seconds Research Note During user tests with all three times set to be equal a sample of physically disabled adult subjects had an average preferred time of 0 47 sec for all three settings with a standard deviation of 0 15 sec The corresponding preference for a sample of non disabled adults was a mean preferred setting of 35
5. 2 A message letting you know that you now can start the next trial For some tasks this message states Press any Key or Click Here to Continue For other tasks which involve only pointing the message states Aim Here above a blue box Consequently the actual length of the inter trial interval time between trials is controlled by the person giving or taking the task In user tests it was found that this ability to pause the task often was necessary in order to provide a adequate time to adjust the system if needed b an extra moment of rest for some individuals and c ample time for a subject to change posture 3 A Ready message is printed in blue indicating that a trial has begun The time that this message is on the screen varies randomly from 2 0 to 6 0 seconds and cannot be changed 4 A Set message is printed in red indicating that a response will soon be requested The time that this message is on the screen varies randomly from 2 0 to 6 0 seconds and cannot be changed 5 A Go message is printed in green in the center of the screen indicating that it is now time to perform the task described in the instructions e g click point press a certain key etc This message stays on the screen until a response is made 6 After the selected number of trials is completed a Results Summary dialog box presents some summary performance measures along with options to Print the resulting data or Save it to a file Pressin
6. 4 Decide on what you want the background of the keyboard to look like If you want a distinctive background color label or picture press the Background ackaround button Hint Ifyou want to make a distinctive background try adding a picture to the background and then select the Tile option 5 Select and position the keys on the keyboard The pop up Key Palette button on the left side of the Keyboard Author Button Bar provides a sample of key sizes and shapes see section 5 2 5 Laying Out Keys on the 124 Keyboard If you want a key shape size that 1s not available on the Key Palette select one is there and drag its edges until it is the correct shape size If you want several keys to have the same unique appearance use the Copy and Paste buttons to create duplicates of the desired key It is best to do this after you have finished all of the common characteristics e g if all the copied keys are to have a blue background assign the blue background before copying and pasting 6 Define each key Here you assign the key s label color label picture action function etc and specify any associated speech or sounds see section 5 2 6 Defining a Key 7 If you want the keyboard to be a scanning keyboard e g one that can be operated by using a single switch or two switches then you must add scanning instructions by using the Scanning Expert option see section 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructi
7. 5 1 Keyboard Menu Select To quickly load any REACH keyboard click on the Select option in the Keyboard menu and the REACH Keyboard Gallery appears Notice that you can select from different categories on the left side REACH keyboards are stored in the Reach5 Keyboards folder and the categories shown on the left side are really subfolders found under the Keyboards folder If you are not sure of the name of the keyboard you want but would recognize it use the scroll bar to locate it and then select it by double clicking on it or by clicking on it and then pressing the OK button or Enter key Notice that if you click on one of the keyboard names a small picture of the keyboard is presented for a few moments REACH comes with a variety of keyboards For examples of the types of keyboards that can be made with REACH see section 5 2 13 Types of Keyboards that Can be Authored 5 2 Keyboard Menu Make REACH Keyboard Author Feature WARNING This version of REACH allows the user to create keys that execute macro functions when pressed It is possible that someone could accidentally or intentionally create a macro key that does damage to your files or your computer When you create a macro key be sure that you enter commands that you know will not cause any problems Also be sure that you only accept keyboards from sources that you know would not create destructive keys Applied Human Factors Inc cannot be held
8. REACH highlights keys on the basis of horizontal position with the left most key highlighted first and the right most key highlighted last In the case of horizontal ties the vertical position of the key determines which key is highlighted with the top key highlighted first and the bottom key highlighted last Hence if you want your keys to be highlighted from top to bottom be sure to line them up using the Alignment Expert Key Alignment see section 5 2 5 7 Aligning a Group of Keys If you want them highlighted in some other order position them so that the first key to be highlighted is the left most key and the last key to be highlighted is the right most key If you are changing the scanning instructions for an existing keyboard the above instructions still apply but because there probably already are some scanning instructions you probably will want delete all previously defined rows and Start over 162 5 2 12 9 Undo Button Pressing the Undo _Yndo__ button produces the same result as pressing the Undo option in the Edit Menu the Keyboard Author will try to undo the last action Most actions can be undone but some cannot e g saving a keyboard cannot be undone Pressing this button repeatedly continues undoing previous actions Note There is no Redo option so make sure you really want to undo an action before you select this option 5 2 13 Types of Keyboards that Can be Authored With REACH
9. Speech Abbreviation Keyboard This keyboard uses the most sophisticated of all the REACH Speech Keyboard concepts This approach is not for everyone It is designed to be used in conjunction with the REACH Word Prediction option running and with the speech2 dic User Dictionary loaded The basic approach here is to let you create a speech dictionary that contains abbreviations that make sense to you that lead to sentences that you frequently use and that you have entered in the speech2 dic user dictionary Note The speech2 dic word prediction user dictionary that comes with REACH or another User Dictionary that you have created for this purpose should be loaded and active for this approach to work Note Although the speech2 dic User Dictionary comes with a modest number of entries these are only intended to be examples The success of this approach depends on you entering additional sentences that you use frequently and storing them using the abbreviation scheme that is presented below Abbreviation Storage and Retrieval Scheme for Speech Abbreviation Keyboard The REACH Speech Abbreviation Keyboard spchabrv kbd types portions of abbreviations that you can use to quickly access a specific speech statement see Figure 118 You can get to the Speech Abbreviation keyboard by loading it directly 168 using the Select option in the Keyboard Menu or by selecting 1t while on the Speech Screen Conversation keyboard one of the six m
10. When changing your Home keyboard you can select one of the keyboards that comes with REACH in the Home folder and has a label beginning with home These keyboards have been designed to provide access to a number of different types of keyboards quickly Alternatively you can create your own Home keyboard by using the home template keyboard as a starting point and filling 1t with the links you want When you are finished it should be given a name that starts with home and stored in the Home folder found in the Keyboards folder For more information about authoring your own keyboards or modifying existing keyboards see section 1 5 Using REACH s Hot Authoring Features and section 5 2 Keyboard Menu Make REACH Keyboard Author Feature 1 7 Using Speech Options with REACH Note If REACH does not speak 1 Check to make sure that the Stop All Sounds option in the Options menu is not turned on if you can read Stop All Sounds then it is off 41 2 Check to make sure that your system has a sound card that can play sounds For example check to see if it plays a sound when Windows starts 3 Check to make sure that you have a speech synthesizer installed on your system Ifthe Voice option and other speech options in REACH are grayed out then REACH does not detect a speech synthesizer 4 Check to make sure one of your volume controls is not set to Mute or set too low go to Window
11. if loaded and this can save time e g a second chance if you missed the button you wanted to press Note that you also can adjust how long this prompt is offered Warning Turning off the Prompt me to scan the button bar prompt will stop REACH from offering the Button Bar during scanning Be sure that you want to turn this prompt off because if you cannot scan the Button Bar you might not be able to move to another keyboard e g by using the Home button or to give an application the focus by using the next Program button Y ou also can assign specific sound files or speech to be played for any ofthese Button Bar scanning events For more information on how to do that see the section above entitled Options for Audible Sounds and Speech Prompts Prompts and Timing for General Scanning Press the General General button and a list of settings for general scanning events is presented see Figure 23 Use the four buttons below to select a scanning category Then select the event you want and make the adjustment a Repeat the scan pattern 2 times before pausing F Prompt to undo after holding the switch for 2 00 seconds E Show a reverse option for 2 00 seconds a Offer ScanBuddy for 2 00 seconds El Select an audible prompt Sound Speech Figure 23 The General section of the Prompts amp Timing page in the Settings dialog box These events include how many times the overall scanning patt
12. you can go far beyond traditional keyboards which only provide simple input for a computer While some REACH keyboards imitate traditional keyboards others add whole new dimensions to the concept of keyboard Several new keyboard concepts have already been identified and samples are included with REACH However there probably are many other keyboard concepts yet to be invented some which you might discover If you think of a new concept or application setting please let us know about it so we can share it with other REACH users our contact information can be found at the beginning of this manual In addition to Standard Keyboards some of the keyboard concepts include Special Keyboard Storybook Keyboard Quiz Keyboard Template Keyboard Game Keyboard Speech Keyboards Interpreter Keyboard Musical Keyboard Children s Keyboard Reading Assistance Keyboard Performance Aid Keyboard Scanning Keyboard Secret Code Keyboard Memory Assessment Keyboard Motor Skills Keyboard Puzzle Keyboard and Macro Keyboard For most of these keyboard concepts REACH comes with one or more sample keyboards that provide a demonstration All of the keyboards that come with REACH were created with the Keyboard Author that comes with REACH M Also check out our Internet Web Site www ahf net com to see what new keyboards are available from Applied Human Factors Inc or from other REACH users check t
13. 151 161 175 176 211 212 213 241 Scanning Menu 51 176 211 212 213 scroll buttons 43 77 198 Search for Help On 215 216 Secret Code Keyboard 163 176 Select 35 47 52 54 64 88 99 103 104 113 115 117 123 124 130 132 134 135 136 137 139 141 145 146 149 150 153 154 155 156 161 168 169 171 176 182 188 selecting a group of keys 130 selecting a key 155 selecting dictionaries 194 196 197 204 206 sentence completion 202 241 Sentence Prediction 78 79 88 175 193 202 241 Settings 35 36 41 42 43 45 47 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 91 92 93 97 99 103 104 111 116 117 125 128 143 152 176 178 179 180 183 187 193 194 195 200 202 207 209 212 213 215 234 236 241 242 243 Settings button 212 Show Keyboard 189 Single Switch Scanning 37 38 152 179 211 212 213 size font 77 Smart Keys 21 22 23 25 28 38 65 66 67 69 71 96 104 106 110 111 200 218 219 220 241 Smart Lists 21 23 24 25 26 28 29 38 52 68 69 70 78 96 106 110 111 241 software requirements 241 SoothSayer Dictionary 194 196 197 204 SoothSayer Options 42 77 79 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 SoothSayer Speech Dictionary 207 208 241 SoothSayer Voice 104 sound option 87 104 162 241 sound options 87 8
14. 178 180 236 237 Getting Started 215 Glossary 21 156 215 216 217 233 graduated dictionary 75 236 help 43 200 216 Help 36 156 168 208 215 216 Help Contents 216 Help Menu 156 215 216 Hide Keyboard 189 highlighted 32 36 37 42 48 83 151 152 162 199 236 Homophone Help 210 221 222 homophone hint 220 226 228 homophones 210 220 221 230 231 horizontal window 75 80 236 Hot Authoring 9 21 27 31 39 40 41 44 47 70 115 168 175 183 236 Hot Keys 82 84 85 How Do I 215 icon 7 10 197 installation 6 7 Installing 6 International Keyboards 33 Interpreter Keyboards 172 Inverse Single Switch Scanning 38 57 213 jpg 32 135 150 161 177 237 Jpg picture format 237 justification 127 134 Key Action 40 44 85 120 121 139 140 141 142 143 144 166 key align 147 237 Key Align 162 Key Color 134 135 Key Details 118 120 121 124 129 130 131 132 134 135 136 138 140 144 145 147 149 150 151 152 153 155 161 168 177 178 242 Key Label 121 132 134 177 Key Picture 121 124 135 136 137 150 151 161 177 Key Sound 88 120 138 139 178 182 Key State 119 120 121 124 149 Key Style 118 119 149 keyboard authoring 87 114 119 Keyboard Gallery 31 73 113 115 116 125 126 141 142 153 154 176 keyboard link 39 52 115 117 121 Keyboard Menu 35 37 39 40 41 47 52 106 113 141 152 1
15. Cancel button 147 Size Label Backgrounds The Size Label Backgrounds option allows you to make the label backgrounds on a single key 1 e for Normal Pointed At and Pressed key states the same size If you have selected a single key on the keyboard and select Size Label Backgrounds the Sizing Expert dialog box will be displayed see Figure 101 Sizing Expert How should size the labels on a key for pou Change Widths Grow to largest Shrink to smallest Change Heights f No change Grow to largest 7 Shrink to smallest Figure 101 The Sizing Expert dialog box for sizing labels on a key Note In all Label Sizing what gets sized are the rectangular backgrounds provided for the text When selected the different Change Width and Change Height options in this window are applied to the different key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed for the selected key This is done regardless of which key state the key currently is in When you have selected the size adjustment you want press the OK button If you change your mind about sizing labels press the Cancel button Size Pictures The Size Pictures option allows you to make the pictures on a single key 1 e for Normal Pointed At and Pressed key states the same size If you have selected a single key on the keyboard and select Size Pictures the Sizing Expert dialog box will be displayed see Figure 102 sizing
16. Much of the information in this supplement can also be obtained in the Tour help section of the main REACH program On most Home Keyboards you will find a link called Tour that will take you to that information One potential advantage of going there for this information is that you can click on most of the text presented there and hear it read aloud This might be important if you have trouble reading or are helping a potential user of this product who has trouble reading Because it is such a novel approach to typing this section was included to provide more information about how to use the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Patent Pending 11 1 How to Use a Phonetic Keyboard This program uses an innovative approach to typing called Phonetic Typing Patent Pending Instead of selecting the letters to spell a word something known to be very difficult for some persons you select the sounds in the word by clicking on keys of a phonetic keyboard such as shown in Figure 146 A ee ee eee Figure 146 Picture of the Pictures phonetic keyboard before any sounds are selected Each key represents a simple sound most are just phonemes but for some keys phonemes have been combined The consonant sounds are located together on the left side of the keyboard and the vowel sounds are on the right Other standard computer keyboard keys such as Enter Shift etc are on the extreme right and lower right Each phonetic key has
17. Quick words Homophone Help Figure 137 The Word Prediction menu in the REACH Menu Bar 8 1 Word Prediction Menu Hide or Show Word Prediction Selecting the Hide Word Prediction option in the Word Prediction Menu removes the word prediction word bar and changes the label of this menu option to Show Word Prediction This same option also is found in the View Menu 8 2 Word Prediction Menu Word Prediction Settings Selecting the Word Prediction Settings option in the Word Prediction menu produces the Word Prediction page in the Settings dialog box Most of the options and adjustments for word prediction are found on this page of Settings or one of the subcategory pages under the Word Prediction These pages are located just below Word Prediction in the list of Settings categories on the left side of the Settings dialog box and include Caret Tracking Word Size amp Color View Options including AutoType Sentence Prediction and AutoEdit More Options including Learning Word Usage AutoAdd and AutoShow Punctuation Numbering Word Tips Quick Words and Hot Keys For more information on any of these word prediction options see section 2 11 10 Settings Word Prediction 8 3 Word Prediction Menu Dictionary Manager Legal Notice REACH Word Prediction comes with several dictionaries These are included for your personal use only and are not to be sold or redistributed If you create a new dictionary and
18. See three Notes that begin section 1 7 48 2 11 Button Settings For many features REACH provides two ways of making selections and adjustments Many such adjustments can be made by selecting options from the menus However as an alternative method the Settings 72 9 button is provided to allow the more experienced user to make changes quickly Pressing this button produces the Settings dialog box which allows you to quickly select a topic and then make the desired adjustment s see Figure 16 FAI REACH Startup Keyboards Programs MN annin g Do you want REACH to start when Windows starts emegi View O Yes Eh Smart Lists Ho B Favorites Word Prediction Figure 16 The REACH Settings dialog box offers a variety of adjustments for the experienced user On the left side of the Settings dialog box different general categories of adjustments are presented Any of the topics which have a on their icon have related subcategories that e g when you first enter the Settings dialog box the REACH Startup category will be open showing two subcategories Keyboards and Programs see Figure 16 When you click on one of the main categories the subcategories automatically are displayed On the right side of the Settings dialog box corresponding specific options are presented for the selected category or subcategory In the following sections each page of Settings 1s discussed in more detai
19. Undo is not the same as the Undo available in most applications Use the REACH Undo to undo typing performed by REACH Use the application s undo to perform other undos such as cutting pasting etc Note If using scanning be sure to check out the undo that can be generated by holding your switch closed see section 2 11 2 1 Settings Scanning Prompts and Timing 96 Warning REACH does not track which application you are typing into If you type in one application and then move to another application and press the REACH Undo REACH will try to undo the typing that was performed on the earlier application 2 16 Button Start Scanning When you select one of the scanning keyboard options e g from the Scanning menu in REACH or from the Scanning page of Settings the REACH Button Bar gets rearranged for scanning and two new buttons are added One Stoo of them is the Start scanning button and the second is the Stop scanning button see next section Press the Start scanning button and the scanning process begins The first prompt will depend on which scanning option you selected For example for single switch scanning the prompt will state To start scanning click any time From that point on you can still move your mouse on the display but any clicks will be interpreted as scanning selections For example once scanning starts you cannot move your mouse and select a menu option in an application It i
20. cocccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 84 21121010 Settings Word Prediction Hot Keys 84 2 11 11 ii PG CMe aad wots A II 85 2 11 12 A EE ENE E oth ter saat nine haat sete sacte cl aus EE E 87 2 11 13 Decl Ss CLMCKASSIS Dear dotado 89 DNS Settines CCA Ssist CICA SSS Ue iia ces al er E O a eee es 89 2 11 14 A O 91 DATA Setimes Keys gt REPELER AA A 92 Dba Settinos Keys Chan ce Labels a 92 ZALLA Seinas KEYS CCN Si 93 212 Buton Next PRO CCAM A A ASA AAA A AA DAA 95 Z US Button Hide On Show keyboa Cl nd te 95 214 Button Add Word to do oe 96 ZA Banon O A mr rr ww A ee oS oP RTI rn EN ee Pe ed ee 96 2G Daton Stan CAMAS A ida 97 217 Buton A A A e AE 97 30 REACH Menu Bar Programs iS 99 3 1 Programs Menu Next Programi sr a a A E O RET 99 3 2 ProsramsMen REACH STUD rents voce laien ch a iein O aaa neNne 99 3 3 Programs Menus Startup Programs esa ctsrelnacaseciut sz niviea del acres nian acelin 99 Ove PEO STAINS Menu RUS Y SD A EA EA EE 99 3 gt ri nn nr ge ae aR ee nee ere 100 40 REACH Menu Bar Opn lt a iaa 103 4 1 Optronsu vien SCN OS 5 00 einne aiii EOS 103 AD ODNOS MENU OV O1CS aa rmen e e a E A A E e E E gc ese 103 4 3 Options Mr aaa ie ee 104 Aa O ane a OEA A OE ae OO T 104 4 5 Options Menu Tm sounds OM OO a aise 104 4 6 Options Menu Smart Keys Options Available only if you purchased Smart Keys M cccccc
21. first select the group using the drag or shift key method described above and press the Delete button A message box appears warning you that you are about to delete the entire group Alignment Expert Align Keys How should align the keys for pou Top to bottom Mo change E Top edges gles Bottom edges Centers Space evenly Lett to right No change Lett edges Right edges Centers OOO 0 En Space Evenly Figure 82 The Alignment Expert Align Keys dialog box 5 2 6 Defining a Key Once you have laid out the keys on the keyboard you can start defining each key The following discussion assumes that you have read section 5 2 1 entitled Basics of Keyboard Authoring and that you are familiar with the concept of different key states normal pointed at and pressed and other basic concepts If all the keys or some subset of the keys will have similar appearances you should use the procedure described in section 5 2 5 6 Changing a Group of Keys which describes how to change a group of selected keys The key definition includes its appearance label color picture key style whether 1t appears three or two dimensional and its sounds when pointed at or when pressed and its action what function s the key performs when it is pressed Different combinations of these dimensions result in a wide variety of options available for REACH keys and they
22. key By REACH convention we suggest that the Not key follow the appropriate noun or verb For example if you are entering the following sentence in the speech2 dic He did not give her a present you should store it under past he move not thing 7 A special Expressions button also is included as a shortcut to common expressions you might want to say quickly e g wow great that s awful you re kidding etc Building and Using Speech 2 Dictionary The speech2 User Dictionary comes with only a few example abbreviation sentences To be successful you must enter the sentences that you want to be available in speech2 by assigning them to abbreviations using the above strategy and storing them in a User Dictionary e g speech2 dic Use the following procedure 1 Load the Speech Abbreviation keyboard 2 Select Dictionary Manager in the Word Prediction Menu 3 If itis not open open the speech2 User Dictionary select the Edit Dictionary option in the Dictionary Manager and then click the text entry box so that a text caret appears 4 For the sentence you are entering think of the way it should be stored and enter the time question if appropriate subject verb etc 5 When you think the sentence has been properly categorized push the REACH keyboard button This loads a special computer keyboard that you can use to enter the sign and the sentence you want up to 500 characters 6 After the
23. nine numbers but only one with the correct sequence Of course feedback about correct and incorrect choices can be provided A third option is analogous to a True False test In this approach information displayed on the presentation keyboard is followed by a test keyboard containing a number of test items to which you respond Yes or No 1 e this 1s is not part of the information presented earlier Another dimension is added when REACH s scanning keyboard feature is incorporated Many of the advantages here relate to the fact that time between presentation and test can be more carefully controlled see the following section on the Retention Period Another advantage is that sequential presentations and tests can be made An example of such a keyboard is included with REACH The Memory Spatial Stimulus keyboard is typical of many memory tasks used to test spatial memory Turn on single switch scanning when you use this memory task In the presentation keyboard a picture of a person s face is shown see Figure 124 The person is wearing one earring The picture 1s displayed for a period of time that can be set by adjusting scan time values on the Scanning Prompts and Settings page of Settings After the face has been presented you are asked to operate your switch causing a test keyboard Memory Spatial Test to appear see Figure 125 Your job is to point at each of the squares study the picture that is presented and decide Yes p
24. only speak if you have a Microsoft SAPI compliant speech engine loaded and your system has a sound card and gt speakers When speech is being generated this button momentarily changes to the Stop speech F _ button which you can use to stop the speech currently being produced Note IfREACH does not speak See three Notes that begin section 1 7 2 9 Button Sentence Speak Last Sentence Press the speak Sentence Sentence button and REACH will speak the last sentence that you typed However REACH can only speak if you have a Microsoft SAPI compliant speech engine loaded and your system has a sound card and speakers Microsoft has provided their speech engine for free and it is included on the REACH installation CD as an option Note If REACH does not speak See three Notes that begin section 1 7 2 10 Button Highlight Speak Highlighted Text If you want more than a sentence read aloud you can first highlight the text to be read and then press the Speak Es Highlighted Text Mghlight button To highlight text in an application e g word processor or web browser use your mouse to highlight that text by holding your mouse button down and dragging over the desired text When it is highlighted the text and background colors will be reversed e g white text on a black background Pressing the speak Highlight button instructs REACH to speak that text Note If REACH does not speak
25. pages If you have questions about what the different icons mean click on the Legend Legend button at the bottom ofthe Dictionary Manager and the REACH word prediction Dictionary Manager Legend dialog box will appear with a list of icons and their meaning see picture below Another unique and powerful feature that is unique to REACH is that for any given keyboards dictionaries can be associated with that keyboard so that only those associated dictionaries are searched when the user types with that keyboard For example you can have a dictionary with math terms associated with a math keyboard so that when using that keyboard only math terms are offered For more information on this powerful option click on Associated Dictionaries Click on the link to the Association Manager and the Association Manager dialog box 1s shown see Figure 45 There you can associate specific dictionaries with the keyboard that 1s currently loaded Subsequently when that keyboard is used only those associated dictionaries will be searched for words 2 11 10 1 Settings Word Prediction Caret Tracking Click on the Caret Tracking category in Settings and the associated options and settings are displayed see Figure 46 The caret is the small blinking text cursor that shows you where you are typing in your application If you have the word prediction window floating not docked and are in the horizontal window orientation you can turn on
26. phrase or sentence In use the abbreviation 1s typed and then translated by the computer into the larger text string active application The software program that is currently open and has the focus You can make a program active by starting 1t or by clicking on it after 1t has been launched add phonetic word key A key on any of the REACH phonetic keyboards that allows you to add a new word to the dictionary along with its phonetic encoding how you pronounce that word align expert To line a number of items up inarow The REACH Align expert in the Keyboard Author feature allows you to align keys labels and pictures automatically animated keys A term used to describe the effect of using animated avi files on keys or the very low level of animation effect produced by two or more pictures displayed in sequence on a REACH key 1 e in three key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed always on top A Windows option that forces a specified window to almost always be present on the display Hence it will appear to be on top of any other windows application or application program Another name for a software program With REACH most open applications running programs can be accessed by pressing the next Program button You can usually make a program active or give it the focus by clicking on its window assess A REACH option that offers a number of different tasks intended to assess which poin
27. see section 2 11 1 2 Settings REACH Startup Programs 3 4 Programs Menu Run Selecting the Run option allows you to quickly locate and run most executable programs on your computer When you select this option the Run a Program dialog box is displayed see Figure 65 99 Find and click on the program you wish to run from the list below Then click the Run button Description A accessibility wizard E activate product S ad aware se personal s oddress book K adobe gamma loader S adobe photoshop elements 2 El adobe premiere 6 le ES adobe premiere le readme E aol Instant messenger hd Figure 65 The Run a Program dialog box where you can quickly locate and run an application program Program When you select this menu option REACH searches your computer for programs and lists them in the list box on the left side see Figure 65 Use the scroll buttons to browse this list When you find a program you want to launch first select it by clicking on it and then press the Run button If you cannot locate the program you want to run in the list presented press the Browse button and locate the program in the resulting dialog box Note Depending on your computer it might take a while to present all the programs especially the icons which are displayed last 3 5 Programs Menu Exit Use the Exit option to exit REACH Many times exiting REACH also means that
28. selected 19 Four button options are available on the right side of the Zoom window Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom What and Exit x In Each time you press the Zoom In button the area being magnified e g the area around the mouse cursor is magnified more Similarly each time you press the Zoom Out button the current area is magnified less You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to adjust the magnification until 1t is best for you Pressing the Zoom What button produces a drop down menu with four options Zoom Mouse the area around the mouse cursor Zoom Caret the area around the text caret Zoom Both both the area around the text caret top and the area around the mouse cursor bottom are magnified see Figure 136 and Cancel in case you change your mind You can exit the Zoom feature by pressing the Exit button Note The zoomed text caret view does not respond to some operations e g repositioning the text caret with the arrow keys pressing Enter etc until you start typing characters REACH Zoom Figure 136 The REACH Zoom window showing a slightly magnified view of both the area around the text caret top half and the area around the mouse cursor bottom half 192 8 0 REACH Menu Bar Word Prediction Show Word Prediction Word Prediction Settings Dictionary Manager Word Size Color Make Word Prediction Vertical Turn Caret Tracking On Turn Word Tips On
29. then you should try this option When Sentence Prediction is on and you start typing a sentence REACH Word Prediction will keep track of the words that you already have typed and present any sentences that match that pattern In addition any detected sentences will be given special priority and be displayed at the top of the word list See section 8 3 5 Adding Changing Deleting Sentences for details Warning When you select a sentence from one of the word boxes all letters back to the last period question mark etc are deleted and replaced by the selected sentence AutoEdit Option If you make frequent typing or spelling errors you might want to try the AutoEdit option When turned on AutoEdit automatically corrects numerous common typing errors e g typing adn will be changed to and This option is available on many sophisticated applications but there might be some settings where you want this capability and it is not built into the application e g graphics programs e mail or web browsers Abbreviations Option There might be times when you want to use abbreviation expansion but do not want to see the abbreviations For example when you use one of the Speech Dictionaries you might want to type in an abbreviation but not have it shown in the word prediction word box windows because the abbreviations take up room When selected this option prevents the abbreviations from being shown 2 11 10 5 Settings Word Predic
30. you can have ClickAssist help by checking the fourth check box I make another accidental click after a good click so wait a while before allowing another click After selecting it enter the amount of time you want ClickAssist to wait before allowing another click in the sentence just below this option For example if you want to wait at least 3 00 seconds before allowing another click enter 3 00 so that the statement now reads Wait 3 00 seconds then allow me to click again Note Different ClickAssist settings are available if you are using scanning go to the ClickAssist page of Settings under the Scanning category Note The ClickAssist feature works everywhere you click not just on REACH keyboards Note The settings found on the Keys ClickAssist Settings page are the same as those on this page 2 11 14 Settings Keys lew it Favorites las Word Prediction The pages under the Keys topic allow you to change lt Speech settings related to how the keys repeat how REACH labels Full Picture keys and how to set ClickAssist to improve your clicking performance veel Pointer Settings Ta Repeat Key Change Lab fea ClickAssist a mm E Figure 60 The Keys page in the Settings dialog box The Keys category contains options for repeating keys changing whether how pictures and labels are presented and the ClickAssist settings which take effect when using a point and
31. 188 191 192 234 239 243 Musical Keyboard 33 163 172 239 Next 10 31 37 48 88 95 99 106 129 136 141 143 146 180 197 199 201 204 205 207 Next Keyboard 48 Next Program 99 Normal Key State 119 150 number of trials 105 106 107 number of words displayed 64 77 204 number of words in Main Dictionary 238 Numbers Task 105 111 options 42 77 79 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 104 194 196 197 204 206 Options 32 33 37 41 42 44 54 55 56 57 60 61 63 78 79 84 87 99 103 104 105 117 140 141 142 143 144 153 156 166 168 185 186 187 193 194 195 200 202 207 235 236 orientation 64 75 76 77 80 190 200 202 209 236 240 243 orientation window 75 76 80 200 202 Overview 215 palette 118 129 157 237 239 Palette 118 124 129 156 157 Paste 116 123 125 129 155 157 181 182 Pause 57 60 61 62 84 187 phonetic dictionary 218 223 224 229 phonetic keyboard 26 27 183 195 217 218 223 224 225 226 227 230 231 phonetic sounds theme 227 phonetic typing 26 184 217 231 picture 32 45 46 47 60 67 117 118 119 121 122 123 124 125 131 135 136 137 139 149 150 151 152 155 157 161 167 173 177 178 179 180 234 237 239 240 242 Picture Gallery 27 32 121 122 123 124 135 136 137 150 Point Task 109 Point and Click Task 107 108 109 110 Pointed At Key State 150 Pointer M
32. A A R 196 Edme Be ionar eS ao 197 Addine Chanomo Deleting Words 198 8 3 4 Adding Changing Deleting Abbreviations oocccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 199 8 3 5 Addine Chane mie Deleting Sentencia 202 8 3 6 Deleting Dic de a cde 204 8 3 7 Burldine Dictionaries Tonm A O e e 204 8 3 8 EsadmeSayino PICU ON ATES diia 205 8 3 9 Using the REACH Speech Dictionary M Feature s42iaarsdsaeacwarecwarsace cna iaa 207 8 4 Word Prediction Menu Word Size Color oooooooocnncnnncncnnnnnnnnonononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn E ROE TR EANES 209 8 5 Word Prediction Menu Change to Horizontal or Vertical View cccccccceeseeseeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 209 8 6 Word Prediction Menu Turn Caret Tracking On or Off nresnain E ono no nononnnnos 209 8 7 Word Prediction Menu Turn Word Tips ONO A ia 209 8 8 Word Prediction Menus Quick WOtdSva3 ati E A A E 209 89 Word Prediction Menu Homopnone Hr RATOS 210 90 REACH Menu io AAA Eeer OnE Rne eE Oia 211 9 1 Scannine Meni DOS CANO A ata 211 9 2 Scanning Menu Single Switch Scannin nssr ie E a a A E aa 212 9 3 Scanning Meni Dual CAS A os 212 9 4 Scanning Menu Inverse Single Switch Scanning c c cseseeseeeeseeseeeeeeesecsscscsasscasceascanscsazssasetansaees 213 9 5 Scanmimo Men Prompis and OA A AA Ai 213 10 0 REACH Men Bar Del ewe E E ka 215 lOt Heii Meni COMICS OSA S Ia 215 EZ MA Getinge
33. Always remember to press the Add button before moving on to another abbreviation REACH Word Prediction will not add an abbreviation unless you press the Add button Changing an Abbreviation Abbreviations in a User Dictionary can be changed by selecting the desired abbreviation from the word list in the Dictionary Editor dialog box making the changes in the text entry box and then pressing the Change button Note Ifthe Change button is pressed the originally selected abbreviation will be deleted and replaced with the changed abbreviation If the Add button is pressed after a change is made the originally selected abbreviation will remain in the dictionary and the modified abbreviation will be added as a new abbreviation Note All abbreviation changes made appear to occur immediately However changes are not saved in the dictionary NE until the Done Be button is pressed Note All abbreviation changes only affect the currently selected dictionary If an abbreviation is to be changed in more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be loaded and the changes made in each dictionary Deleting an Abbreviation Abbreviations can be deleted by selecting the desired abbreviation from the word list and J7 Delete then pressing the Delete button Note All abbreviation deletions only affect the currently selected dictionary Ifan abbreviation is to be deleted from more than one dictionary then each dicti
34. Figure 153 Figure 153 An example of a homophone phrase in which both NOT and OR are used to help convey two possible common meanings of the word left Depending on your ability you might not want to hear these phrases read aloud If you want to see these hints when you point at a word but not hear them read aloud you can turn that off see the Section 11 4 4 Speech Cues about Word Prediction Words Provided when Pointed At In fact you might be very good at knowing the difference between such homophones and want to turn them off completely so you don t see or hear them If so select the Homophone Help option in the Word Prediction Menu and the Homophone Help dialog box is displayed see Figure 154 below Here you can select whether the homophone hints are not shown shown when you point at the word in the word prediction window or shown all the time Before completely turning off the homophone hints remember that even very educated people with considerable experience with language can confuse some homophones For example knowing the differences between principal and principle desert and dessert arc and ark pail and pale sight and site and cite sewn and sown chord and cord flair and flare vain and vein and vane decent and descent dosed and dozed elegant and eloquent ensure and insure capitol and capital complement and compliment etc can be difficult for lots of people 221 Homophone Help What s a Homophon
35. Keyboard 33 163 164 179 180 242 tile 136 time 9 32 36 41 43 46 47 53 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 66 67 80 82 83 86 87 92 96 97 99 105 106 107 110 111 115 116 117 118 119 125 126 127 128 129 132 144 151 152 153 154 157 162 164 167 168 169 170 171 175 177 178 179 180 182 186 189 191 192 197 200 209 212 213 216 234 235 240 241 242 243 title bar 242 transparent 132 135 137 150 151 164 242 uninstalling 10 Uninstalling 6 10 user dictionary 32 79 168 194 195 206 207 241 using scanning keyboards 143 176 View Menu 189 190 191 193 voice 104 Voice 42 103 104 voice options 104 wav 6 54 85 87 138 139 153 172 178 202 242 243 wav file 6 85 87 202 243 window orientation 64 75 Wobble 60 62 63 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 117 187 Wobble Task 105 107 108 111 word completion 239 243 word extinction 80 word frequency value 80 235 238 239 243 word learning 80 238 word prediction 32 35 36 43 52 53 54 55 56 57 64 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 88 96 116 168 169 171 189 190 193 196 200 202 207 209 234 235 236 239 243 Word Prediction Menu 171 193 194 197 204 205 207 209 210 Word Tips 32 43 82 83 84 233 243 Words Task 105 107 111 Zoom 32 191 192 243
36. Labels dialog box If you want to align labels across a selected group of keys but only for one key state e g Pointed At key state first select the group of keys When you select a group of keys all keys in the group automatically are changed to the Normal key state Next press the key state ral button to change the selected keys to the desired key state e g Pointed At key state Select the Align Top Labels option from the alignment expert Now the procedure is slightly different than that described above when you were aligning top labels within a single selected key First you are asked to determine how labels should be aligned across all selected keys for the current key state When you have selected the alignment you want press the OK button 146 Second you are asked whether you want to Also align labels within the keys see Figure 99 If you press the No button the alignment you selected will only be applied to the current key state If you press the Yes button the alignment will be applied to all three key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed for all selected keys Would like to align the labels within a key now Mo Cancel Figure 99 Message Box asking whether you want to apply the same alignment within all keys In summary the first step in the above procedure allows you to align all labels across keys so that for example when all keys are in the same key state they appear to have aligned labe
37. Menu Make REACH Keyboard Author Feature Note Any changes you make with Hot Authoring are not just temporary changes They are saved with the altered keyboard just as if you had made the changes with the Keyboard Author 40 16 Using REACH s Home Keyboard System The REACH Home Keyboard system provides fast access to a very large number of keyboards At any time you can press the Home mE button and your current Home Keyboard will be loaded You can select which keyboard you use your home keyboard by selecting the Change Keyboard Theme key on most home keyboards which produces the Change Keyboard Theme keyboard see Figure 14 below where you can select from themes that customize REACH for specific user needs e g for persons with low vision or persons using scanning or that provide different aesthetic themes e g sky flowers woods rainbow etc You also can change the keyboard theme in Settings see section 2 11 8 Settings Home Keyboard Basic Gray Scanning Scanning Alphabetic 1 QWERTY 1 Blue Metal REACH Simple Rainbow Sound It Out Phonetic Typing Themes Figure 14 Picture of the Change Keyboard Theme keyboard where you can select a theme designed to help customize REACH for a specific user s needs e g someone with low vision someone using scanning someone needing a simple layout or for different aesthetic themes e g flowers woods blue metal sky etc
38. Options Menu so it reads Turn Sounds Off 4 the volume for your speakers is not turned too low or set to Mute 99 5 2 13 7 REACH Speech Screen System Feature The REACH Speech Screen System option 1s a set of keyboards speech screens intended to provide a foundation on which you can build a more customized speech keyboard system to suit your needs To use this system simply load the Speech Screen Home keyboard or select the Speech Key on your Home Keyboard 166 EN AA ALEA Fis ali ee ae Caran es ocr Figure 116 REACH Speech Screen Home Keyboard with six categories of speech topics The Speech Screen Home keyboard see Figure 116 contains six keys which represent six different categories of speech topics The six categories are food drink help assistance conversation time numbers travel places and entertainment Click on the food drink key and a Speech Keyboard is loaded that contains dozens of words and phrases related to foods and drinks see Figure 117 Notice the larger Waiter key in the upper left corner Press this key and it changes what 1s spoken for each key doubling the number of possibilities more than 100 per Speech Keyboard keyboard Just press the Home key the dd eee peere EHR ERE Figure 117 The Speech Screen Foods keyboard with food drink related speech options picture of a house on the left side and you return to the speech home keyboard or y
39. Pause when using Dwell until a checkmark appears to turn it off click until the checkmark is removed The second Pause after Dwell option is offered as a method to avoid a common problem with many dwell switches For example if you use Dwell to click on a key on a REACH keyboard or at a menu option on an application and then pause momentarily e g to look to see where you will move next the key might be selected again and again and again until you move the pointer When active this pause option automatically pauses Dwell after each mouse click until you move your pointer from the site of the last click To try this option click on the checkbox in front of Pause automatically after a click until a checkmark appears To turn it off click until the checkmark 1s gone Note This pause feature works everywhere you click not just on REACH keys Note If you find that you have to move too much to restart Dwell after the pause go to the Timing page of Dwell settings and increase the Steadiness setting If you find that you have to move too little before Dwell restarts go to the Timing page and reduce the Steadiness setting 2 11 4 Settings Wobble Click on the Wobble category and the Wobble page of Settings is displayed see Figure 30 Here you can turn on and adjust the REACH wobble feature which can help you hit small targets by smoothing the mouse cursor and removing some of the jitter that can occur when y
40. REACH that provides o Scannin links to other keyboards On this page you can change your Home Keyboard To change your Home Keyboard click the Change button and select a different keyboard Home Keyboard tors iInc reach4betaykeyboard home home basic kbd Cancel Figure 41 The Home Keyboard page of Settings Ja In many ways the REACH Home keyboard is the hub of a keyboard communication network that helps you get quickly to the specific keyboard you need Click on the Home Keyboard category in Settings see Figure 41 and you can decide which home keyboard you want as your home keyboard Selecting the Home Keyboard that is best for you is important because it 1s your gateway to many other keyboards applications etc and because you can always get to it quite quickly 1 e by pressing the Home Mome button on the REACH Button Bar When you first start REACH you are allowed to select a home keyboard that sets a theme The path and name of that keyboard will appear in the text box under Home Keyboard see Figure 41 To change to another home keyboard press the Change button and the Keyboard Gallery dialog box will appear that displays different home keyboards available home keyboards are located in the Home subfolder of the Keyboards folder The names of the keyboards in this folder all begin with the word home and have been specially created to be useful as home keyboards Many of them al
41. Scanning REACH will tey to speak each ke Ey Favorites AutoType y foe Y A Letters that are AutoTyped Speech 4H Sounds Cancel Figure 55 The Speech page of the Settings dialog box The speech options available on this page of Settings all involve automatic speech Remember that three of the most powerful speech options available are not shown here because they always are available the speak last Word word button speak last Sentence Sentence button and speak Highlighted text Highlight button on the REACH Button Bar Also the speak last word button changes to the Stop speech P button while speech or sounds are being generated which you can use to stop the sounds currently being produced In the While Typing section of this page you can select whether you want various items spoken as you type If Keys is checked REACH reads the keys label or contents while you are typing If Words is checked words are read as you type If Punctuation is checked then REACH speaks the names of most punctuation marks that you type If Other is checked then REACH speaks other keyboard keys when selected Finally if Sentences is checked REACH reads completed sentences words terminated by a period question mark etc To turn an option off click on that option until there is no checkmark In the Word Prediction section you can determine whether REACH should read words or sentences when
42. Startup Smart Lists Technology E23 Keyboards Smart Lists offers a totally new way to type potentially increasing your Programs 4 Typing speed and reducing the effort of typing R Dwell To turn on Smart Lists please select Yes to the question below Wobble F A view Do you want to use Smart Lists fas Smart Keys Yes O No Point And fa SS You can customize Smart Lists differently for both Scanning and Point fa Appearance and Click situations Please proceed to the appropriate settings pages to Dynamic La customize Smart Lists ome Keyboard w aa Cancel Figure 36 The Smart Lists page of Settings Smart Lists Patent Pending technology is a new way of typing that can be very useful for some people because it can dramatically reduce the number of clicks required for both scanning and point and click and also increase typing speed On this page of Settings see Figure 36 you can turn on off the powerful Smart Lists option To turn on Smart Lists select Yes to turn it off select No There are separate pages in Settings for using Smart Lists when scanning and for when using Smart Lists when using point and click input Also there is a separate page in Settings to turn on off and select options for the Smart Lists Dynamic Labeling feature For more information about the advantages of using Smart Lists when scanning or when using point and click see section 1
43. a convenient way of speaking words and sentences that are not canned in one of the speech keyboards Using this QWERTY style keyboard you can start typing the word you want to say and then select it from one of the word prediction word boxes Alternatively if you have the speech dictionary loaded you can press one of the eight abbreviation keys on the left side of the Speech QWERTY keyboard and the corresponding abbreviation will be typed for you The eight abbreviations correspond to the eight major speech categories in the speech1 dic User Dictionary food drink numbers conversation time places entertainment and help for more information see section 8 3 9 Using the REACH Speech Dictionary Feature Also keys are included on the right side of the Speech QWERTY keyboard that will return you to the main REACH keyboard you just came from e g back to the Speech Screen Conversation keyboard Persons Things Keyboard You can load the Persons Things keyboard by pressing a single key in the Speech Screen Conversation Keyboard or by using the Select option in the Keyboard Menu This keyboard contains a number of blank keys to which you can add names of personal friends business acquaintances places and objects that are not canned in the Conversation keyboard This helps you personalize speech and customize it for your needs Use Hot Authoring or the REACH Keyboard Author feature to add information to the empty keys
44. a key select it by clicking once on it and then drag one of the four corners to form a new size shape To move a group of keys first select them by either dragging your mouse over them or by holding down the Shift key and clicking on each key you want in the group Then simply click on any key in the selected group and drag the entire group to a new location Also some of the characteristics of all selected keys e g color picture Key Style can be changed all at one time so you do not have to change each key separately For more information on laying out keys on the keyboard see section 5 2 5 Laying Out Keys on the Keyboard 5 2 1 5 Aligning and Sizing a Group of Keys For most keyboards you probably want the keys to appear in an orderly arrangement One solution is to use one of the many Template keyboards that come with REACH These are keyboards that already are laid out in for example a matrix format of differing sizes For example the Template 2x4 keyboard has two rows with four keys in each row If you have laid out several keys on a new keyboard and want to line them up first select the keys you want to line up A click on Alignment Expert from the Tools menu or press the Align ll button on the Key Details toolbar select Align Keys and then follow the directions This feature makes it easy to create professional looking keyboards For more information see Alignment Expert in section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignmen
45. a single keyboard can be used to both present information and test for retention For example a picture might be associated with the pointed at key state on a single large key at the top of the keyboard When you point at the key the picture is displayed and when you point somewhere else it is not displayed On the bottom of the keyboard you might place several pictures that appear when pointed at one of which is the same the key on top The task is to select which key is the same as shown on top can be pictures words sounds etc However for most memory tasks at least two keyboards are required the presentation keyboard presents the information and the test keyboard determines whether the information was retained Following are some example approaches that are common You are presented a single stimulus on a key on one keyboard and then a key that uses the get keyboard option loads a second keyboard where you are asked to recall the information For example a nine digit number can be presented on the presentation keyboard and then on the test keyboard you are given a number pad and asked to type the nine digits in order When you are finished pressing an Answer key lets you check how well you did Alternatively a recognition memory task can be created For example you might be presented a nine digit number on the presentation keyboard Then on a test keyboard you are asked to select from a set of keys each showing a series of
46. a text label intended to let the user know what sound that key represents Some phonetic keyboards have keys which also show a picture to help the user determine the sound goes with that key such as the Pictures keyboard shown in Figure 146 For example the key representing the BH sound shows the picture of a bus In addition a sound recording of a person saying that sound is played if the user points at one of the keys for a period of time the time can be adjusted and the sound can be turned off if not wanted Just above the keyboard are a set of word prediction windows This is where the candidate words will be presented after you start entering sounds In Figure 146 a word has just been completed so the in between word words are presented most of the two letter words It also is important to note that common punctuation marks are located in the 217 extreme left windows There are no punctuation keys on the phonetic keyboard so you should use these punctuation marks to punctuate your sentences It might be useful to give an example of how you would use a phonetic keyboard to type a word Let s say you already have typed Will you turn on the using a conventional keyboard a REACH on screen keyboard or a phonetic keyboard Now you want to finish the sentence by typing the word light but you do not know how to spell it correctly If you are new at using phonetic keyboards your first job is to explore the different
47. always added These three factors have the overall effect of reducing the number of clicks required Work reduction is greater for longer words than for shorter words 2 Possibly Increased Typing Speed Rationale Unlike in scanning where Smart Lists usually significantly increases typing speed when pointing and clicking Smart Lists might or might not increase typing speed The answer is complex and depends in part upon length of the word how good the user is at processing lists how good the user is at recognizing the beginnings of words how good the user is at spatially reorienting to different locations on the display how accurate and fast the user is when using a pointer and other variables Speed increases are much greater for longer words than shorter words 3 Reduced Visual Scanning and Head Movement Reason The Smart List is presented at the site of the last key selected on the keyboard 1 e where they were just looking After that everything the user needs to complete the word is presented in the Smart Lists no need to continually visually search the keyboard the application you are typing to or the word prediction window 24 4 Reduced Number of Mental Tasks Rationale When using a standard on screen keyboard users must perform a number of different mental tasks e g remember the letter s already typed determine the next letter search for and recognize the new target letter occasionally check the app
48. and key to key and use the right mouse button to make your selection To start dual switch scanning press the Start scanning 212 To stop scanning move the pointer to the Stop scanning button and click on it Scanning then will stop While scanning is stopped you can use the REACH Menu the REACH buttons and make changes in the current application To resume scanning press the Start scanning button To completely turn off scanning select No Scanning from the Scanning Menu For more information on using scanning see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards Note If you exit scanning with one of the three scanning options selected then the next time you start REACH it automatically will start scanning If you do not want this to happen select the No Scanning option before exiting REACH 9 4 Scanning Menu Inverse Single Switch Scanning To prepare your system to begin inverse single switch scanning select the Inverse Single Switch Scanning option in the Scanning menu When you select this option you will notice that your REACH Button Bar changes see section 9 2 Scanning Menu Single Switch Scanning Inverse Single Switch scanning 1s just like Single Switch scanning except you hold then release rather than press your switch 1 e the left mouse button or another switch that emulates a left mouse button To start inverse single switch scanning press the Start scanning button To stop scan
49. and there are no pictures assigned to the Pointed At or Pressed key states then the picture will be placed on all three key states If there are already pictures on the Pointed At or Pressed key states they will not be removed Hint If you only want a picture to be pasted to the Pointed At or Pressed key states then you should move to the desired key state using the key state ral button before pasting the picture Select All Menu Option If you want to select all the keys on the keyboard use the Select All option Once selected you can use your mouse to reposition all the keys Also if you click on the group of keys the Key Details Normal State tool bar will appear and you can make some changes to all the keys you are not allowed to change the labels or their actions for the entire group 5 2 11 3Tools Menu The Tools Menu contains useful options described below Alignment Expert Menu Option Select the Alignment Expert option and you can select from four alignment options Align Selected Keys only available if a set of keys has been selected Align Top Labels the label backgrounds Align Bottom Labels the label backgrounds and Align Pictures For more information on this valuable tool see section 5 2 6 6 155 Size Expert Menu Option If you have selected a key or a group of keys and then select the Size Expert option in the Tools Menu three alternatives are listed Size Selected Keys only available if more than on
50. be added to user If no dictionary is open with a name beginning with user then the Dictionary Manager for Adding a Word dialog box will appear and allow you to 1 open a dictionary that begins with user 2 create a new dictionary that begins with user or 3 cancel adding the word The AutoEdit dictionary is opened automatically when you select the AutoEdit feature see section 2 11 10 4 Settings Word Prediction Options This dictionary contains abbreviations for commonly misspelled or mistyped words The AutoEdit dictionary is different from other dictionaries It can only contain abbreviations e g adn and and when you edit this dictionary it will only allow you to enter abbreviations The speech dictionary contains 350 abbreviations with common sentences for use as a foundation for a speech augmentation system For more information on how to use the speech dictionary see Using the REACH Speech Dictionary Option Similarly the speech2 dictionary contains examples for another speech augmentation system built into REACH called the REACH Speech Abbreviation Keyboards If you are trying or using these keyboards then the speech2 dictionary should be open For more information on this approach click Speech Abbreviation Keyboards The Sound It Out Demo Dict dictionary is a special dictionary that is associated with the new REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard product an optional add on for REACH This keyboard
51. be licensed on more than one computer as long as a single specified individual is the only person using this program on any of those computers for example a specific person can install and license this program on a computer at home at work etc providing that specific person 1s the only person using this program on those computers OR 2 this product may be licensed on one and only one single computer and used by more than one individual for example this program can be installed on one machine in a classroom and used by more than one student but not at the same time In either case this License Agreement specifies that You may only run this REACH Interface Author software on one computer at a time LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE License Agreement continued In addition to the above restrictions this software product is licensed to You as follows a You are allowed to make one copy of this program for archival purposes b You are allowed to install and use minor upgrades as made available to You by AHF for example downloaded by You from the AHF Internet website or downloaded through AHF s automatic updates options In any such updates AHF might add or delete features or options in this program without notice to You c You may sell give or in some other fashion transfer this software license to another person company or organization once and only once provided that the entire product is transferred You
52. be typed as in standard typing errors A term used for a user mistake in the REACH Assess tasks The exact definition varies depending on the task In general an error occurs when you were instructed to make a specific response but made another response instead e g pressing Q when you were asked to press Z in the Letters task exe file An executable file is a program or application file that is in a format such that it can be run Executable files have exe file extensions executable file An executable file is a program or application file that is in a format such that it can be run Executable files have exe file extensions Exploratory Keyboard A term describing a keyboard or keyboard system that has been designed with the goal of providing stimulus response stimulation in young REACH users and to encourage exploratory behavior when seeking information in any REACH user extension file extension In Microsoft Windows a file extension 1s the portion of the file name that follows the period For example for the REACH keyboard file qwerty kbd the three letters kbd are the file extension extinction rate In the REACH Word Prediction module when either of the learning options are used the word frequency values are changed based on their rate of use Word frequency values increase for words that are selected or typed frequently and decreased for words which are never selected or typed The rate at
53. button on the REACH Button Bar until its label says Lock instead of Right or Once 6 6 Pointer Menu Dwell Switch External switches such as a mechanical switch eye blink switch puff and sip switch etc can be difficult to use or awkward for some people If this is true for you try the dwell switch option The dwell software switch clicks for you automatically when you point at any one location on the display for a period of time Once REACH determines that you are aiming at a key a ready clock is started and runs for a set period At the end of the specified ready time a second Set clock begins At the end of the Set time period a third Go clock begins Ifthe mouse cursor stays in the same general location a mouse click is generated when the third clock finishes 186 If pointing at a key then the key is pressed automatically Ifthe pointer is moved away from the key at any time during this series of events the procedure is stopped It should be noted that the dwell option combined with the Double Drag and Right Button Bar options lets you click double click drag etc anywhere on your display in most applications When you select the Dwell option from the Pointer menu the main Dwell page of Settings is displayed There you can turn on or off the Dwell feature You also can make adjustments to the Dwell option in two other pages of Settings see section 2 11 3 1 Settings Dwell Timing and section 2
54. can be difficult to use for some people Some people can use standard pointers but have difficulty making selections because they cannot operate the standard switch If this is true for you try the REACH Dwell Switch option The Dwell feature clicks for you automatically when you point at any one location on the display for a period of time More specifically once REACH determines that you are aiming at a spot on the display a ready clock 1s started and a prompt of your choice indicates that the dwell switch is starting e g the prompt might say Ready At the end of the specified ready time a second Set clock begins and a prompt indicates that the second stage 1s starting e g the prompt might say Set At the end of the Set time period a third Go clock begins and the prompt indicates that the third stage is starting e g the prompt might say Go Ifthe mouse cursor stays in the same location a mouse click is generated when the third clock finishes If pointing at a key then the key is pressed automatically The Dwell switch not only works on REACH keyboards but on most applications as well If the pointer is moved away from the key at any time during this series of events the procedure is canceled If you combine Dwell with the REACH Smart Mouse buttons 1 e Double Drag and Right you can dwell to click double click right click and drag anywhere in REACH and in most applications FAI REACH Startup Ke
55. clear about the underlying meaning s of the word and to help you distinguish it from the other word s that sound like it Second many words have several meanings When this is true for a word what are judged to be the more major meanings of the word are presented in different phrases separated by the word OR in capital letters see Figure 151 The goal is to convey the more common uses of the word for example in Figure 151 the word light is presented as a noun an adjective and a verb Third to keep the phrases short another strategy used was to determine if there was another word that had an opposite or extremely different meaning If so then that word was included in the phrase For example if you saw the word higher with a question mark in one of the word prediction boxes and pointed at it you would see what is shown in Figure 152 Notice that the word NOT in all capital letters 1s used to compare the selected word with some other word that has a very different or opposite meaning Figure 152 The word higher when pointed at in a word prediction box shows a brief phrase to help you decide if this is the word you are after The word NOT 1s used to try to get this word s meaning across by comparing it to a word with a very different or opposite meaning Fourth sometimes these different strategies are combined For example if you had pointed at the word left shown in Figure 2 you would have seen and heard what is shown in
56. click input method see Figure 60 In this section of Settings you can make adjustments to how the keys work and appear 91 On the Repeat Keys page you can determine which keys repeat when they are held down On the Change Labels page you can determine whether labels appear above or below pictures on keys where the pictures have been authored to stretch to fit the key s face On the ClickAssist Settings page you can turn on and adjust the powerful new ClickAssist feature for use when you are pointing and clicking 2 11 14 1 Settings Keys Repeat Keys The Repeat Keys page in the Settings dialog box allows you to determine which keys should be repeated when pressed and held down see Figure 61 faa Smart Keys a Smart Lists Choose which keys will repeat if you hold them down O Repeat All Keys O Repeat Movement Keys Only bo Not Repeat Any Keys Change Lab fia Clickassist les gt lt MT Figure 61 The Repeat Keys page in the Settings dialog box Three options are presented regarding which keys should be repeated Be sure to consider the switch you are using and the application programs you are running when deciding which repeat key option 1s best for you 1 In the Repeat All Keys option all keys repeat when held down 1 e when the pointer switch is held closed 2 In the Repeat Movement Keys Only option only the arrow keys repeat when held 3 In the Do
57. erica cas 185 Pointer Menu Ce 185 Pointer Menu Double Click ca 185 Foner Meni lt gt occ 185 Porter Menu Let BULA ts wie aes Wiad a ae eee a 186 Pomnter Meni Rio pt BUON csi a T erel puss cma uaereasae ae are 186 Pointer Menu we iS Wilco 186 RomterNients ODO evi erro Teas UO PTO Pe ete dio oleo 187 Pomter M nu Change Cursor e srera race saa apeen sae eensdaesean RA AT REOR 187 REACH Menu Bar View opeis ooa a OE aaa EEEN Ea eaaa a ai 189 View Men s Hide or Show keyboal diia 189 View Meno Hide or Show Word Predici n siie ea a E E E REE 189 View Menu Hide or Show Menu Bas 190 View Menu Make Word Prediction Horizontal Vertical cccccnnnnnnnoonooonooonnnonnnnnonnnnnananonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 190 View Menu Float or Dock keyboard toda ti 190 View Menu Float or Dock Word Predichon sisi iii A A ies 190 View Menu Move REACH to Top or Botto 191 view Menu Change keyboard SIAC mesasa tetas NAET OA ea tenes canaces ae eae 191 NIN Meno ZO ts 191 REACH Menu Bar Word Prediction cccccccsccsssssccccccsssssssssssssssccccccccesecsccccccseeeeessees 193 Word Prediction Menu Hide or Show Word Prediction cccccsessssscccccceeeeeeeceeessssesesssssssaeeeeeeseeeees 193 Word Prediction Menu Word Prediction Settings ooooooonnnonooonoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnss 193 Word Prediction Menu Dictionary Manager id 193 Creaine a Now DICO
58. fill it with words or other text you may give it away to anyone who has purchased REACH Interface Author or SoothSayer Word Prediction but you may not charge them for using the new dictionary If you create a dictionary from an existing document using the Build option see section 8 3 7 Building Dictionaries from Text Files you must check with the owner of the document used to create the dictionary to secure their permission to use the document for that purpose i e make sure you are not violating someone s copyright If you have created a dictionary that you feel has commercial potential contact Applied Human Factors Inc be prepared to provide written proof that you have obtained rights to use the source materials 193 Selecting Dictionary Manager in the Word Prediction Menu displays the Dictionary Manager Figure 138 At the top of the Dictionary Manager dialog box are five important options that allow you to make a new empty user dictionary edit existing user dictionaries delete user dictionaries build a user dictionary from a text file and load or save import export dictionaries easily See the following sections for more information on these options d f Dictionary Manager Dictionary Options eos speech Sound lt Out Phonetic Demo Demo Dict User wana ahi net com Figure 138 REACH Word Prediction Dictionary Manager dialog box At the top is a button bar containing five options In the
59. first start REACH you will find them at the bottom of the display In the View menu you will find the option Move REACH to Top If you prefer REACH to be anchored to the top of the display select this option and the Button Bar and Menu Bar will be moved to the top and this option will be changed to Move REACH to the Bottom 78 View Menu Change Keyboard Size REACH makes it easy to quickly change the size of your keyboard This option is available here in the View menu as well as in the Keyboard menu For information on this option see section 5 3 Keyboard Menu Change Keyboard Size 7 9 View Menu Zoom The REACH Zoom option allows you to enlarge a portion of the screen When you select the Zoom option a Zoom window appears see Figure 135 Here the user is pointing the hand shaped cursor at the H key on the REACH keyboard Like most windows you can move it by dragging its Title Bar and resize it by dragging its edges or corners C REACH Zoom Figure 135 The REACH Zoom window showing a slightly magnified view of the area around the mouse cursor When you first start Zoom the area magnified 1s the area around the mouse cursor You also can select the area around the text caret to be magnified Finally you can select both the area around the mouse cursor and the area around the text caret to be magnified at the same time Each time you select Zoom the area that you used the last time will be
60. for her contributions to the new REACH Speech Keyboard System the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard and running subjects in the experimental evaluations Megan L Schroeder for her contributions to the development of the Sound It Out keyboard and running subjects in the experimental evaluations Peter G Mack and Steve Strange for their work in the early stages of development James W Schroeder for creating the original main word prediction dictionary Michael K Young Jr and Norbert Acuna for much of the art work and Destin R Schroeder for creating several of the keyboards James E Schroeder coordinated the research design and development efforts and wrote the Help system and this User s Manual Finally sincere thanks are due to Dr Nicolas Walsh in the Department of Rehabilitation Medicine at the University of Texas Health Science Center for his tireless support of the research efforts conducted by AHF without the help and support of Dr Walsh the REACH family of products probably would not exist Opinions findings and conclusions or recommendations expressed are those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of the National Institutes of Health 19 20 1 0 Introduction 1 1 How to Use This Manual REACH 1s an accessibility toolbox full of features designed to help you gain access to conventional software without using a standard computer keyboard This manual was designed to provide quick information on the
61. is not available when you are using Inverse Single Switch Scanning The third event is Show the reverse option When this option is active a green checkmark appears to its left During scanning this option offers you the opportunity to change the direction of scanning for rows keys in a selected row or words in the word bar The reverse prompt will only be presented when there are at least five options available You also can assign specific sound files or speech to be played for any of these general scanning events For more information on how to do that see the section above entitled Options for Audible Sounds and Speech Prompts Note Scanning should not be used with any Assess Tasks see section 4 7 Options Menu Assess Note For an overview of how to use scanning in REACH see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards 2 11 2 2Settings Scanning Switches Figure 24 shows the Switches page of Settings where you can indicate which switch or switches you will be using when scanning FAI REACH Startup e ba Select where the switch input will be coming from Programs eee Scanning Prompts amp 1 F Mouse Port Click Assist D O Game Port Joystick 3 Wobble a las On the following page you can customize your click style if you al Home Keyboard have trouble making a distinct single click 4 m ni gt Cancel Figure 24 The Scanning Switches page of Settings REACH accepts switc
62. it is recommended that you occasionally make backup copies of the Main Dictionary as well as any other dictionaries you are using to learn an easy way to make backup copies see section 8 3 8 Loading Saving Dictionaries 194 Graduated Dictionary Editor The REACH Main Dictionary can be adjusted for different levels of vocabulary Based on the descriptions provided below select the level that seems best for you Then try it for a while to see how it works If words that you use a lot are not available come back and raise the level if there are many words that you never use come back and lower the level Level 1 Core Vocabulary 7 800 Words Level 2 Intermediate 18 600 Words C Level 3 Advanced 34 000 Words C Level 4 College 45 800 Words Figure 139 Picture of Graduated Dictionary Editor dialog box The user dictionary is an empty user dictionary that comes with REACH Word Prediction When you click on the N Add Word Word button or click on the Click here to add message that appears in the word prediction window when an unknown word is typed see section 8 3 3 Adding Changing Deleting Words the word just typed usually will be added to a user dictionary Specifically when you use one of these methods to add a word REACH will put the new word in the first dictionary found with a name that begins with user If the userl dictionary is the only user dictionary open then the word will
63. keep no copies of the software and You stop using this program because You no longer own a license If You purchased a site license for multiple licenses all licenses must be transferred HOWEVER d You may not sell copies of keyboards made with this product royalty free If You would like to sell any such keyboards contact AHF for information on royalty charges If You would like to make a keyboard that You have created available for others free of charge contact AHF or visit the AHF web site e You may not sell copies of dictionaries made with REACH Interface Author royalty free If You would like to sell any such dictionaries contact AHF for information on royalty charges If You would like to make a dictionary that You have created available for others free of charge contact AHF or visit the AHF web site f You may not lease or rent this software for use by another person company organization or any other entity g You may not sublicense this software program to any person company organization or any other entity h You may not sell lease rent or use any of the artwork keyboard files pictures sound files cursor files documentation or dictionaries provided with this software program These materials are provided for the duration of Your license and are for Your personal use only and shall be used only in conjunction with this software product 1 You may not further distribute the Microsoft Text to Speech E
64. keyboard you were using when you last exited REACH or you can select a specific keyboard Suggestion Consider selecting the specific keyboard that you use the most It might be the Home keyboard or it might be a typing keyboard Remember that you can always get to your Home keyboard quickly by pressing the Home button FR REACH Startup 1 Keyboards Programs a J When REACH starts I want to loadthe Scanning E mA Eh AO o E pee Home Keyboard Last Keyboard I was using Keyboard of my choosing Favorites o Word Predictior Figure 17 The REACH Startup Keyboards page of Settings 2 11 1 2Settings REACH Startup Programs On the REACH Startup Programs page of Settings you can select one or more programs that you want REACH to automatically load when REACH first starts Figure 18 shows the Programs page of Settings When you first select this Settings page REACH searches your computer for executable programs and lists them along with a representative icon in the list box on the left side see Figure 18 Use the scroll buttons to browse this 50 list When you find a program you want started first select it by clicking on it and then press the Add button to add it to the list of programs to be started automatically shown on the right side of Figure 18 ee settings REACH Startup ES You can launch one or more programs when REACH
65. keys that when pressed speak expressions appropriate to that category e g May I have a glass of water please See section 5 2 13 7 REACH Speech Keyboard System Feature for more on this system and how to expand or modify the base system Seventh the third Speech Keyboard System that comes with REACH is the REACH Phrase Builder This system uses a special user dictionary and special form of abbreviation expansion to let you quickly locate the phrase or sentence you want to speak See section 5 2 13 8 Other REACH Speech Keyboards for more on this system and how to expand or modify the base system Note In order for a key to provide speech output key speech must be turned on in the Options menu when turned on it reads Turn Key Speech Off Also the master sound switch in the Options menu must be turned on when turned on it reads Turn Sounds Off Finally when authoring a key the When pressed speak the contents of the key box must be checked in the Key Action dialog box for that key in the Keyboard Author or when Hot Authoring 44 2 0 The REACH Button Bar i CO Fo amp Double Drag Right Last Home Settings Program Hide AS B Menu i Sentence Highlight Figure 15 REACH Interface Author Standard Button Bar Note The above picture and the order of the buttons discussed in the following sections is based on the default order of buttons present when REACH is fi
66. middle section the dictionaries are listed If a dictionary s icon appears to be an open book e g the user dictionary then that dictionary is open If it appears to have a closed book e g the speech2 dictionary then it is closed In the middle portion of the Dictionary Manager dialog box icons are presented to show you 1 which dictionaries are available and 2 which dictionaries currently are open 1 e whether the dictionary book icons are shown as open books or closed books Here you can quickly open close dictionaries by first selecting a dictionary by clicking on it and then open close it by clicking on it again After installation seven dictionaries are available Figure 138 The Main Dictionary has different vocabulary levels available Click on the main dictionary icon then the Edit button and the Graduated Dictionary Editor dialog box is presented see Figure 139 which allows you to select the best vocabulary size for your situation For more information on the Graduated Dictionary see section 1 2 2 2 Graduated Dictionary While you cannot change the number of words or the actual words in the Main Dictionary the word frequencies which determine how quickly a word is displayed can change a great deal if you have the learning option s active see section 2 11 10 5 Settings Word Prediction More Options see the Learning options Consequently in order to retain information learned by REACH about your use of words
67. need select a larger dictionary or one that allows more variation IF there are many words that you never Use select a smaller dictionary size IF the words presented don t seem right tey a dictionary that accepts less variation Mote The dictionaries take time to load the First time C 107 800 Words and More Variation in Pronunciation 2 7 800 Words and Less Variation in Pronunciation C 318 600 Words and More Variation in Pronunciation f 416 600 Words and Less Variation in Pronunciation Figure 162 Graduated Dictionary Editor Dialog Box for the Main Phonetic Dictionary 11 6 Questions and Answers e What is the goal of this program The goal of this program is to help people correctly identify and spell a word that they are seeking It is especially targeted for someone who has difficulty spelling correctly but who can report the sounds in the word being sought the target word AHF has conducted research showing that this program can significantly help such people spell words correctly e What about homographs how does this product handle words that are spelled the same but pronounced differently and have different meanings e g I already read it versus may I read it This product provides alternative phonetic paths which match the different pronunciations In the read example there is at least one path that offers the long E sound and at least one for the short E sound One interesting benefit to t
68. never Use come back and lower the level a Level 1 Core Vocabulary 7 800 Words 5 Level 2 Intermediate 16 600 Words Level 3 Advanced 34 000 Words a Level 4 College 45 800 Words Figure 8 Picture of the Graduated Dictionary Editor dialog box Now select the vocabulary you want to try by clicking on the radio button to its left You might want to experiment with the different levels Note Ifyou are using REACH primarily as a speech augmentation tool remember that most people even adults use a relatively small number of words when communicating so you might want to select Level 1 or Level 2 and reserve the two larger dictionaries for when you are writing It is unlikely that the Level 4 dictionary would be appropriate for anything other than fairly sophisticated writing 29 Note No matter which level you select you probably will have to add words to your user dictionary using 1 the N Add Word 4 ord button on the Button Bar clicking on the Click here to add message that appears in the word prediction window when an unknown word is typed or by using the Dictionary Manager This is especially true for proper nouns e g names of family friends locations because only very common names and places were included in the Main dictionary 1 2 2 3 Associated Dictionaries In REACH you can associate one or more dictionaries with a specific keyboard For example if you have create
69. ococccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 68 2 11 71 Settings Smart Lists Point and Click Available only if you purchased Smart Lists M 68 2 11 7 2 Settings Smart Lists Scanning Available only if you purchased Smart Lists eee 69 2117 3 Settings Smart Lists Appearance Available only if you purchased Smart Lists 70 2 11 7 4 Settings Smart Lists Dynamic Labeling Available only if you purchased Smart Lists 71 DIB SELLOS Home RD a ai Anna 12 Z 11 9 Settings Favorite Procrais gaan cieccanuiatpanicasaantneieanaienaniuiatabencasaobaeeioamaleaamiuiaelenasaaetiarmnaetanees 73 2 11 10 Settings Word PTC CIC OU rd ca 74 2 11 10 1 Settings Word Prediction Caret Tracking coccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 75 2 11 10 2 Settings Word Prediction Word Size COM is 77 2 103 Setungs Word Predictron VIEW Ea 78 211 104 Settings Word Predicwon Options AAA 78 2 11 10 5 Settings Word Prediction More OPtiONS cococccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 79 20 6 Settings Word Prediction Punca oi 22 ss ceca erwcih a bs 81 AILIO Settings Word Prediction Numbering ii 81 2 11 10 8 Settings Word Prediction Word TlIPpS cccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 82 2 11 10 9 Settings Word Prediction Quick WordS
70. of ere view of Words Words 4 Options 25 sE E More Optio a EME i am an as at be by do go he if in is It me e Punctuation my no of oh on or so to up us we Numbering WordTips a PA vores Change the GluickWords in the box above Separate each word with a comma ey Hot Keys a Ah Cancel Figure 53 The word prediction QuickWords page of the Settings dialog box Click on the Quick Words category and options are presented for changing the quick words that are listed when you have finished a word or sentence see Figure 53 When REACH Word Prediction senses that you have completed a word e g a space or punctuation mark is typed REACH presents frequently used English words and most common English two letter words as QuickWords so you type them quickly If you find that you are not using the words that come with REACH and you would rather have other words e g names of family and friends etc open the QuickWords page of the Settings dialog box see Figure 53 and change the words that are displayed You also can enter entire sentences instead of individual words however they cannot contain a comma You are allowed up to 25 words sentences You can change the words that are presented However because REACH word prediction comes with all 25 quick words pre loaded you will have to delete replace some of the words that are there To edit the words in the list simply click i
71. of scores Median A measure of central tendency the 50th percentile score at which 50 of the measures were smaller Standard Deviation A measure of the variability of the scores In this case the unbiased estimate of the population standard deviation 107 False Starts A false start is when you make a response before being instructed to make the response Proportion Correct The exact definition varies depending on the task In general an item 1s correct when you were instructed to make a specific response and you made that response e g pressing Q when you were asked to press Q in the Letters Task Proportion Correct is the quotient of the number of such correct responses divided by the total number of opportunities Hence it ranges from 0 0 no correct responses to 1 0 all correct responses Click Errors An error usually indicating that you have manipulated the pointer button too soon e g clicking before reaching the target box on the Point and Click Task or releasing the switch before reaching the target box in the Drag Task 4 7 4 Descriptions of the Assess Tasks The assessment tasks were designed to help determine what computer hardware software configuration is the best for an individual For example the first three tasks Button Click Button Double Click and Button Release can help determine which type of switch is best The next three tasks Point Point and Click and Drag can be used to help decide whi
72. of words instead of selecting the next letter as in conventional typing Phonetic Typing is a new approach to typing in which the user types by selecting the sounds in a word instead of the letters While designed for persons with spelling disabilities the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard can be useful to anyone who knows how a word sounds but not how it is spelled Finally the Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols options are discussed The classic Large set of 6 000 pictures or the Small set of 2 800 pictures those pictures used in the REACH Speech Keyboard System can be purchased as add ons If purchased the 120 speech keyboards automatically load their keys with appropriate pictures 21 1 2 1 1 Smart Key Technology Add On The Smart Keys add on is an approach intended to 1 help anyone find the next letter in a word more quickly 2 reduce the number of times you accidentally click on the wrong key and 3 help persons who use a scanning input method to type more quickly in a completed experiment a 41 increase in typing rate was found for persons using Smart Keys compared to using REACH without Smart Keys M Smart Keys uses letter prediction to determine which letters follow the letters you have already typed based on the words in the dictionary 1es you have open Once likely letters are determined the other letters can be removed grayed out or their color changed to help direct yo
73. option was selected when the user last exited REACH or when the Main dictionary is opened The words in the Main Dictionary cannot be changed deleted or added to However the corresponding word frequency values change constantly if the word learning options are being used Consequently although the words are the same for the original main dic on the installation disk and the main dic file in the user s computer the word frequency values could be very different For this reason it is wise to occasionally make a backup of main dic and store it in a safe place so that what has been learned about your word usage can be restored 1f something happens to main dic i e reinstall REACH and then copy the backup main dic using the Load Save dictionary option If REACH is reinstalled the original word frequency values will be restored and any modifications due to word learning will be lost maximize A window is maximized when it has been enlarged to fill the entire display or as large as it can get This is done by clicking on the Maximize button in the top right corner of most application windows mean A measure of central tendency the arithmetic average sum of the scores divided by the number of scores median A measure of central tendency the 50th percentile score at which 50 of measures were greater and 50 smaller Memory Assessment Keyboards A term describing a type of keyboard that can be used to measure or prac
74. or settings on the Smart Keys page only a brief description of what Smart Keys does All the settings for Smart Keys are found on the two subcategory pages see next two sections a o Smart K keys that ch hen they d follow the mart Keys dre keys That change when the o not follow the letters Keyboards Y j 3 Y you have already typed For example they can remove themselves Programs from the keyboard type an H and only the vowels remain er Scanning A Dwell Smart Key Technology can improve your typing rate because It is easier to find the next key You aren t as likely to miss your target and type a wrong key ve Smart Keys fa How They when scanning only the likely keys are scanned so you don t waste time fa Other Settil A Smart Lists P E Home Keyboard Find all the Smart Key options on the How They Display and Other ma as Settings pages of Settings Word Predietior a U Salad e Figure 33 The main Smart Keys page of Settings 65 2 11 6 1 Settings Smart Keys How They Display Available only if you purchased Smart Keys M In general Smart Key Technology attempts to guide you to the next key you are typing However there are several ways this can be done and it is probably best if you try the different methods to see what works best for you Click on the How They Display category of Smart Keys settings and various options for displaying Smart Keys are p
75. played when you point at the phonetic keys Selecting the Change Phoneme Key Sound option on the Keyboard menu produces a dialog box where you can preview and select the type of sound you want to hear played when you point at the phonetic keys with your mouse For more information on this option see Section 11 4 2 Selecting a Phonetic Sounds Theme for the Sounds Played when Pointing at a Key 184 6 0 REACH Menu Bar Pointer wf Click Double Click Drag w Lett Button Right Button Dwell Switch Wobble Change Cursor Figure 132 The Pointer menu in the REACH Menu Bar The Pointer Menu see Figure 132 provides options related to your pointing device 6 1 Pointer Menu Click REACH provides Click Double Click and Drag options to help if you have difficulty performing any of these windows operations By default REACH is set to the single Click left mouse button mode because most pointer operations involve a single click response Selecting this option is the same as pressing the Double button on the REACH Button Bar until it says Double instead of Once or Lock The Click option in the Options Menu is provided so that you can return to the more typical single click mouse button mode after being in Double Click Lock mode or Drag Lock mode see next two sections 6 2 Pointer Menu Double Click When the Double Click option is selected from the Options Menu REACH emulates doub
76. pointing and clicking on them with a pointer Also macro functions can be performed by clicking on keys You can use a mouse or any other pointer that emulates a mouse e g light pen optical head tracker eye gaze system track ball joy stick etc With the Scanning Keyboard options you can type by using one or two switches At the simplest level REACH allows you to point and click on keys which then perform functions such as sending a character or word to a selected application program e g a word processing program However REACH goes far beyond that REACH was designed using a human factors approach in which the designers concentrated on the target user population worked with them asked for their opinion measured their performance under different conditions etc in order to determine their needs capabilities and preferences As a result a great deal of thought and planning went into this product to make it something that is easy to use and useful 1 2 1 Assistive Add On s for REACH Version 5 REACH is a powerful assistive program by itself but there are add on modules available that target specific needs In the following sections Smart Keys and Smart Lists are presented as examples of technology that can accelerate your typing speed and increase accuracy Next Dynamic Labeling is discussed Although it is part of Smart Lists it is targeted for users who prefer to type by selecting the beginnings
77. provides a good way to compare your point and click performance when using different pointer alternatives For example if a mouse track ball and light pen are all reasonable candidates for you then you can test to see which one of these pointers yields the fastest pointing and clicking speed and highest accuracy 109 However before deciding on a pointer and switch combination it is recommended that some of the other Assess tasks also be administered especially Click Double Click Release Point Drag Letters Numbers Words and Wobble because there is more to Windows operations than simply pointing and clicking Also other factors besides speed and accuracy should be considered expense availability subjective feelings about ease of use and comfort medical considerations input from an expert etc See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Point and Click Task 1s selected 4 7 4 6 Drag Task This task is intended to help determine your ability to use a pointer while dragging In order for the pointer to work with REACH it must simulate a mouse pointer and the switch being used must emulate a left mouse button click in Microsoft Windows The Drag Task provides a good way to compare your dragging performance when using different pointer alternatives For example if a mouse track ball and light pen are all reasonable candidates for you then you can
78. required REACH provides the Hide keyboard Hide button Pressing this button completely hides the keyboard and REACH Word Prediction More specifically 1f your keyboard is docked and you press the Hide button Ear gt Pressing the resulting Show 3H8 keyboard button brings the keyboard back and REACH attempts to resize the application appropriately 1f the keyboard 1s docked 95 Hint If a window especially dialog boxes was visible and then it disappeared probably when you moved the mouse onto the keyboard it probably is being hidden by the keyboard You can try bringing it back by pointing above the keyboard which will pop it back to the top or hiding the keyboard Hint Ifyou think a program should be on top but you cannot see it and the keyboard you have loaded is large you might have to hide the keyboard select a smaller keyboard or resize the large keyboard to make it smaller so that you can see the application Hint To maximize the viewing area of the application program hide the keyboard and press the Menu button until both the keyboard and Menu Bar are hidden Note The REACH Button Bar can only be hidden by pressing the Ctrl Alt and h for hide keys at the same time Bring the button bar back by pressing the Ctrl Alt and h again Note IfREACH maximizes a program that you do not want maximized click on the Restore 2 button in the top right corner of the maximized window 2 14
79. responsible for any damage created by macro keys Legal Notice The REACH Keyboard Author feature is for use only by individuals who have purchased REACH It is provided for creating custom keyboards for your personal use on one computer system Sale or distribution of REACH keyboards without the consent of and agreement with Applied Human Factors Inc AHF is strictly prohibited If you have created a keyboard that you believe has commercial potential contact AHF for information on licensing information If you have created a keyboard that is to be used by you or your company on several computer systems for example to be used for easier database entry by several employees in your 113 company or organization then you are free to do so but you must have a registered REACH program for each computer being used If you have created a keyboard which you would like to share with other REACH users for no cost for example a quiz keyboard that has potential in non profit educational settings then contact AHF for information on how to submit your keyboard for possible inclusion on AHF s Keyware M catalog offered over the Internet if you approve your name will be included as the author File Edit Tools Help ee EZM a a a a a T Ca i Key Palette Y Full Screen Y Lopo Pe aste E Jelete Background can Expert Ordo Figure 71 REACH Keyboard Author window containing the Menu Bar top and Button Bar bottom
80. scanning 1s just like Single Switch scanning except you hold your switch to start the scanning process and then release the switch to make your selection To pause scanning in any scanning mode move the pointer to the Stop scanning __ button and click on it Scanning then will pause While scanning is paused you can use the REACH Menu most of the REACH buttons and make changes in the current application To resume scanning press the Start scanning from the Scanning Menu button To completely turn off scanning select No Scanning For more information on using scanning see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards Note Scanning Keyboards should not be used with the assessment tasks the REACH Assess option because both require precise timing 9 1 Scanning Menu No Scanning To completely turn scanning off and return the REACH Button Bar to its non scanning appearance select the No Scanning option in the Scanning Menu a checkmark will appear in front of No Scanning 211 9 2 Scanning Menu Single Switch Scanning To prepare your system to begin single switch scanning select the Single Switch Scanning option in the Scanning menu When you select this option you will notice that your REACH Button Bar changes 1 The Double Drag and Right buttons are removed to create more room on the Button Bar and because they are unlikely to be useful during scanning 2 The Settings button is moved to the left and a
81. scanning instructions are deleted To create or modify a keyboard s scanning instructions press the Scan Expert 223 Exe button Normally you will not want to use this option until you are fairly confident that no more keys will be removed or added When you press the Scan Expert button the Scanning Expert dialog box is presented see Figure 111 scanning Expert Seanning Status a Hide Momentarily Step Make a scanning row Select a group of keys using the mouse Then press the Make button Step 2 Type in the space below to speak a description for this row 50y Sound Step i Repeat steps l and 2 until you re finished When done press the Done button To remove a scanning row Click on a row that you have already designated as a scanning row Then press the Remove button Figure 111 The Scanning Expert dialog box before any rows have been selected To create scanning instructions for the keyboard being authored use the following steps 1 Select the keys on the keyboard that you want to comprise the first row You can drag your mouse over a contiguous set of keys to select them You also can click on a key hold the Shift key down and click other even non contiguous 161 keys to include them in a row When included in the new row a thin pink border will appear around each key When you are happy with the selection press the Make button 2 In Step 2 you can type in text
82. seconds a a Highlight the first key na row for 1 00 seconds E Dwell 2 Highlight all other keys for 1 00 seconds ed wobble Ar Prompt me to stay in the a row for 1 50 seconds PF View ih When the above event occurs REACH can play a sound or speak to you A Smart Lists Below select the sound or enter the speech prompt that you want P Home Keyboard ie Sound A Favorites 3 DA _ Speech x Soe Figure 20 The Prompts amp Timing page of Settings with the Keyboard scanning options shown As shown in Figure 20 the events for which time can be adjusted for keyboard scanning include how long the first keyboard row is offered how long the subsequent keyboard rows are offered how long the first key in a selected row is offered and how long subsequent keys in a selected row are offered To adjust any of these times first click on the event you want to change then click on the increase El button or decrease hd button to the right of the list of events to adjust to the desired time One prompt option is available Prompt me to stay in the row When this option is active a green checkmark appears to its left When scanning this option offers the user a chance to stay in the selected row rather than returning to scanning all the rows This can save time if for example you selected the right row but you missed the key in that row because you can click when the prompt is offered and repeat that row rather than
83. sei as ee Changing a Word section above click on the word and then press the Delete Delete button The word disappears from the word list and from the text entry box Note All word changes made appear to occur immediately However changes are not saved in the dictionary until NE the Done Pene button is pressed Note All word deletions only affect the currently selected dictionary If a word is to be deleted from more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the deletions made in each dictionary 8 3 4 Adding Changing Deleting Abbreviations REACH provides a typing shortcut that is commonly called abbreviation expansion With this shortcut an entire phrase sentence or even short paragraph up to 500 characters total length including all text and spaces can be saved in a dictionary and when selected typed automatically without the abbreviation In abbreviation expansion you assign an abbreviation a short text string to a sentence and then instead of typing the entire sentence you simply type the abbreviation and then select it from the word boxes You also can attach sound files or both text strings and sound files to abbreviations see Attaching Sound Files to Abbreviations in this same section below You might want to use abbreviation expansion when for example you frequently need to type the sentence We appreciate the information but we are not making any new purch
84. selected key However there are times when you might want to change something about all the keys e g their color their label size etc Select the second option to change the selected key s label what it says 39 The third option lets you add a picture to the key s face or change the picture that is there The fourth option lets you assign a sound to be played when the key 1s pressed choose one of the sounds that comes with REACH or record your own The fifth option lets you change what the key does when it is pressed its key action 1 e what the key does when it is pointed at or pressed Select it and the Key Action dialog box is shown see Figure 13 below where you can change the text typed or macro executed when that key 1s pressed see section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action for more information on changing a key s action Key Acti on farman Figure 13 Key Action dialog box used to change the actions of the key when it is pressed The last Get a keyboard option allows you to form a link to another keyboard so that when the selected key is pressed it loads another keyboard When you are happy with the changes you have made press the OK button Ifyou change your mind and do not want to make any changes press the Cancel button For information on how to use the main REACH Keyboard Author to make more extensive changes to keyboards or create new keyboards see section 5 2 Keyboard
85. selected or typed frequently and decreased for words which are never selected or typed The rate at which word frequency values are increased for selected or typed words is called the learning rate learning words All words in the Main or User Dictionary have corresponding word frequency values the higher the value the more frequently it is used and the faster it will appear as an alternative Two learning words options are available which allow these frequencies to be adjusted based on how often a word is selected or typed In either case the learning options cause the more frequently used words to appear faster than the less frequently used words list box In windows a box or window that contains a list of items which can be reviewed Often if the list is too long for all the items to appear at once a scroll bar is provided so that the user can move up and down the list An item in the list usually can be selected by pointing and clicking on it main dic The name of the file that contains the REACH Main Dictionary is main dic It is located in the Bin subfolder of the Reach5 main folder Main Dictionary The Main Dictionary contains over 11 000 of the most frequent English words along with corresponding word frequency values The Main Dictionary is used by REACH when Main is selected in the Dictionary Editor dialog box The file containing this information main dic is loaded into memory when REACH is started if the Main
86. state You can do this by pressing the Sounds and Speech button on the Key Details tool bar Note that this button is grayed out if you are in the Normal key state because you cannot have a sound played in the normal key state You must first use the key state A button to change to either the Pointed At or Pressed key states before this option is available When you press the Sounds and Speech button a drop down list of three options is presented No Sounds an option that deletes any existing sounds Sounds and Speech see next two sections for details Sounds Option If you select the Sounds option then the Sounds Gallery dialog box is presented see Figure 91 Here a list is presented containing the sounds available in the Reach5 Sounds folder You can scroll down to look for the sound you are seeking To preview a sound just click on it You also can move to a different folder by selecting one of the different Categories subfolders shown on the left side of the dialog box In addition you can search for the sound you are seeking by entering a key word into the text box on the right side and pressing the Find It button Note Clicking on a sound name previews that sound If you don t find a sound that is good for your situation you can press the Record L button and make your own your hardware system must be capable of recording sounds e g it must have a microphone When you press the Record button th
87. the current key state Pointed At or Pressed The fourth picture layout button provides four options related to how the picture is displayed on the key plus a Cancel option if you change your mind If you select the Stretch option then rectangles appear on the four corners of the selected picture You can drag any of these rectangles to stretch it to the size and shape you want to appear on keyboard Of course you also can drag the picture to a new location if you want to If you want to return to the picture s original size and shape select the No Stretch option To have REACH automatically stretch the picture to fit on the keyboard background select the Stretch to Fit option Finally if you select the Tile option the picture is painted repeatedly on the keyboard background until it fills up the entire key s face see Figure 90 Figure 90 Example of a picture of an apple that is tiled on a key Remove Picture Select this option if you want to delete the current key picture Use the Select Picture option to replace the current picture with another picture Exit Key Picture Editor Button Press the exit background editor be button when you have finished editing the picture on the selected key to return to the keyboard foreground 137 5 2 6 4 Key Details Key Sound and Speech If you would like a key to play a sound when a key is pointed at or iil simply assign a sound file wav file to that key
88. the key is pressed As with all word keys the text output can be typed spoken if you have a speech synthesizer that is Microsoft SAPI compliant and speaks the selected language or both typed and spoken Fora limited demonstration of an Interpreter Keyboard load the Spanish Sample Translation keyboard Note The accuracy of speech pronunciation depends on the speech synthesizer s ability to speak the selected language 5 2 13 10 Musical Keyboards If your computer can play sound wav files REACH keyboards can simulate simple musical instruments Just make a keyboard and assign musical notes recorded as wav files to the keys For an example load the REACH Piano keyboard Notice that this keyboard has been authored to physically resemble a piano keyboard see Figure 119 When you point at a key on the piano keyboard it shows you the name of the key When you press the key a simulated piano note is played and the corresponding note is displayed on the musical scale see Figure 119 While this Musical Keyboard is far from perfect e g notes of varying duration cannot be played it does provide a tool for playing music and learning the names sounds and musical representations of some musical notes 5 2 13 11 Quiz Keyboard Keyboards REACH keyboards can be used in educational or training settings One such application is the Quiz Keyboard One advantage of using a REACH Quiz Keyboard is that with the appropriate speech
89. the picture automatically is saved as a bitmap 1 e a bmp file After you have selected the proper Category and given the picture a name click on the Save button to complete the process The new picture now is displayed on the key face If you change your mind about using the new picture click on the Close option Positioning the Picture Once a picture has been selected for your key you can click on it and drag it to a new location as long as you are still in the Key Details tool bar mode When you click on the picture to drag it to the new location the Key Picture tool bar see Figure 89 is displayed Also your mouse cursor will change to two double arrows when pointing at the picture This is a cue that you now can drag the picture to the new location When you are finished editing the key picture press the key picture finished button click on another key or click on the keyboard background to exit the picture editor After you have added a picture to your key face two additional options are made available in the drop down option list that appears when you click on the key picture Al button on the Key Details tool bar Edit the Picture and Remove Picture see next sections Edit the Picture Selecting this option produces the Key Picture current key state tool bar see Figure 89 Figure 89 The Key Picture tool bar 136 Five buttons are available on this tool bar First the picture bu
90. the size of which can be set by the dictionary s author For example in the REACH main dictionary the user can select from the four different vocabulary levels created by its author grayed out In REACH and most application programs most menu options are printed in black text If you find a menu option button etc that is printed in gray so that it almost looks blurred then it is grayed out This means that option is not a possible alternative at the moment group align Lines a number of items up in a row In the REACH Keyboard Author feature the Align button allows you to line up a group of keys horizontally or vertically hardware requirements The minimum computer hardware necessary to successfully run a program e g REACH For REACH the hardware requirements are specified in section at the beginning of this manual entitled Hardware Software Requirements highlighted In most applications when you drag over text e g to select copy or delete it the selected text will be highlighted e g the color of the words and their background will reverse so that you can easily see what has been selected In REACH you can highlight text in an application and then speak it by pressing the speak Highlighted button homophone A word that sounds like one or more other words such as to and two homophone hint A short phrase included with words in the phonetic dictionary that sound like other words These are i
91. the text entry box labeled Word in the upper right corner of the Dictionary Editor dialog box see Figure 141 If the flashing text caret is not there point and click in the text box REACH automatically will open the appropriate page for the first letter typed If the word you are adding is one that you will use very frequently select the Very Often option under How often is the word used If the new word is used frequently select the Often alternative If the new word is not used very often select the Occasionally alternative this 1s the default value Add Finally press the Add button and the new word disappears from the text entry box and appears in the list of words in the list box When you have finished adding words press the Done E button to exit the Dictionary Editor dialog box All word additions only affect the currently selected dictionary If a word is to be added to more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the new word added to each dictionary using the Dictionary Editor The AutoEdit dictionary only contains abbreviations and it will not allow you to add anything but abbreviation Note Always remember to press the Add button before moving on to another word REACH will not add a word unless you press the Add button Changing a Word To change a word that is already in the User Dictionary first find the word to be changed You can do this by either clicking o
92. they are selected from a word prediction box or when they are pointed at for a period of time In the Keyboard section you can turn on a feature that speaks the name of the key or plays speech or sounds that have been assigned to the Pointed At key state when the keyboard was authored If the Speak play sounds when pointed at option is selected then the speech or sound will be played after the time shown to the right Turn this option on by clicking on the checkbox until a checkmark appears You also can adjust how long you point at the key before the sound 1s played by clicking on the increase El button or decrease bd button to the right of the setting Note Itis possible that the time delay setting can be overridden by a setting that can be made in Keyboard Details when the keyboard is authored see section 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard 86 The Auditory Scanning Keyboard option refers to a unique feature in REACH that attempts to read a key when offered during scanning regardless of how that key was authored For example if no speech or sound was assigned to the pointed at state of a key when it was authored then REACH will read its label Having the label read aloud can be useful for persons not familiar with key options or for persons with limited vision It also can save keyboard authoring time Turn this option on by clicking on the checkbox in front of Auditory Scanning Keyboard until a checkmark appears Th
93. to reach the near targets is displayed along with the mean time to reach the far targets The number of false starts is reported starting before the instruction Go is presented Finally for the Point and Click and Drag Tasks the number of Click Errors is displayed For the Point and Click Task this is the number of trials on which the pointer switch was clicked when the pointer cursor was not on the target square For the Drag Task a click error is when the pointer switch is released when the pointer cursor is not on the target square such trials are repeated in the Drag Task Letters Numbers and Words Task Data The measures reported are the mean median and standard deviation across all conducted trials The time measure is from the Go instruction until the entire response is completed 1 e letter typed number typed or word typed In the Words Task three letter consonant consonant consonant CCC words are used to provide relatively novel and unpracticed typing material The proportion correct ranging from 0 0 to 1 0 is presented as an index of accuracy The number of false starts is reported starting before the instruction Go Wobble Task Data For the Wobble Task the mean and median standard deviation a measure of variability are presented for both horizontal X and vertical Y variability Statistics Reported Mean A measure of central tendency the arithmetic average sum of the scores divided by the number
94. to and double clicks continue to be simulated until the button 1s pressed a third time returning the system to the standard single click mode With REACH s Smart Sticky Keys if you have selected either the single or locked double click options and then point at and click on a menu option REACH key button etc for which a double click does not normally apply then 1 the picture on the double click button changes to and 2 a single click is sent instead of a double click 2 3 Button Drag The smart mouse mouse button emulator also can be used to simplify a dragging operation When the Drag button is pressed once its appearance changes to The next time you point and click in the application a dragging operation is started and the button is held down automatically until you press the pointer s switch a second time At that time the Once label returns to Drag and the system is returned to standard single click mode If the Drag button is pressed twice in a row the label changes to Lock and drags continue to be simulated until the drag Lock button is pressed a third time returning the system to standard single click operation With REACH s Smart Sticky Keys if you have selected either the single or locked drag options and then point at and click on a menu option REACH key button etc for which a drag does not normally apply then 1 the picture on the drag button changes to and 2 a singl
95. to move from row to row or column to column and then you use the second switch to select items For example to select the fourth key in the second row you would click your left mouse button switch once to move from row one to row two and then click the right mouse button switch to select that row Next you click the left button three times to move to the fourth key and then click the right button to type that key To use this option select Dual Switch Scanning from the Scanning menu and then click the Start scanning button on the button bar To stop scanning click the Stop scanning button on the button bar To turn dual switch scanning off pause scanning and then select No Scanning from the Scanning menu 37 1 4 3 Third Scanning Option Inverse Single Switch Scanning Use this option if you can release your switch more accurately than you can press the switch Inverse scanning is just like single switch scanning see above except instead of clicking your switch you release your switch After each selection scanning pauses until you click and hold your switch Then the computer starts offering you different options based on a set time interval e g each row or key offered for two seconds When the option you want is offered release your switch and it 1s selected To use this option select Inverse Single Switch Scanning from the Scanning menu and then click the Start scanning button on the button bar When
96. tools in the toolbox At the beginning of this manual you will find the License Agreement which includes the Limited Warranty and instructions for installing and uninstalling REACH The current section provides a general introduction to REACH using REACH s scanning keyboards using the Hot Authoring features familiarization with the Home Keyboard approach used in REACH familiarization with some of the assistive technology features that can improve your typing speed and accuracy Smart Keys Smart Lists Dynamic Labels REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard and ClickAssist and familiarization with some of the speech features available The remainder of the manual provides discussions of the various tools and how to use them Section 2 0 discusses the buttons on the REACH Button Bar Sections 3 0 through 10 0 discuss the options on the REACH Menu Bar While it is perfectly acceptable to read this manual from cover to cover it was designed to be a reference guide for finding information quickly so you might find the same information more than once Finally sections 11 0 and 12 0 provide a comprehensive Glossary and Index 1 2 What is REACH Interface Author The REACH Interface Author Software abbreviated to REACH in this User s Manual provides easier computer use for people who have difficulty using a standard keyboard By using on screen keyboards characters words sentences etc are typed by
97. type Both the number of times you select a word and the number of times you type a word 1 e select both options No learning 1 e turn off both options pe aes aie oa Note The last alternative can be useful when using REACH word prediction in research e g to ensure that all subjects receive the same alternatives or when you are about to type a large number of unusual words e g repeatedly entering the same word in a database In REACH word prediction learning is a two way process in which the word frequency values of more frequently selected typed words are increased so that those words appear more quickly 1 e word learning and the word frequency values of infrequently selected words are decreased so that those words do not appear as quickly 1 e word extinction AutoAdd Option The AutoAdd option automatically adds any word that is not found in any currently open dictionaries to the first dictionary encountered with a name that begins with the letters user Click on the checkbox in front of AutoAdd to turn this option on off Warning With this option on misspelled words are added to the dictionary AutoShow Option If word prediction is in floating mode then the AutoShow option can hide the REACH Word Prediction window until a criterion is met The criterion can be based on the number of letters typed how long you have paused since the last letter or both see Figure 49 You can adjust both n
98. which word frequency is reduced for words not selected or typed is called the extinction rate eye blink switch A switch that can be operated by blinking your eye false start In the REACH Assess tasks a false start is when you make a response before being instructed to make the response favorite program REACH allows you to select your favorite programs to be placed as keys on your favorites keyboard 235 file extension The characters that follow the period in a file name For example for the file name qwerty kbd the letters kbd are the file extension floating keyboard or word prediction Options that allow the keyboard or word prediction word bar to be moved freely about the display and not be attached docked to the button bar menu bar etc focus A term used to describe an open windows program that is receiving keyboard input You can give a program the focus make it active by pointing and clicking on its window font Font is the general style or appearance of text characters In REACH M users can select from any font types size color and style available on their computer Game Keyboard A term describing a keyboard or keyboard system that has been designed with the goal of simulating a game get keyboard option When authoring a REACH key a get keyboard option is available so that when that key is later pressed a different keyboard is loaded automatically graduated dictionary A dictionary
99. you are finished with the computer and want to do something else in addition to exiting REACH For example you might also want to exit Windows For that reason three different exit options are provided see Figure 66 The three options are 1 The Exit REACH Interface Author option exits REACH and leaves you in Microsoft Windows 2 The Exit REACH and Restart Windows option exits REACH and exits and restarts Microsoft Windows 3 The Exit REACH and Shut Down Windows exits REACH and Microsoft Windows If you choose either of the two options where Microsoft Windows is exited then you should first go through all your open applications and save any open files and exit those programs A dialog box appears warning you about what is going to happen and asks you if you are sure you want to continue If you press the Yes button the selected exit option 100 Choose How rou Want To Exit Figure 66 The Choose How You Want to Exit dialog box displayed when the Exit option is selected is carried out if you press the No button you are returned to the dialog box that lists the exit options where you can select another exit option or cancel exiting The Are you sure window is presented as a safety net in case you accidentally selected an exit option If you get tired of being asked again whether you really want to exit check the box at the bottom of the second dialog box where it says Che
100. you do you will see a message Hold your switch down to start scanning To begin scanning press and hold the left mouse button stop To stop scanning release the left mouse button and click the Stop scanning FE button on the button bar To turn inverse single switch scanning off pause scanning and then select No Scanning from the Scanning menu 1 4 4 Scanning and Smart Lists If you use scanning it is strongly recommended that you use AHF s Smart Lists Technology Patent Pending product With Smart List Technology scanning 1s made easier for you because fewer clicks are required and faster for you because you are taken through only those letters that make sense and in the order of their probability Start typing a word by using row column scanning with your favorite keyboard Once the Smart List criteria are met as defined in the Smart Lists Settings the last key typed opens up showing a list of options Scanning then resumes by offering the top item in the list and then proceeds down the list If you select the wrong list 1tem and you have the scanning Undo option turned on hold your switch closed and the last typing action will be undone If the letter you need is not offered in the list select the keyboard icon at the bottom of the Smart List and the entire keyboard will be displayed Then you can complete the word using standard row column scanning To add the word to the dictionary use the Ad
101. you want by clicking on the radio button in front of that option until a black dot appears there you can do the same thing by using the Make Word Prediction Horizontal Vertical option in the View menu To adjust the number of words displayed in horizontal mode click on the increase E button or decrease hd button 64 FA REACH Startup Keyboards REACH Word Prediction can be free floating or docked p When docked Word Prediction is always horizontal sg Ee eas When Word Prediction is free floating you may choose can Scanning between Horizontal or Vertical views O Yes I want Word Prediction to be free floating Horizontal Mumber of Words E y In vertical mode the number of words shown is determined by the height of the window You can drag the window s edges to change its height or width B Favorites Word Prediectior Double clicking the title bar changes from one view to the other Cancel Figure 32 The View Word Prediction page of Settings 2 11 6 Settings Smart Keys Available only if you purchased Smart Keys If you purchased the AHF Smart Keys add on to REACH click on the Smart Keys category on the left side of the Settings dialog box and 1 a description of Smart Key Technology appears on the right see Figure 33 and 2 the two Smart Keys subcategories appear below Smart Keys on the left How They Display and Other Settings There are no options
102. 1 7 1 Uses of Speech Feedback for Typing or manually see section 2 9 Button Sentence Speak Last Sentence Second you can prepare several sentences a speech in a word processor and then deliver the speech using the speak Highlight ghlight button option see section 2 10 Button Highlight Speak Highlighted Text Third REACH comes with a speech augmentation dictionary speech dic that was designed to provide a foundation for creating your own speech augmentation system This dictionary contains over 350 abbreviations and corresponding common sentences The abbreviations are coded so that you can quickly move to the sentence you want to speak e g 43 f is for food e is for entertainment etc See section 8 3 9 Using the REACH Speech Dictionary Feature for a more thorough discussion of the speech dictionary Fourth if you are not happy with the quality of speech that comes from a speech synthesizer REACH makes it easy for you to make recordings of a voice These recordings are attached to an abbreviation and stored in one of the REACH dictionaries With this tool you can create your own high quality speech synthesizer that uses your own voice or someone else s voice You can use the same speech coding system used in the REACH Speech Dictionary or create your own coding system For more information on how to create your own new dictionary see section 8 3 1 Creating a New Dictionary For
103. 11 3 2 Settings Dwell Pause Options Note Unfortunately Dwell might not work with some application programs especially graphics programs because of the way they were written Note The Dwell feature should not be used with some REACH Assess Tasks Button Click Button Double Click Button Release Point and Click and Drag 6 7 Pointer Menu Wobble If you are using the REACH Dwell feature see previous section and have difficulty holding your pointer in a steady position REACH has a feature that might help The Wobble option helps reduce the unsteadiness that can interfere with your pointing Wobble smoothes the mouse cursor so that it is easier to maintain a steady position while aiming When you select the Wobble option in the Pointer menu you are taken to the Wobble page of Settings where you can turn this feature on or off and adjust the settings for Wobble See section 2 11 4 Settings Wobble for more details on how to use the Wobble feature 6 8 Pointer Menu Change Cursor Cursor Gallery Find the cursor you wantto use ACUIZOr Categories Show MMe A Cursors Figure 133 The Cursor Gallery Find the cursor you want to use dialog box 187 REACH allows you to select the shape of your cursor specifically its appearance while you are pointing at the REACH keyboard Selecting the Change Cursor option in the Pointer menu displays the Cursor Gallery Selec
104. 2 1 2 2 11 7 1Settings Smart Lists Point and Click Available only if you purchased Smart Lists Figure 37 shows the settings for Smart Lists when using point and click input mode e g a mouse or head pointer The recommended settings can be quite different for scanning and point and click input When using point and click it really is more a matter of your preference Try the different settings and see what works for you 68 Step 1 Select one of the five general settings provided If you like using lists to select from try one of the last two options If you do not like lists unless they are short try one of the first three options If you select the first Always on keyboard option then you will use the keyboard Smart Keys to type until there are only words in the list presented and the list length is equal to or shorter than the number you specify in Always display a list when line see the bottom of Step 1 Step 2 Select whether items in the lists are ordered alphabetically or by their probability of use For point and click it really is a matter of preference unlike in scanning where listing by probability is highly recommended For point and click many people prefer an alphabetical order because they are familiar with visually searching such lists e g in phone books yje A Smart Lists for Pont amp Click BP Word Predict tepl Select the option that best describes your preference Always on
105. 4 7 4 3 Button Release Task This task is designed to help determine your ability to release a closed switch a response required when you drag the mouse cursor In order for the switch to work with REACH it must simulate a left button mouse click in Microsoft Windows The Button Release Task provides a good way to compare your performance on different switches For example if a mechanical switch physical contact and puff sip switch are all available candidates for you then you can assess your button releasing performance with each device to help decide which switch is the best for you However before deciding on a switch it is recommended that some of the other Assess tasks also be administered especially Click Double Click Point and Click and Drag because there is more to Windows operations than simply releasing a switch Also other factors besides speed should be considered expense availability subjective feelings about ease of use and comfort medical considerations input from an expert etc Note Ifyou find that you are much better at the Release task than the Click task then consider 1 using inverse single switch scanning if you using a scanning input method and 2 using the ClickAssist I miss the target option if you are using a point and click input method See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Button Release Task is
106. 587 on the Keyboard Author Button Bar REACH will make a copy of the selected key and place it on top a the es that was copied Move your mouse to the keyboard and you will find that the copy will get attached to the mouse cursor Move the copied key to the desired location and when you click your mouse the key will be dropped there Also the Key Details Normal State tool bar will be displayed so that you can define the copied key All aspects of a key are copied 1 e colors labels actions sounds etc Note When you copy a key all labels functions sounds etc are copied Paste a Key Menu Option When you use the Copy a Key menu option or Copy Key button option REACH automatically pastes one copy of the selected key for you This option produces the same effect as the Paste Key button on the Keyboard Author Button Bar If you want to make more copies of the same key select the Paste a Key menu option Paste a Picture Menu Option If you have used any of the REACH or Windows options in which a picture gets copied into the Windows Clipboard then first selecting a key or group of keys and then selecting this option will paste that picture onto the face s of the selected key s Ifthere is no picture available in the Windows Clipboard then this option is grayed out For more information see section 5 2 1 12 Adding Clip Art or Other Pictures Note Ifyou paste a picture on a key in the Normal key state
107. 6 3 Key Details Key Picture Graphics can be pictures in one of three formats bmp wmf jpg Textual information such as letters numbers and other characters can be incorporated most easily by using the key labeling options see section 5 2 6 1 Key Details Key Label Depending on the memory task you are creating individual letters or words can be used and the information can be presented in one display or a sequence of displays 177 Memory for auditory information such as names of letters words sentences names of numbers lists of numbers etc can be assessed You can make keys that speak If your computer can play sound wav files you have another although limited speech alternative For example REACH comes with the alphabet A to Z and numbers 0 to 9 stored as wav files in the Reach5 Sounds folder These can be used with any REACH keyboard simply select the sound to be played when the key 1s pointed at or pressed see section 5 2 6 4 Key Details Key Sound and Key Speech Procedures The general procedure for a memory task is to present information wait a period of time and then test to see if the information can be recalled e g spoken or drawn recognized e g selected from a set of alternatives as in a multiple choice item or relearned more quickly than it was originally learned 1 e savings With some populations you might be interested in retention for very short periods of time If so
108. 66 168 169 176 179 181 182 183 184 191 233 keyboard shortcuts 82 84 85 246 keyboard theme 41 225 keyboard types Exploratory 33 164 165 235 Game Keyboard 33 135 163 173 174 236 Interpreter 33 163 171 172 237 Macro Keyboard 31 163 181 Memory Assessment 163 164 177 Motor Skills 163 180 181 Musical 33 163 172 239 Performance Aid 33 163 175 239 Puzzle 33 157 163 164 177 240 Quiz Keyboard 33 119 150 163 172 173 240 Reading Assistance 163 240 Scanning 21 33 35 36 51 57 78 151 161 163 175 176 211 212 213 241 Secret Code 163 176 Special 33 163 241 Speech 141 163 164 165 166 167 168 242 Standard 163 Storybook 33 135 141 150 163 173 174 242 Template 33 163 164 179 180 242 laying out keys 118 learning rate 238 Left Button 186 left button click 47 186 Legal Notice 113 193 204 205 Letters Task 105 108 110 111 License Agreement 2 3 4 5 6 21 Limited Warranty 6 21 location of window CaretTracker 76 193 Main Dictionary 80 194 196 200 207 234 238 Make 40 41 64 66 88 113 114 116 117 124 126 127 153 162 190 233 Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols 10 21 27 31 44 93 166 Menu Bar 10 21 34 45 64 96 99 113 114 116 120 153 189 190 191 Menu Bar button 189 mouse cursor 59 60 61 62 109 129 136 137 142 150 151 155 156 157 159 180 186 187
109. 7 155 always on top 233 animated keys 233 242 Assess 37 57 60 63 105 106 107 108 109 110 176 187 211 215 234 235 assessment 105 106 107 108 211 associated dictionaries 30 31 75 auditory scanning 32 36 52 54 152 176 Auditory Scanning 152 176 augmentation of speech 42 43 44 79 201 207 author 19 114 116 117 119 122 144 151 164 233 242 authoring scanning 176 AutoEdit 32 78 79 193 195 196 198 201 203 233 AutoEdit 32 79 193 195 196 198 201 203 233 AutoSpace 88 AutoType 32 42 67 68 78 79 87 96 193 200 233 AutoType 32 42 68 78 79 200 233 avi 177 233 237 avi file 233 Background 67 77 78 117 118 120 121 124 134 151 158 159 160 161 177 background color 35 48 67 77 78 124 127 134 135 137 150 151 158 159 209 237 Background Color 67 77 78 134 158 159 background picture 121 137 161 Background Picture 161 backup 129 194 207 238 balloon 32 82 83 209 233 bin 234 bmp 135 136 150 161 177 234 237 242 build dictionary 193 197 204 205 Button Bar 21 36 45 53 55 56 64 114 120 124 129 153 155 156 161 185 186 190 191 211 212 234 238 capitalization 32 caret tracking 77 209 234 CaretTracker 76 193 CaretTracker 76 193 234 Click Task 108 109 ClickAssist 21 28 29 39 58 89 90 91 92 93 94 106 109 234 color backgro
110. 8 Sound It Out 19 21 26 27 28 31 183 184 195 210 Df LAT 220 222 2230 224 225 220 221 240 sounds 87 88 Speak Highlighted 32 43 48 speak highlighted text 42 199 236 speak letters 7 42 43 44 86 speak other 7 42 43 44 86 speak sentences automatically 7 42 43 44 86 speak sentences on demand 43 speak when pointed at 207 speak words automatically 7 42 43 44 86 speak words on demand 43 Special Keyboards 163 Speech 6 7 9 32 41 42 43 44 54 55 56 57 68 79 85 86 104 120 128 138 139 141 153 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 171 178 183 196 207 208 241 242 speech augmentation 42 43 44 79 168 183 201 207 241 speech dictionary 44 241 Speech Dictionary 32 44 207 241 Speech Keyboards 44 163 168 speech options 42 85 86 104 167 speech recognition 242 speech synthesis 202 242 spelling alarm 242 spelling monitor 242 Standard Keyboard 163 start 6 7 9 35 37 38 50 52 56 61 73 79 88 97 99 106 108 114 115 124 126 129 131 134 135 143 150 157 162 164 168 176 190 191 192 197 202 211 212 213 234 235 Startup 33 49 50 51 99 242 startup options 50 99 242 statistics 106 107 steadiness 63 stop 37 38 42 55 56 68 97 104 212 213 Storybook Keyboard 33 135 141 150 163 173 174 242 strategy for authoring keyboard 114 124 248 stretch 136 137 Template
111. Button Add Word to Dictionary One of the fastest way to add a new word to your user dictionary is to first type it Because it is a word that is not in your currently open dictionaries you will have to press the Restore or Escape key to restore the keyboard if you are using Smart Keys Similarly to complete the novel word when using Smart Lists you will have to either select the N keyboard icon or press the Restore or Escape key Once the new word is completed press the Add Word 794 Word button on the REACH button bar and it is added to the first user dictionary REACH finds open If no user dictionary is open you will be asked to select one of the user dictionaries Another fast way to add a word to the user dictionary is to click on the Click here to add message that appears in the word prediction window when an unknown word is typed Do this after you have finished the word but before you type a space or punctuation mark 2 15 Button Undo Typing gt The Undo typing Ende button allows you to undo recent typing actions If you just typed a letter s you want to remove press the Undo button Also the Undo button can help if you have the REACH AutoType option on and REACH types some letters that you do not want Similarly if you have selected a word from the word prediction word bar that you do not want press the Undo button and the letters typed by word prediction will be removed Note The REACH
112. EE eaea a A 47 29 Buttons Last Cast Ie y Dona 47 2 0 Button Home Home Keyboard ur A alae read eae alae eee a erties 47 Zar Baton Nex Next Rey DO a de d 48 2 8 Button Word Speak Last Woord icone tee ree inte eae 48 29 Button Sentence Speak Last Semente an 48 2 10 Button Hichlioht Speak Highliehted AA ad 48 21L Boton A A 49 LILL Settings REACHM Startups enea e EE a EE ERE ita 50 2 11 1 1 pettiness REACH Startup Keybodi igs ete sees acto 50 Ded dig 12 Serines REACH Startup Prora as 50 XIL LS A Oe ea a 51 2 11 2 1 Settings Scanning Prompts and TIMINS occcccnnnccncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanenines 53 DL 22 SAN A PT eT 57 2 11 2 3 Settings canino CM CKACSISU sees seca ts leis A alae ae 58 208 is A A RRR nee 59 2 11 3 1 pettiness Dwel TIA A AA AA a aa 60 2413 2 pettines Dwell Pause PU ONS it 61 Dida Setimeso WoObDblS a 62 AS SS A A pantech ans clsaces nis aiedlne tana lte nran ates tances be wedt nace 63 2 11 5 1 Setas View Word Pr ICH OA A AA 64 2 11 6 Settings Smart Keys Available only if you purchased Smart Keys TM o occccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 65 2 11 6 1 Settings Smart Keys How They Display Available only if you purchased Smart Keys 66 2 11 6 2 Settings Smart Keys Other Settings Available only if you purchased Smart Keys 67 2 11 7 Settings Smart Lists Available only if you purchased Smart Lists WM
113. Expert How should size the pictures on a key for you Grow to largest Shrink to smallest Change Heights No change Grow to largest Shrink to smallest F N A Figure 102 The Sizing Expert dialog box for sizing pictures on a key 148 When selected the different Change Width and Change Height options in this window are applied to the different key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed for the selected key This is done regardless of which key state the key currently is in When you have selected the size adjustment you want press the OK button If you change your mind about sizing labels press the Cancel button Note In order for the pictures to be resized they must be in the Stretch mode If you apply the Sizing Expert to a picture or pictures that are in the No Stretch mode then REACH will change their mode to Stretch before resizing Note In order to be resized pictures cannot be in the Tile mode If you try to use the Sizing Expert on a picture that is tiled the changes will not be applied 5 2 6 7 Key Details Key Style aby Select a key or group of keys and then press the key style E button and you can determine its their key style Key style refers to a key s general appearance The standard three dimensional 3 D button appearance is the default key style This format is intended to simulate the appearance of an actual keyboard key before and
114. F created this software and grants the individual company or organization that is installing this software referred to herein as You a non exclusive license for its use if You accept all of the terms stated in this License Agreement This License Agreement is a legal contract between You and AHF A Duration of this License Agreement In all cases this License Agreement begins when You accept the terms of this License Agreement If You have purchased this product then the terms of this License Agreement continue as long as You own the product and have not transferred it to any individual company organization or other entity If You are installing this product for demonstration purposes then the terms of this License Agreement continue as long as the demonstration program allows You to run the program usually 30 days unless AHF has granted You a longer duration or has granted You a time extension for running in demonstration mode If You are installing this product as a demonstration program but later purchase this product the terms of this License Agreement continue as long as You are in the initial demonstration period end when the demonstration period ends and resume or continue after You purchase and license this product by entering a license code supplied by AHF lasting thereafter as long as You own this product and have not transferred it to any individual company organization or other entity B Accepting or Not Accepting this Li
115. Full Screen keyboard option 1s useful for some kinds of keyboards e g Puzzle Game Storybook etc it should not be used with some other types of keyboards especially typing keyboards because you will not be able to see the application you are typing to 5 2 12 3 Copy Button If you have created a key and you want to use keys of that same size color picture etc elsewhere on the keyboard first select click on the target key and then press the Copy button The key is automatically copied and when you point at the keyboard it is attached to the mouse so that you can move it to the desired location and paste it by clicking your mouse Note When using the Copy option all aspects of the key are copied size color action etc When you are creating a keyboard you should plan accordingly For example if you want to create a keyboard that has keys that are the same shape and color but not the same action then do your copying after the shape and color are determined but before the actions are defined Note You are not allowed to paste a key on top of another key Note You can copy a key and then paste 1t more than once using the Paste button see next section 5 2 12 4 Paste Button Ifyou use the Copy button to copy a key a single paste operation is built in 1 e the key is moved with your mouse cursor until you paste it by clicking your mouse However you can use the Paste button to paste addition
116. How often is the word used If it is one that is used frequently select the Often alternative If the new sentence is not used very often select the Occasionally alternative this is the default value Y Add Finally press the Add button and the new sentence disappears from the text entry box and appears in the list of words When you have finished adding sentences press the Done dialog box button to exit the Dictionary Editor Note All sentence additions only affect the currently selected dictionary Ifa sentence is to be added to more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the addition made in each dictionary Note The AutoEdit dictionary only contains abbreviations and it will not allow you to add anything but abbreviations Note Always remember to press the Add button before moving on to another sentence REACH will not add a sentence unless you press the Add button Changing a Sentence Sentences in a dictionary can be changed by selecting the desired sentence from the word list making the desired changes in the text entry box and then pressing the Change button Note Ifthe Change button is pressed the originally selected sentence will be deleted and replaced with the changed sentence If the Add button is pressed the originally selected sentence will remain in the dictionary and the modified sentence will be added as a new sentence Note All sentence changes ma
117. Menu 51 El REACH Startup Customize your Scanning Environment Keyboards Programs Scanning Method 3 Scanning No Scanning O Single Switch Scanning a Prompts amp WA Switches Dual Switch Scanning Inverse Single Switch Scanning a ease Auditory Scanning A Dwell 3 Wobble Check this box for Auditory Scanning where REACH will try to speak all prompts rows keys etc WEW fa Smart Keys o ScanBuddy B Smart Lists El Check this box to load ScanBuddy automatically when scanning P Home Keyboard starts ppn Customize scanning further on the Prompts amp Timing Switches and DA Looper ElickAssist pages of Settings E Figure 19 The main Scanning page of Settings Cancel When you start scanning the button bar will change see Figure 11 You can scan the button bar however because some of the buttons are inappropriate for scanning they have been moved to the left end of the button bar 1 e the Menu Settings and Start scanning buttons or right end of the button bar 1 e Stop scanning To see which keyboards have scanning instructions click on the Select option in the Keyboard Menu Then browse through the keyboards using the scroll bar Any keyboard file that has colored keys present on its keyboard icon has scanning instructions available If you load a keyboard that does not have scanning instructions REACH will still let you scan the word prediction bar if visible an
118. New Keyboards For reference information on the options available in the Keyboard Author Menu see section 5 2 11 or buttons on the Keyboard Author Button Bar see section 5 212 5 2 1 Basics of Keyboard Authoring Read this Section First The REACH Keyboard Author program is a powerful program that allows you to modify existing keyboards or create custom keyboards One goal of this section is to introduce you to the basic terms and concepts used throughout the following sections on keyboard authoring A second goal is to acquaint you with several of the more important tools available and provide a reference for where you can go to in this Manual to get more information 114 5 2 1 1 The Keyboard Gallery and Keyboard Families When you first start the Keyboard Author it will ask whether you want to create a new keyboard or modify an existing keyboard If you select the latter the Keyboard Gallery is displayed see Figure 73 You will see this same or similar Keyboard Gallery window in several places in REACH for example 1 In the Keyboard Author when you load a specific keyboard 2 In the Keyboard Author when you Save or Save As a new or modified keyboard 3 In the Keyboard Author or in Hot Authoring when you assign a keyboard link to a key an option that loads another keyboard when the key is pressed 4 In REACH when you choose the Select option in the Keyboard menu in order to load a different keyboard Keyboar
119. Not Repeat Any Keys option no keys are repeated when held down Note REACH does not determine the length of time the key must be held down before repetition begins Microsoft Windows already provides that adjustment go to the Control Panel and select Keyboard 2 11 14 2 Settings Keys Change Labels Select the Keys Change Labels page of Settings and options are presented for whether where to show key pictures and labels see Figure 62 92 Full Picture keys are keys on a keyboard that have a Windows Metafile picture like a Mayer Johnson picture that is set to stretch to fit the entire key Below is an example settings Tor this page do not apply to this kind of key E Favorites Word Predictior lt Speech y Sounds pl Full Picture Picture Key ClickAssist Keys Show the picture on Full Picture keys T Repeat Key For Full Picture keys choose where the label should go O Leave labels alone ClickAssist O Put label at the top of the key wt mo a O Put label at the bottom of the key Cancel Figure 62 The Change Labels page in the Settings dialog box Note Currently the following discussion only applies to pictures with wmf file formats Some of the keyboards in REACH contain keys showing wmf formatted pictures which have been authored to Stretch to Fit the key s face The most notable examples are the 120 keyboards in the REACH Speech Keyboard System if you purc
120. Prompt me to stay in Word Prediction for 2 00 seconds Select an audible prompt Sound rel Speech Figure 21 The Words section of the Prompts amp Timing page of Settings 54 These events include how long the word prediction word bar 1s offered how long the first word box is offered and how long subsequent word boxes are offered To adjust any of these times first click on the event you want to change then click on the increase El button or decrease hd button to the right of the list of events to adjust to the desired time One prompt is available Prompt me to stay in word prediction When this option is active a green checkmark appears to its left To turn this prompt on click on it until a checkmark appears to turn it off click until the checkmark is gone When scanning this option offers you a chance to stay in the word prediction word bar rather than moving on to the Button Bar This can save time for example if you correctly selected word prediction but you did not click when the target word was offered you can stay in word prediction by clicking when the prompt is offered and avoid having to go through the keyboard to get back to word prediction Note that you can adjust how long this prompt is offered You can assign specific sound files or speech to be played for any of these word prediction scanning events For more information on how to do that see the section above entitled Options for Audi
121. REACH Interface Author User s Manual Version 5 Written by James E Schroeder Ph D CHFP Mailing Address Telecommunications Applied Human Factors Inc Phone 210 408 0098 P O Box 228 FAX 210 408 0097 Helotes TX 78023 USA e mail info ahf net com Technical Support Have your license number and address ready 210 408 0098 e mail support ahf net com This manual and the enclosed software have copyrights from 1992 2007 by Applied Human Factors Inc All rights are reserved No part of this manual or software may be reproduced electronically or mechanically without prior written permission of Applied Human Factors Inc The information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice Copyrights Copyright for this User s Manual 2007 Applied Human Factors Inc Copyrights for REACH Interface Author Software 1992 2007 Applied Human Factors Inc Trademarks REACH Interface Author is a trademark or registered trademark of Applied Human Factors Inc Microsoft Windows 98 Me 2000 XP Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation License Agreement NOTE Whether You have purchased this program or are just trying 1t for demonstration or evaluation purposes e g a 30 day demonstration copy please carefully read this License Agreement referred to herein as License Agreement before installing and using this software Applied Human Factors Inc referred to herein as AH
122. Word Tips F2 then w Pauses Word Tips if Word Tips is active F2 then a Adds a word to a user dictionary F2 then n Turns numbering option on and off F2 then Tab Sends a Tab to your application e g with Word Tips F2 then F2 Sends an F2 to your application 2 11 11 Settings Speech Warning If you are using speech options sounds originating from other programs e g clock alarms or warning signals might not be played Note REACH comes with Microsoft s Text to Speech Engine courtesy of Microsoft Corporation REACHTM can utilize other speech engines as long as they are Microsoft SAPI compliant SAPI stands for speech application programming interface Note The sounds described in this section will only be played only if you have a sound card capable of playing wav files Note IfREACH does not speak See three Notes that begin section 1 7 Click on the Speech category in Settings to change settings dealing with speech output see Figure 55 85 Bl REACH Startup A l Select what you want REACH to speak Keyboards wale Programs yp Letters Words Other Si Scanning Functuation Sentences Word R Sc Prediction A word selected from Word Prediction na Wobble El WordTips FS view Words pointed at for 3 0 lb seconds ma Smart Keys Keyboard o a Er Smart Lists Speak play keys when pointed at for 4 0 a seconds P Home Keyboard o Auditory Scanning Keyboard a while in
123. a selected key or group of keys For more information see Alignment Expert in section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size Similarly you probably want all the labels and pictures to be the same size To help with this REACH provides an Size Expert tool that equates the size of the labels specifically the labels backgrounds for a selected key For more information see Size Expert in section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size 5 2 1 12Adding Clip Art or Other Pictures REACH makes it easy to add pictures to your keys and keyboard backgrounds You can use the pictures that come with REACH pictures from clip art or Internet sources pictures from other assistive programs pictures that you have created or any picture that you can get to appear on your display but see the Important Note below REACH comes with many pictures that you can use as your keyboard background picture see section 5 2 12 7 Background Foreground Button or on your key faces see section 5 2 6 3 Key Details Key Picture You also can create your own pictures using Microsoft s Paintbrush program or some other graphics program and use them in REACH M Unfortunately not all of us are good at that so REACH offers much simpler options for adding pictures from other sources Of course you always must make sure that you are not infringing on someone s copyright or violating an explicit license agreement when you take pictures from oth
124. a time see Figure 126 Your job is to remember the entire sequence in order After all nine digits have been presented you are instructed to click your mouse button When you do you are taken to the test keyboard Memory Numbers Test where you are instructed to report the nine digit number see Figure 127 You are provided feedback Note that you can control the amount of time that each digit is displayed on the presentation keyboard by adjusting scan time values on the Prompts and Settings page of Settings Figure 126 The Memory Numbers Stimulus keyboard is an example presentation keyboard which is displaying the fifth of nine sequential digits 179 Figure 127 The Memory Numbers Test keyboard 1s an example test keyboard with which you report the number sequence just presented To make your own version of a Memory Assessment Keyboard that uses the same general format as the Memory Numbers Stimulus presentation keyboard load the template keyboard Template Memory Numbers Stimulus into the Keyboard Author and add your own text or numbers Similarly use the Template Memory Numbers Test Template Keyboard to make a keyboard like the test keyboard used in this task As with all Memory Assessment Keyboards several pairs of presentation test keyboards can be linked with a Next get keyboard key In this way you can make the test as long as you want In both the Memory Spatial Stimulus and the Memory Number Stimu
125. abbreviation sign and sentence are typed press the Add button in the Dictionary dialog box If you want to enter more sentences repeat steps 5 and 6 7 When you are finished adding sentences press the Done button in the Dictionary Editor dialog box The next time you want to say the new sentence use the Speech Abbreviation Keyboard and press the same keys you used to store it and then when it appears in a word prediction word box select it to be spoken Note The above procedures are simply suggestions The important point is that you store sentences in a way that is meaningful to you so that you can later bring them up with little difficulty 5 2 13 9Interpreter Keyboard Keyboards With REACH translation from one language to another can be easy Two methods can be used 1 Special dictionaries for the REACH Word Prediction module can be made or purchased as they come available visit the AHF Internet Web Site ahf net com These dictionaries contain common words or expressions presented as abbreviations in the REACH Word Prediction word boxes When a common English expression is selected that expression is then spoken or typed in another language e g French 171 2 Interpreter Keyboards also can be used to translate from one language to another With Interpreter Keyboards keyboards text that appears in one language when a key is in the Normal or Pointed At key state is then typed in another language when
126. ackground Editor tool bar When you have finished all changes to the background press the finished background is button on the Background Editor tool bar Color ACI A A gt Figure 110 The label background Color dialog box 160 Background Picture Button Press the background picture Al button to add a picture bmp wmf jpg to the background of your keyboard Inserting and editing a picture on the keyboard background is the same as for a key For more information on the picture options available Find a Picture Grab a Picture Take a Picture Repositioning the Picture Editing the Picture and Removing the Picture and how to use them see the section that deals with inserting editing pictures on keys section 5 2 6 3 Key Details Key Picture Exit Background Editor Button Press the exit background editor Ake button to return to the keyboard foreground Pressing this button produces the same result as pressing the Foreground button on the Keyboard Author Button Bar 5 2 12 8 Scan Expert Button When you have created a new keyboard if you want REACH to be able to scan it using one of the scanning options see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards then you must create a set of scanning instructions Similarly if you have modified an existing keyboard and added or deleted keys you also must provide a set of new scanning instructions when the Keyboard Author detects such a change in an existing keyboard the old
127. ady been entered into the Key Action position your mouse cursor in the text entry box and use the Backspace or Delete keys Note Ifyou are backspacing to remove a special key or function from the Key Action and you remove all the text and functions REACH will type the key s Normal key state label for you if you have the Use the label of the key to create the key action option turned on in Keyboard Details More than one function as well as text can be inserted into the same Key Action When you do this you really are creating a Macro key see the Building Macro Keys section below 142 Special Actions Functions Options In addition to Key special actions REACH comes with a variety of predefined functions that can be inserted into the Key Action Press the Functions button below Special Actions to see the functions available The functions are divided into two groups System Functions and REACH Functions System Functions Use the scroll bar to browse the list of System Functions available For example the Email function is a macro that starts your e mail program to send an e mail message When you Insert the Email function a dialog box appears asking you to insert the e mail address of the person you want to send a message to when this key is pressed Similarly inserting the Web function will attempt to start your web browser and go to the address you specify Note Your system must be Internet ready for th
128. after it has been pressed The keys on the standard qwerty kbd keyboard are good examples of the 3 D appearance A two dimensional 2D appearance is the second option In this mode rectangular keys are presented with no shadowing and no edges A border thin solid line appears on 2 D keys while you are authoring a keyboard so you can see where they are located but these borders do not appear when you view the keyboard in REACH Hence if you want a border on a 2D key you have to create 1t with graphics or use the natural border created by assigning a color to the key face that 1s different from the color of the keyboard Note You also can create an invisible key style by first assigning a 2D key style to the key and then use the key color L button on the Key Details tool bar and select a Transparent key face 5 2 6 8 Key Details Key State After you select a key or group of keys you can use the key state Pal button on the Key Details tool bar to define which of the key s three key states you want to see Normal Pointed At or Pressed The three key states correspond to the three possible conditions for any REACH key Normal not pointed at by your pointer Pointed At pointed at with your pointer and Pressed clicked on with your pointer Figure 103 shows an example of the three key states for one of the 50 keys on the States educational keyboard that comes with REACH The key on the left side shows how this key appears wh
129. ain speech keyboards in the REACH Speech Screen System feature Figure 118 The REACH Interface Author Speech Abbreviation Keyboard The basic idea 1s that you build an abbreviation based on meaningful concepts and that the abbreviation helps categorize the specific sentence you want to speak so that you can then select it from one of the word prediction word boxes To be successful you must first store the sentences you want in the speech2 dic User Dictionary or some other User Dictionary you have created for this purpose However when storing them you must use abbreviation expansion and you must use the abbreviation scheme presented below or one that you create Later when you want to say that sentence repeat the same abbreviation scheme Following is the procedure for storing sentences in the speech2 dic User Dictionary 1 Using the first set of three Time keys all have hourglasses with green backgrounds see Figure 118 labeled 1 Time in the top left part of the Speech Abbreviation keyboard select the appropriate time for the sentence you want to speak The three keys and their corresponding abbreviations are Key Abbreviation past xp present current XC future xf When you press one of these keys the corresponding abbreviation is typed This abbreviation forms the root of the overall abbreviation to be used 2 Using the second set of Question keys the eight keys on the top row with dark blue backgrounds
130. al Vertical When you first start REACH the word prediction word bar will be shown in a horizontal orientation docked to the top of the keyboard If you prefer to have the word bar in a vertical orientation you can press the Make Word Prediction Vertical option in the View menu When you do the orientation will change from horizontal to vertical the word bar will become floating and this menu option will change to Make Word Prediction Horizontal which you can use to return to a horizontal orientation but 1t will still be floating Note If you choose a vertical orientation for word prediction the word bar will float become undocked You cannot have word prediction docked and vertical 75 View Menu Float or Dock Keyboard A REACH keyboard can either be docked or floating A docked keyboard is attached to the REACH Menu Bar or REACH Button Bar A floating keyboard 1s not attached and behaves like an independent window that can be dragged to various locations on your display When you first start REACH the Button Bar and Menu Bar are located at the bottom of the display and the keyboard is docked to the top of the Menu Bar Selecting the Float Keyboard option disconnects the keyboard from the Menu Bar Button Bar and word prediction word bar and puts the keyboard in a floating state so that you can drag it by its title bar to a new location Also this menu option changes to Dock Keyboard so you can ret
131. al copies of the key onto your keyboard Note You are not allowed to paste a key on another key 157 5 2 12 5 Delete Button If you want to remove an unwanted key or group of keys first select the key s and then press the Delete button A dialog box will appear asking you if you are sure you want to delete the selected key or keys 5 2 12 6 Keyboard Details Button Pressing the keyboard details keyboard button is the same as the Keyboard Details option in the Tools menu of the Keyboard Author Pressing this button displays the Keyboard Details dialog box The options here are discussed in section 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard Note If you already have created some keys and then change one of the options in the Keyboard Details Dialog box the changes will not be applied to the keys that are already created but will apply to keys that are created after the change 5 2 12 7 Background Foreground Button Pressing the Background Backaroundl button removes all the keys from the keyboard temporarily so you can see the keyboard and produces the Background Editor tool bar see Figure 106 With this tool bar several options are available for customizing the keyboard background These options are described in the following sections When you are finished authoring the keyboard background press the Foreground Estegroundl button to exit background editing and return to the foreground keyboard e g t
132. ample if you created a keyboard in low resolution 640 by 480 pixels and then load it into the Keyboard Author when your display is set to 800 by 600 pixels it will appear in its original smaller size This is not true if this same keyboard is loaded into REACH where its size is adjusted so that it has a similar appearance regardless of the original or current resolution When you load a keyboard of any horizontal size into REACH and the keyboard is docked 1t will be stretched horizontally to fill the display If you change the size of the keyboard in REACH by using the Change Keyboard Size option its size in REACH is changed but its size when loaded into in the Keyboard Author is not changed Note Most of the keyboards that come with this program were authored in the 800 by 600 pixel resolution and set to either a size suitable for typing 800 by 210 or full screen 800 by 490 117 5 2 1 4 Laying Out Keys on the Keyboard To add a new key to the Keyboard Background press the Key Palette Kew Palette button and the Key Palette is displayed see Figure 74 The empty keys on the key palette can be selected by clicking on them once and then moving your cursor to the desired location on the Keyboard Background the selected key is dragged with your cursor Drop the key by clicking your mouse again Figure 74 An example Key Palette To move a key just drag it to the desired location To change the size shape of
133. an be independently set for words when the word boxes are pointed at with a pointer by pressing the Background Color EN and Word s Color Luss 2 buttons respectively in the Pointed area of the Word Size amp Color page These pointed at colors are the ones that will be displayed when REACH is offering the word prediction bar and individual words during scanning see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards Note If you have purchased the Smart Lists Add On you can have the appearance of the items presented in the lists similar to those you select here for word prediction To try that go to the Smart Lists Appearance page of Settings and select the second option 2 11 10 3 Settings Word Prediction View For a discussion of this Settings category see section 2 11 5 1 Settings View Word Prediction 2 11 10 4 Settings Word Prediction Options In the Options category of the Settings dialog box four powerful options are available see Figure 48 The AutoType Sentence Prediction AutoEdit and Show Don t Show Abbreviations options are described in the following four sections Home Keyboard Auta Type 7 Favorites A Automatically type letters for you using Smartkey de ee Technolo Jee Word Predictiot IY Caret Track Speak letters that are AutoTyped Y Word Size Sentence Ka View Prediction gt Options A Monitor sentences as you type and show matching 3 sentences fr
134. and a menu is presented that instructs REACH to 1 anchor that label to the top of the key 2 anchor that label to the bottom of the key 3 anchor that label to the center of the key 4 position that label anywhere on the key by dragging it and 5 canceling this option The advantage of the first three anchor options is that REACH takes care of positioning the label for you That way if you keep the same font definitions across a set of keys they will all appear to be uniformly located The advantage of the Position Label Freely option is that there might be times where you want the label to appear in a special location If you assign the Anchor to Center of Key location for a label and the key contains a wmf graphics file format e g as the Mayer Johnson pictures and that picture is stretched to fit the key then REACH automatically will move the label to the bottom of the key or the top of the key depending upon the selection that you make on the Change Labels page of Settings found under the Keys topic There if you have selected the Put label at the bottom of the key option all such labels will be shown at the bottom of the key similarly if you have selected the Put label at the top of the key option they will be shown at the top The Finished Label Age Button Option The last button allows you to exit any of the Key Label tool bars You also can exit by clicking on another key or on the keyboard backgrou
135. and labeled 2 Ques indicate whether a question is to be asked and the type of question Following are the eight types of question and their corresponding abbreviations Key Abbreviation is was were will etc qis do did does qdo who qwo why qwy what qwt when qwn where qwr how qho If no question is being asked skip this set of keys and go to the third set of keys When you press one of the question keys the corresponding abbreviation is typed This portion of the abbreviation is added to the root abbreviation 169 3 Using the third set of Noun keys 21 keys with yellow backgrounds labeled 3 Noun select a key that represents the main object subject of the sentence you are speaking The categories and corresponding abbreviations are Key Abbreviation I nii you nuu she nsh he nhe they nth some body thing where time nso environment temperature air wind etc net place npl manmade objects nmd mineral nmr plant npt food drink nfd specific male nsm specific female nsf animal nam mental trait or activity nmt physical trait npt appearance brush comb etc nap energy heat electricity etc neg action nac it nit When you press one of these keys the corresponding abbreviation is typed This portion of the abbreviation is added to the overall abbreviation being constructed 4 Using the fourth set of Verb keys 16 keys with light blue backgrounds labeled 4 Verb select a key
136. ansp ar do o abad 150 5 2 9 Previewing Keys Using REACH and the Keyboard Author cccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 151 3 2210 Creatine Scanning IAS UCLA AAA AAA AAA 151 S2 Keyboard Author Meni pt Om ld 153 521121 AAA OS 153 NA A AE E E OE A E A O EENT ENTE 154 5 2 11 3 TOOS VICI sepia lleida 155 Sae A NS 156 32 12 Keyboard Author Button Bar DS ias 156 5 24122 AGA AAA O RM soantaisetaususseawaheauah 156 S222 UES STC CI Ly AA A N ina ancient S 157 5 2 12 3 C OD DUO iia 157 5 2 12 4 Paste DU a a a a 157 SAN Po PVC Ue des HUGO A a e e O I In 158 5 2 12 6 Keyboard Details BUOM ti ii 158 52127 MAC KOTOUNG POLCOTOUING UU OM Ys castpi cists Ries otek ad 158 5 25128 cam Pell DUO aliaron 161 23129 Uad SU EO Mla is carat cersintl aw ti e adi s 163 5 2 13 Types ot Keyboards that Can be AMO A A acini 163 5 2 13 1 Standard 1 vite Keyboards as 163 SL 132 Special IK Cy OO AES cini ta asicta tcl aia tala ndces a a Datecesmaaewatsendueieseacwaes ateces 163 532 133 TEMPLADO AS o ci 164 S234 CEhildrems Keyboard Keyboards static ORN 164 ld Exploratory KeyDoard ROYO a 164 5 2 13 6 Speech Keyboard Keyboards the REACH Speech Keyboard SystemIM a cccccnnccncnnnnninnnos 165 L27 REACH Speech Screen System EA nisione Ee E EN E ERRE ETE 166 32138 Other REACH Speech keyboards a 168 Li Interpreter Keyboard Ke ybod Sea a A ATE 171 LIO Musical KO a a oa ees asa a aT 172 Sot Ouz keyboard M Keyboards AA caheadltse
137. any speech keyboard and make those changes to the Settings then the next time that keyboard or any other keyboard in that Keyboard Family category is loaded it will be docked and word prediction and the menu will be absent When you return to a typing keyboard word prediction and the Menu Bar will return because 116 typing keyboards are in a different Keyboard Family unless you made similar changes to the Family to which that typing keyboard belongs To accomplish the same thing without using Keyboard Families you would have to change all these settings each time you moved to and from a speech keyboard When you create a Keyboard Family and load a keyboard from that Family most of the Settings changes that you make while using that keyboard get stored and applied to the entire family These Family Settings include most of the settings that you can make in the REACH Settings options There are some major exceptions For example Settings dealing with Scanning Dwell and Wobble are not Family Settings because it is unlikely that a person using those features would want them to change when they move from keyboard to keyboard and it would be tedious to change those settings for all Keyboard Families If you are making a set of keyboards that you want to similar characteristics then you should either move them all to an existing category that is already a Family or create a new category and then use the Make Category a Family to make that c
138. any times as is specified in the Scanning Settings When 1t completes the number of specified cycles 1t will go to sleep and wait to be awakened by your switch Example of Using Single Switch Scanning on a Keyboard When a keyboard with scanning instructions is loaded and the Single Switch Scanning option is active selected from the Keyboard Menu the first thing that happens 1s that the user is prompted to click the switch left mouse button to begin scanning When the switch is clicked a group of keys that has been defined as the first row is highlighted A highlighted row means that the Pointed At key state features are presented for all keys in that row That s why it is important to create keys with distinctive Pointed At features on keyboards that will be used for scanning The amount of time that the row is highlighted can be adjusted using the Scan Time option on the Scanning page of the Settings dialog box For more information on these adjustments see section 2 11 2 Settings Scanning If the first row is not selected by using your switch all the keys in the first row are returned to their normal appearance and the keys in the second row are highlighted Ifthe second row is not selected then the third row is highlighted etc until all rows have been highlighted If there are more than five rows defined and the Reverse Option is active see section 2 11 2 1 Settings Scanning Prompts and Timing a message b
139. ar Microsoft Word program and 5 User macros if you create any macros they will be stored there pictures A folder that contains all key face and keyboard picture files that are provided with REACH Several subfolders are included e g speech children etc Note If you purchased the optional Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols add on those pictures are stored in their own folder labeled Mayer Johnson Pictures located in this folder sounds This folder contains all key sound files wav that are provided with this software or which you have created or imported user This folder contains the Main Dictionaries and the User Dictionaries provided with the word prediction option e g user dic speech dic and speech2 dic When you create a new user dictionary it is stored here by default with a name that you provide word prediction dictionary files have a dic extension Starting the REACH Program Press the Windows Start button move to the Programs Menu and then click on the REACH program icon or if during installation you decided to place a shortcut on your desk top press the REACH shortcut icon on your desk top You also can have REACH start automatically upon computer startup see Settings REACH Startup Exiting the REACH Program To exit REACH first make sure you can see the Menu Bar click on the Menu button on the REACH Button Bar if you cannot Next open the Programs
140. ard face To create a new picture with such transparent effects use the following procedure 1 Create your graphic picture bmp wmf jpg of the bird and before finishing select a background color that is not used anywhere else in the picture e g light blue to fill the area around the bird 2 Save the picture in the AReachS5 Pictures folder or one of its subfolders 3 Start the REACH Keyboard Author and start a new keyboard or load the keyboard you want to change ay 4 Select the key you want to be transparent and then use the key style E button on the Key Picture tool bar to set the keys appearance to 2D so no edges will appear on the final key 5 Press the key picture Al button on the Key Details tool bar to load the Picture Gallery Here you can locate the picture of the bird and select it for the key face of the current key 150 6 Click on the key color KA button on the Key Details tool bar and select Transparent as the background color of the key so you can look through the key and see the keyboard background color or picture 7 Click on the picture on the key and select the transparent picture E button on the Key Picture tool bar Move the mouse cursor to the picture you want to make partially transparent in our example the picture of the bird Notice that when you pass over the picture the pointer s cursor changes to the shape of an eyedropper 8 Point the tip of the eyedropper cursor at the color yo
141. ards are linked together and each can utilize printed and spoken narration picture keys get keyboard keys and special sound effects see Figure 122 173 180 OOS Figure 121 Sample Game Keyboard keyboard where you search for hidden treasure Figure 122 A page from a sample Storybook Keyboard system the three little pigs 5 2 13 14 Reading Assistance Keyboard M Keyboards While Storybook Keyboard keyboards provide reading practice Reading Assistance Keyboards provide more fundamental help for the beginning reader To see an example load the Reading Assistance sample keyboard see Figure 123 These keyboards are most effective if you have a computer with the appropriate speech synthesis hardware software because they provide auditory sounds of different letters basic speech sounds words and sentences With Reading Assistance Keyboards a beginning reader can explore a sentence to see how letters go together to produce basic speech sounds words and sentences Pictures also can be included to help make the meanings of the words and sentence more clear 174 The cow is eating grass Figure 123 A sample Reading Assistance Keyboard intended to help users learn how letters sounds and words can build a sentence 5 2 13 15 Performance Aid Keyboard Keyboards REACH keyboards can be useful as an on the job performance aid for many different vocations There are two ways REACH can be used as a per
142. ary Manager in the Word Prediction Menu to produce the Dictionary Manager dialog box Next click on the speech icon in the Dictionary Manager dialog box Figure 138 until the book icon appears opened Press the Done E button to exit the Dictionary Manager dialog box The REACH Speech Dictionary file contains more than 350 abbreviations representing a variety of common phrases A naming scheme was used to assign abbreviations The goal of that scheme was to help you remember them more easily First the letter x was used to begin all speech phrases because there are no x words in the Main Dictionary The second letter represents a main speech category e g f stands for the food category and subsequent letters represent subcategories Table 1 presents an outline of the abbreviation naming scheme used You can expand on this system as it is modify the abbreviations or phrases used there use a completely different strategy by adding new abbreviations or phrases to speech dic or create an entirely different Speech Dictionary To learn how to create a new user dictionary see section 8 3 1 Creating a New Dictionary To learn how to add change or delete abbreviations see section 8 3 4 Adding Changing Deleting Abbreviations For more on how to add change or delete sentences with no abbreviations see section 8 3 5 Adding Changing and Deleting Sentences Note Ifyou want to speak a sentence without typing it turn on t
143. ases To create an abbreviation to type this sentence you first must decide on an abbreviation for example nbuy Next position the cursor in the Word text entry box and type the following nbuy We appreciate the information but we are not making any new purchases Abbreviation Sentence to be Typed 199 Later when using REACH to type this sentence simply type the letters nbuy and that abbreviation along with as much of the sentence that can be displayed is presented in one of the word prediction word boxes To type the sentence or speak the sentence 1f the speak selected speech option is on simply select that word box When selected the abbreviation is removed and only the sentence is typed in the currently active application The abbreviation is defined as all the text characters to the left of the equal sign and the text to be typed is all the text characters to the right of the equal sign Wow Note There must not be any spaces or punctuation before the equal sign or it is interpreted as a sentence containing an equal sign or punctuation Note Ifthe AutoType option is on you type the letters nb as in the above example and there are no other nb words or abbreviations in any of your open dictionaries then REACH Word Prediction will type the sentence for you automatically the moment you type the b Note Any abbreviation displayed in one of the word prediction word boxes will begin with a
144. at other users can run this program but the user accounts must have read write execute privileges for the REACH folder typically c Program Files Applied Human Factors REACHS CD Installation 1 Insert the REACH Installation CD into your CD drive 2 If your CD drive automatically starts the installation program skip steps 3 and 4 below 3 Ifyour CD drive does not automatically start after a minute or two click on the Windows Start button and select Run from the resulting menu 4 Inthe text entry box to the right of Open type the name of the drive where the REACH Interface Author CD is located and then setup For example if the installation CD is in drive D then type d setup 5 Follow the instructions in the installation program 6 After installing REACH install the Microsoft Text to Speech Engine if you want to install use that speech synthesizer requires 24MB of hard disk space 7 Exit the installation program Press Done and run REACH by either double clicking on the REACH icon on the desktop or a press the Windows Start button b select Programs c move to the REACH Interface Author product group and d click on the REACH Interface Author icon 8 The dialog box shown below will appear To run the program in demonstration mode click on Continue Trial To license this product click on the button at the bottom of the window that is labeled Licensing Continu
145. at make it difficult for them to read words but can recognize spoken words Fourth REACH can be used for speech augmentation See the next four sections for more details 1 7 1 Uses of Speech Feedback for Typing Feedback is a necessary component for learning When a task like typing is highly learned 1t becomes almost automatic However when first learning how to use a keyboard it is often helpful to provide as much feedback as possible Also persons with vision impairments can benefit from hearing what they are typing REACH offers several options that provide feedback to the user about what has been typed To try REACH with and without automatic speech feedback select the Speech tab in the REACH Settings dialog box In the top portion While Typing you can turn on off automatic speech for letters punctuation words sentences and other e g numbers pound sign etc Click on the checkbox in front of any of these options to turn them on a checkmark is shown or off checkmark not shown Another source of speech feedback for what has been typed are the quick speech buttons on the REACH Button Bar With those you can manually instruct REACH to speak the last word last sentence or any text that is highlighted in your application in most applications or non picture text on web pages Finally REACH can provide speech feedback for letters that have been automatically typed with the AutoType option s
146. at page Dictionary Editor Editing speech A istic A To Add to the dictionary press the Add button To Change or Delete find the word or type it in then make your change or deletion using the Change or Delete buttons How often is the word used Words A Ven oft ery Often oR es fet lou lov pw gt 4 gt Often ecc How much does it cost Occasionally mege lt s good to see you ac am fine thank you s cif l am fror scis would like to go to sleep scit l m tired ecr T hat is right actb T hat s too bad i ctg T hat s good al ee acUISHow are you feeling today aii Fasor scuf How s pour Family acu here are you from sceumo WwW ould you like to watch a mowie with scupg w ould you like to play a game with me scu W ould you like to read with me E acuety Did you see what was on To mel Lorene eCUt How are you todayy Nos Une e There are no words for this letter e here are one or more words for this letter Figure 141 REACH Word Prediction Dictionary Editor dialog box 197 Notice that when you open the Dictionary Editor REACH automatically skips to the first page that contains text as shown by the X page in Figure 141 Ifthe dictionary is empty then it will open showing the first part of the alphabet 1 e letters a to g Ifthe Dictionary Editor doesn t display the letter tab you want to see use the scroll buttons to page forward or backward a in t
147. at spelling disabled persons are known to have trouble with Third if the spell checking is conducted after the student has completed the writing task then any feedback obtained by finding the correct spelling of a word is removed from the act of writing the word With phonetic typing the student who is actively trying to input a desired word in a specific context where it makes sense is given a tool which dramatically increases the chance of finding and seeing that word in that context Fourth with phonetic typing students are provided help with homophones something that is known to be difficult to deal with Spell checkers are based on letters and not sounds so help with homophones is not typically relevant or provided Fifth and most important because phonetic typing increases the chances of finding spelling typing a word correctly while the student is in the act of writing the word it should increase the student s motivation feelings of self confidence and feelings of accomplishment in a task at which they probably have a considerable history of failure 231 232 12 0Glossary abbreviation A series of letters and numbers do not use periods spaces or punctuation that is used to represent a larger string of text usually a phrase sentence or paragraph An example abbreviation is xuget abbreviation expansion A name commonly given to a procedure in which an abbreviation is used to represent a much larger string of text e g
148. ategory you must provide a name 2 Rename Category Warning The Category names are the names of subfolders in the main Keyboard folder If you change the name of a category you also are changing its path so there will be problems with any other keyboard that has a link to a keyboard in the renamed category If that happens you will have to re author those links to reflect the new category name or change the category name back to the earlier name 3 Remove Category use this option to delete an existing category Warning Removing a category deletes all the keyboards in that category Not only will you not be able to use them but there might be problems with other keyboards in other categories which had links to the deleted keyboards 4 Make Category a Family see next section 5 Cancel Keyboard Families and Family Settings This version of REACH incorporates the AHF Keyboard Family concept Any of the keyboard Categories can be made into a Keyboard Family This includes the sub categories that can be listed under the categories If all the keyboards in a Category are so similar in function that you want them to take on the same characteristics docked or floating Menu Bar showing Word Prediction Bar showing etc then you should consider making that category a Keyboard Family With this approach you can for example have all the speech keyboards docked and displayed without word prediction or the Menu Bar If you load
149. ategory a Family When you make a Category a Family then any settings that are made to one keyboard in that Family will be applied to all keyboards in that family For example if you set one keyboard in a Family to be floating and small then all the 153 keyboards that are in that family will be floating and small when loaded in the future This is a very useful feature that was designed to save you the time involved in adjusting many similar keyboards separately Note Keyboards should not be added to existing families unless they have something substantially in common with the other keyboards in that family Note The Categories that have K Family icon displayed to their left are keyboard Families Note When you save a keyboard that has scanning instructions two files are actually saved the main kbd file and a second file with the same name but with an scn file extension The scn file contains the scanning instructions When browsing through the keyboard files with the Open Save or Save As menu options you will not see the scn files Ifa file has an associated scn file the corresponding icon will have colored keys present on the keyboard Keyboard Gallery Choose a name for the keyboard Enter a A Look im E 4 Selected ado keyboard Categories address book Ra alphabetic ato g no smart keys Ale f BAGH alphabetic a to g restore All Categories H alphab
150. ategory a Keyboard Family Note In any of the Keyboard Galleries the Categories that have a Family icon displayed to their left are keyboard Families Note Ifyou move a keyboard from one category to category you must re author any keyboard links on keyboards that load that keyboard 5 2 1 2 Keyboard Background The rectangular area on which keys are placed during authoring is called the Keyboard Background This is distinguished from the Keyboard Foreground which refers to the keys on the keyboard In the Keyboard Author you can change the size of the keyboard by changing the size of the background see next section Also you can press the Background Background button and change its color add a picture and add up to two labels For more information see section 5 2 12 7 Background Foreground Button 5 2 1 3 Keyboard Size Whether you are creating a new keyboard or changing an old one you can modify its size in the Keyboard Author by pointing at one of the edges of the keyboard and dragging it to a new size When you do this only the size of the keyboard background is changed If you already have keys on the keyboard and you want them to proportionately change size as you resize the background click on the Select All option in the Edit menu before you resize the background When you load an existing keyboard into the Keyboard Author it will be displayed in the same size that 1t was last authored For ex
151. ategory contains the sub categories Alphabetic Children International etc 115 3 If you know a key word e g alphabetic that might be in the keyboard s title enter it in the text box on the right where it says lt search text gt and then press the Find It button to search for keyboards with that word present in their file name 4 If the keyboard is located somewhere outside the main Keyboard folder press the Look In button and select other locations from the list Look in the home folder this option returns you to the default Keyboard folder Look in CD Look on Floppy Drive Look on Removable Drive e g Zip Advanced Look this produces a Browse type dialog box Regardless of the method you use the strategy 1s the same First locate and select click on the keyboard and then press the OK button to load it The Copy Paste button allows you to copy a keyboard into the clipboard and then paste it for example to move it to a different category Note Unless you are in one of the Keyboard Galleries used to save a keyboard there 1s no text entry box for you to type the path name Rather you simply locate 1t and select 1t from the list ofkeyboards Its name and path then appears in the window in the top center of the Keyboard Gallery Edit Categories Below the list of Categories there is an Edit Categories button that produces a list of five options 1 New Category use this option to create a new c
152. authoring easier for you For example the Template 5x10 kbd 1s a template keyboard with 5 rows and 10 keys in each row see Figure 79 Most template keyboards contain undefined keys Welcome to the Keyboard Author Make a Mew Keyboard Open and Change a Keyboard Figure 78 Window displayed when the Keyboard Author first starts asking whether you want to start a new keyboard or change an existing keyboard Figure 79 The Template 5x10 kbd keyboard is shown here as an example of one of the template keyboards provided with REACH to save you time The keys are already laid out and all you have to do is define each key 126 Note Ifyou already have created some keys and then change one of the options in the Keyboard Details option the changes will not be applied to the keys that are already created or selected but will apply to keys created or selected after the change When you have selected and loaded the desired keyboard you are ready to make the changes If it is an existing typing keyboard you might want to add or remove keys change the action of the key etc If it is a template keyboard you will have to define each key to perform an action have the label etc For information on how to make these changes to the keys on the keyboard you selected see section 5 2 6 Defining a Key Reminder If you add or delete keys from an existing keyboard be sure to use the Scan Expert to update the scanning instructions unless
153. automatically opens so that you can start adding words abbreviations etc If you do not want to enter any words at that time press the Done button on the Dictionary Editor To learn how to use the Dictionary Editor see the next section Editing Dictionaries To learn how to use the Build option to create a dictionary see section 8 3 7 Building Dictionaries from Text Files 8 3 2 Editing Dictionaries The Main dictionary cannot be edited To edit any of the user dictionaries first open the Dictionary Manager by selecting Dictionary Manager from the Word Prediction Menu see Figure 137 Next select and open the dictionary you want to edit by clicking on it with your mouse until it appears selected a blue rectangle will appear around the selected dictionary and open the book icon looks like an open book Finally press the Edit button to open the Dictionary Editor see Figure 138 With the dictionary editor you can add change and delete words see section 8 3 3 Adding Changing Deleting Words abbreviations see section 8 3 4 Adding Changing Deleting Abbreviations or sentences see section 8 3 5 Adding Changing Deleting Sentences In the Dictionary Editor dialog box see Figure 141 tabs are presented for all English letters and one tab for all text strings beginning with a number 0 9 A red dot on the tab indicates there are no words on that page A green dot on the tab indicates that at least one word is on th
154. b Third Character p Third Character t Third Character g Miscellaneous entertainment topics Food Breakfast foods Desserts Ethnic foods Mexican Italian etc Fruits Meats Sandwiches Utensils and other food related items Vegetables Miscellaneous foods Help or assistance Clothing Get something Hygiene issues Medical issues Position something Miscellaneous Location Body location anatomical Personal space pockets personal belongings Travel issues Geographic locations Second Character n Numbers No subcategories Second Character t Time Third Character 1 Third Character u Third Character q Third Character w Third Character y I as subject You as subject Time of day Days in the week Years months and seasons of the year 208 8 4 Word Prediction Menu Word Size Color Selecting the Word Size Color option in the Word Prediction menu produces the Word Size amp Color page of Settings Here you can change the size of the words presented in the word prediction word boxes as well as change their color and their background color see section 2 11 10 2 Settings Word Prediction Word Size amp Color for more information 8 5 Word Prediction Menu Change to Horizontal or Vertical View If the word prediction word bar is currently displayed in a vertical orientation one of the options in the Word Prediction menu will be C
155. ble Sounds and Speech Prompts Buttons Prompts and Timing for Button Bar Scanning Press the Buttons button for a list of time events and prompts associated with scanning the button bar see Figure 22 Use the four buttons below to select a scanning category Then select the event you want and make the adjustment 5 Prompt me to scan the button bar for 2 00 seconds al Highlight the first button for 2 00 seconds a Highlight all other buttons for 2 00 seconds Zi Prompt me to stay in the button bar for 2 00 seconds Select an audible prompt Sound ee Speech Figure 22 The Buttons section of the Prompts amp Timing page in the Settings dialog box The two timing events include how long the first button is offered and how long subsequent buttons are offered To adjust either of these times click on the event you want to change and then click on the increase El button or decrease hd button to the right of the list of events to adjust to the desired time Two prompts are available with the first being Prompt me to scan the button bar When this option is active a green checkmark appears to its left During scanning this option offers the user the option of scanning the REACH Button Bar Turning this prompt off will stop the Button Bar from being offered during scanning 55 The second prompt option is Prompt me to stay in the Button Bar rather than returning to scanning the Keyboard or ScanBuddy
156. board and select Align Top Labels in the alignment option the Alignment Expert Align Top Labels dialog box is displayed see Figure 98 Note In all Label Alignment what gets aligned are the rectangular backgrounds provided for the text When a single key is selected the different Top to bottom and Left to right options in this window are applied to the different key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed for the selected key This is done regardless of the currently selected key state You are provided a preview on the right side of the window When you have found the alignment you want press the OK button If you change your mind about aligning labels press the Cancel button 145 Alignment Expert Align Keys How should align the keps for you Top to bottom No change E Top edges eee Bottom edges DK Centers 00000 Space evenly Left to right Lancel No change Lett edges Right edges Help Centers 900 00 Space Evenly Figure 97 The Alignment Expert Align Keys dialog box where you can align selected keys Alignment Expert Align Top Labels How should align the top labels for pou Top to bottorn No change Example Top edges P Bottom edges Ok 9000 Centers Left ta right Cancel Mo change Left edges Right edges Help 959 9 3 Centers Figure 98 The Alignment Expert Align Top
157. can be combined in ways that assist typing help augment speech improve job performance or provide entertainment education and training The Key Details tool bar produced when you click on one of the keys provides most of the key authoring features see Figure 83 Figure 83 The Key Details tool bar 131 This tool bar can be dragged to a new location if it is in the way drag its title bar or removed by clicking on the keyboard background Also if you want this tool bar to remain in a constant location click on the thumbtack icon in the upper right corner of the tool bar The options available in the Key Details tool bar are described in the following sections 5 2 6 1 Key Details Key Label A Press the key label button to place a text label on your key When you do a menu drops down offering the top label or the bottom label Select the label you want to add edit and a text entry box appears on the keyboard background as well as the Key Label tool bar see Figure 84 Itis important to notice that there really are two parts to this label the text that appears when you type in the label and the label s background the rectangular box where the letters are shown By default the color of the letters is black unless you changed it in the Keyboard Details option and the color of the background box is transparent Figure 84 The Key Label tool bar If you type the label when in the Normal k
158. canning or point and click input For example if you accidentally click when you didn t intend to you can set ClickAssist to ignore any click that isn t longer than a specified time Also if you accidentally make multiple clicks right after a good click you can set ClickAssist to ignore any click that occurs before a specified amount of time after a good click Finally if you use point and click and find you are more accurate when releasing your switch on the target than when clicking your switch you can set ClickAssist to deliver the click at the location where you released the switch Different ClickAssist settings pages are provided for when you are using scanning and when you are using point and click for scanning see section 2 11 2 3 Settings Scanning ClickAssist for point and click see section 2 11 13 1 Settings ClickAssist ClickAssist and section 2 11 14 3 Settings Keys ClickAssist Note The ClickAssist feature works everywhere you click not just on REACH keyboards 28 Note To try ClickAssist when pointing and clicking open Settings go to either the ClickAssist tab or the Keys tab click on the ClickAssist tab and then select the settings and times you want to try The changes will take effect as soon as you exit Settings Note To try ClickAssist when scanning before you start scanning open Settings go to the Scanning tab click on the ClickAssist tab and then s
159. ccc 104 4 7 Options Menu ASSESI a csi an Nella tno cea oN es nk tcc ca neta eh cad N 105 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks ooooononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnos 106 4 7 2 Scanning Dwell Wobble ClickAssist Smart Keys and Smart Lists in Assess 064 106 4 7 3 Data and Statistics Reported in ASSESS nnas T een aae ees 107 4 7 4 Descriptions Of the ASSESS Task ieee inten pact ll 108 Ava Buttons Click Task poi ai 108 AZ Buttons Double Chuck Tas rd dl 108 Aiea Buton Reese Tas kiona casas sacm laamarcasbacbenteeccateataatce 109 AA POM das o aa ici 109 A o Bomiand Gluck Tasa dd 109 AO Dras Pasan 110 Add Ser Task A AA elasuar a mmten lances 110 AS ANUMDELS Ta ida 111 ATE A niecaneaaleapdaniusiasoouaaunan baleen sesad Sapa A 111 PATO Wobble rasos T 111 SU REACH Menu Bar Keyboard east iii titi taai t 113 Sl Keyboard Mena Selec aio 113 5 2 Keyboard Menu Make REACH Keyboard Author Feature ooooocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnornorr nono nn non nnnnnnos 113 5 2 1 Basics of Keyboard Authoring Read this Section First ccccssesesssesssssssssesssesseesessseessseseeeeeens 114 5 2 1 1 The Keyboard Gallery and Keyboard Families ooonnnnnnnnnininnnnnnnnnnnnccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoninineninenines 115 SD AD Keyboard ACK cu AAA ia cb ilie absent ian EE E E EE 117 Jalor EA Re rene Te ee le Pe eT Se ee Ree le ee ose oe ee ee ee
160. ccidental click after a good click so wait awhile El ClickAssist before allowing another click Wait 1 00 seconds then allow me to click again Cancel Figure 59 Picture of the ClickAssist ClickAssist Settings page of Settings Second Check Box If you are more accurate releasing your switch on the target than pressing your switch on the target ClickAssist can deliver the click at the location where you released your switch To turn this option on click on the box in front of I miss the target when I push the button down but I am able to lift up on the target option 90 Third Check Box If you tend to bounce the switch when using it so that several clicks are sent instead of the one you intended then select the option I make multiple clicks and then I push the button down for some time and lift With this option active the first few times you operate the switch will not be treated as clicks Rather a click will only be generated if you hold the switch closed for the amount of time that you specify in the If I hold the switch option For example if you do not want a click sent unless you have held the switch for 2 00 seconds then enter 2 00 for X in the statement If I hold the switch down for X seconds then it is a real click so that it says If I hold the switch down for 2 00 seconds then it is a real click Fourth Check Box After making a good click if you tend to accidentally bounce the switch again
161. cense Agreement If You agree to this License Agreement then click on the box that appears during installation in front of I accept the terms of this License Agreement or other similar wording indicating that You accept the terms of this License Agreement until a check mark appears and then press the Next button Acceptance of the License Agreement means that while AHF owns the software program and supporting components such as but not limited to pictures dictionaries sound files keyboard files cursor files documentation etc AHF grants You permission to use this program and the supporting components in a limited fashion as specified in the below details If You do not agree to this License Agreement press the Cancel button below and contact AHF immediately If You purchased this product You must contact AHF within 30 days in order to be eligible for a refund contact information is provided at the end of this License Agreement Also to be eligible for a refund You must return any media packaging documentation etc sent to You as part of Your purchase as witnessed by a dated receipt To receive any refund the box must be unopened You will not be refunded shipping and handling costs there are states and countries where such costs are refundable You shall not be provided any refund if an electronic license already has been issued You assume total responsibility for selecting this program for Your use and for the installation u
162. ch can be useful to anyone who knows how a word sounds but not how it is spelled Using this approach significant improvements in spelling accuracy were found for persons both with and without spelling disabilities Figure 4 shows such a keyboard designed for children the pictures can help identify the sound sea eo oe Figure 4 The Pictures phonetic keyboard Each key represents a simple sound most are just phonemes but for some keys phonemes have been combined The consonant sounds are located together on the left side of the keyboard and the vowel sounds are on the right Other standard computer keyboard keys such as Enter Shift etc are on the extreme right and lower right Each phonetic key has a text label intended to let the user know what sound that key represents Some phonetic keyboards have keys which also show a picture to help the user determine what sound goes with that key such as the Pictures keyboard shown in Figure 1 For example the key representing the BH sound shows the 26 picture of a bus In addition a sound recording of a person saying that sound is played if the user points at one of the keys for a period of time the time can be adjusted and the sound can be turned off if not wanted Just above the keyboard are a set of word prediction windows This is where the candidate words will be presented after you start entering sounds In Figure 1 a word has just been completed so the in bet
163. ch or any of a number of special switches mechanical eye blink puff and sip etc which emulate a left mouse button click or a right mouse button click if you set Microsoft Windows to respond primarily to a right mouse click You also can use input from joystick switches as your scanning switch es In this User s Guide the term click your switch 1s used to describe either clicking the left mouse button or operating a switch that emulates a left mouse button click If you can operate one of these switches REACH offers scanning options that you can use to enter characters perform macro functions that have been assigned to keys select words from word prediction use the REACH Speech Keyboard System to augment your speech and press buttons on the Button Bar In fact any keyboard that comes with this software can be set to scan and any new keyboard you create can include scanning instructions see section 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructions and section 5 2 13 16 Scanning Keyboards When you start scanning the button bar will change see Figure 11 You can scan the button bar however because some of the buttons are inappropriate for scanning but should still be available for use by a teacher parent or friend they have been moved to the left end of the button bar 1 e the Menu Settings and Start or right end of the button bar 1 e Stop scanning SA ward Sentence Highlight rH EW Program Hide dd Wor
164. ch pointer is best for you e g mouse joy stick track ball light pen head pointer etc The next three tasks Letters Numbers and Words can help decide which pointer switch combination which keyboard which setting for the dwell switch or which setting for the wobble feature is best for you Finally the Wobble Task can help you decide ifthe Wobble feature is something you should consider and provide some information about how it should be set Following are descriptions of the Assess Task options found in the Assessment Tasks dialog box see Figure 69 4 7 4 1 Button Click Task This task is intended to help determine your ability to use a switch such as those typically provided with a mouse track ball joy stick or some other special switches In order for the switch to work with REACH it must simulate a left button mouse click in Microsoft Windows This task provides a good way of comparing different switch alternatives For example if a mechanical switch eye blink switch and puff and sip switch are all reasonable candidates for you then you can test to see which one produces the fastest speed However before deciding on a switch it is recommended that some of the other Assess tasks also be administered especially Double Click Release Point and Click and Drag because there is more to Windows operations than simply clicking a switch Also other factors besides speed should be considered expense availabili
165. ck this box if you don t want to be asked this again 101 102 4 0 REACH Menu Bar Options Settings VOICE Speech Sounds Turn Sounds Off Smart Keps Options ASSESS Figure 67 The Options menu in the REACH Menu Bar Select the Options menu on the REACH Menu Bar and several powerful features are available see Figure 67 These options are described in the following sections 4 1 Options Menu Settings The Settings lets you make quick adjustments to REACH M Select this option and the Settings dialog box appears containing a list of various categories of options You also can get to the Settings dialog box by pressing the Settings settings button For detailed information on the Settings options see section 2 11 Button Settings 4 2 Options Menu Voice Yoice Box Please select a voice fram Engine Controls the list below Pronunciation Sam Mary in Space PD Mary in Hall 2000 Mary in Stadium About Robosoft Six Robo5olt Five Robo5olft Four Robo5olt One Robo5oft Two Settings for Mike Pitch Hz Speed Words Min Figure 68 The Voice Box dialog box 103 Note Ifthe Voice option is grayed out that means that REACH could not detect a SAPI compliant speech engine on your machine Consider installing the speech synthesizer that comes with REACH that was provided free from Microsoft Ifthe Voice option is not grayed out the
166. cted the macro you want press the OK button To exit this dialog box without making a selection press the Close button Macros Options Save After you have created a key that contains a series of actions and you think this sequence of actions is something that would be used again in other keys then you can save the macro for future use To save the new macro press the Save button and the Macro Gallery dialog box appears and you are asked to provide a name for the new Macro Function You also can select a Category where the new macro should be stored or create a new category by pressing the Edit Categories button below the list of categories Note Any Key Action even a single letter can be saved as a Macro However saving and naming such macro functions usually are reserved for character key strings that are more difficult or time consuming to reproduce 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size Because it can be difficult and time consuming to position a group of keys in a straight horizontal row or vertical column REACH offers an Align Expert feature Similarly 1t can be difficult to create keys labels or pictures that are the 144 Macro Gallery Find the macro you want to load Look ir oy Ei about imactos e about Categories ep beginning of document Bi ep beginning of line Notepad macros A beginning of line User Windows macros beginning of h ginning of paragrap Word macros EA Wordpa
167. ction on your application etc then see the sections below which discuss how to insert special keys functions and macros Speech or Text Output The text in any key can be spoken typed or both spoken and typed Select which of these options you want by clicking on When pressed speak the contents of the key When pressed type the contents of the key or both in the space just below the Key Action text entry box The Talking Storybook Keyboard and Speech Keyboard keyboards that come with REACH were created using word keys with speech and text both turned on To change or remove text that has been assigned to the Key Action click inside the Key Action text entry box and then use the arrow keys to move to the correct location and the Backspace or Delete keys to remove the text Note If you are backspacing to remove text from the Key Action and you remove all the text and functions REACH will type the key s Normal key state label for you if you have the Use the label of the key to create the key action option turned on in Keyboard Details Note If your authored keys do not type In order for the key to have typed text output later when used in REACH M the Turn Typing On Off option in the Keyboard menu must be active so that it reads Turn Typing Off Note If your authored keys do not speak In order for a key to provide speech output later when used in REACH 1 the When pressed speak the contents of the ke
168. ctures folder use the Look In option to find the picture Copy it move back to the home folder select the desired category and Paste it Similarly if you want to move a picture from REACH to a floppy diskette e g to move it to another system reverse this procedure Pasting Pictures from the Windows Clipboard into REACH If you have a program that lets you copy pictures directly to the Windows Clipboard then you can use the Paste a Picture option in the Edit menu of the Keyboard Author grayed out if no picture available For example the Microsoft Paint program allows you select part of a picture and then Copy it When it is copied it is momentarily stored in the Windows Clipboard While it is there you can press the Paste a Picture option in the Keyboard Author and it will be painted on the selected key or keyboard background whichever one you are currently authoring The Picture Gallery is displayed and you are required to provide a name for the new picture file You also can select the category where you want it stored This procedure can be used to import many existing assistive technology pictures into REACH For example you can use pictures which were created for use in augmentative communication as long as your license agreement lets you use such pictures in this way and you are not violating a copyright Using the Grab a Picture Option to Capture and Place a Picture Another very powerful and simple way to impor
169. d Last Home gt Lindo LES i EEN Menu Settings Shop Figure 11 The REACH Button Bar when one of the scanning options is active The general scanning pattern for REACH is that first each defined row on the keyboard is offered for selection If no keyboard row is selected then the word prediction word bar is offered if it is present and if it contains at least one word If word prediction is not selected then the REACH Button Bar is offered 1 e if you have this option active in the Scanning settings Finally if none of these was selected REACH either returns to the first keyboard row if the AHF ScanBuddy is not loaded or offers ScanBuddy AHF s full screen scanning mouse emulator program if available and you have that option turned on in the Scanning settings REACH automatically looks for ScanBuddy and starts it when keyboard scanning is started so you do not have to start ScanBuddy If you want to start 35 ScanBuddy but do not want the button bar showing you can author one of the keys on the keyboard to start ScanBuddy When the keyboard 1s being scanned select a specific key by first signaling which row the key is in and then which key in that row This approach 1s called row column scanning For example when using Single Switch scanning the top row might be highlighted for a period of time If you do not click your switch then the second row is hi
170. d a Word ips Repeat gt E a uick Word Stop showing words after how many times i l Et Hat Keys through the list Ji 7 a gt X Figure 52 The word prediction Word Tips page of the REACH Settings dialog box In the second option Show Word Tips in REACH Word Prediction REACH highlights the word boxes in the word prediction word list one at a time Again when the word you are typing is highlighted press the Tab key and it will be typed for you You can select either option or both options When the third option Speak each word as it is shown is active REACH speaks each word or abbreviation sentence etc as it is displayed This option can be helpful for anyone who can recognize the sound of a word but has trouble reading or spelling it In the middle of the Word Tips page you can set the time periods for the initial pause Wait how long before showing words how long each word is displayed Show each word for how long and the delay between two words Wait how long before showing the next word It is important to note that pressing the Tab key when a word 1s presented results in the word being typed but pressing the Tab key when no word is presented will result in a Tab operation If you type the Tab key frequently be sure to provide enough time in the Wait how long before showing option so you can type a tab without selecting a word At the bottom of the page you can determine ho
171. d Less Variation If you only need the most frequently used words try one of the smaller dictionaries Whether using a small or large dictionary if you cannot find words that should be in the dictionary then maybe your pronunciation is different than that used in the dictionary If so try changing to a dictionary that allows More Variation in pronunciation To change the phonetic dictionary you are using select the Dictionary Manager option in the Word Prediction menu on the REACH menu bar This produces the Dictionary Manager dialog box see Figure 161 below Dictionary Manager Dictionary Options AutoE dit sounds like user vi Co e sounds like speech speech Ma aht net com Figure 161 Dictionary Manager Showing the sounds like main dictionary Click on the sounds like main phonetic dictionary icon and then click on the Edit button shown in Figure 161 under Dictionary Options and the Phonetic Dictionary Options dialog box is displayed see Figure 162 Here you can select from the different main phonetic dictionaries available Click on the one you want to try Note It might take time to open or close a phonetic dictionary especially the larger ones 229 Graduated Dictionary Editor The REACH phonetic dictionary has 4 different levels to choose From Based on the descriptions below select the combination that seems best For vou and try it For a while IF you cant find words you
172. d the Assessment Tasks dialog box appears showing the different assessment options see Figure 69 Also you can select the number of trials a trial 1s each time the task 1s presented From one to forty eight trials can be presented If more trials are desired the task can be run more than once Assessment Tasks Button Click C Button Double Click Button Releaze Ta fe Point a a Point and Click Suggested Number of Trials ee Na Letters Numbers O Words O Wobble Task Help Figure 69 The Assessment Tasks dialog box displaying the different assessment options Just below Number of Trials in the Assessment Tasks dialog box a message regarding Suggested Number of Trials is presented for each selected task For the Button Click Double Click and Release Tasks there are no recommended numbers because there is only one condition However in the Point Point and Click and Drag Tasks there are eight conditions four directions up down left and right and two distances near and far REACH block randomizes these conditions so that for every set of eight trials each condition is presented once and only once Consequently the recommended number of trials are multiples of eight so that all conditions are presented an equal number of times Similarly the recommended number of trials for the other tasks are Letters Task 9 nine different letters Numbers Task 10 digits 0 9 Wo
173. d Author a new picture will be created The new picture will look like the keyboard looked when the keyboard was saved 1 2 3 Traditional REACH Features version 3 or earlier e Undo options for typing and when authoring keyboards e Create Macro keys and Macro Keyboards e Home Keyboard concept makes it easy to get to the desired keyboard quickly e Keyboard Theme concept that lets you more easily adapt REACH to your situation and aesthetic taste e Last and Next keyboard buttons make it easier to move among keyboards e Hot Authoring options let you quickly alter keys without running the Keyboard Author just right click on one of the keys e Move REACH to the top or bottom of the display 31 Dock the keyboard and word prediction or Float them on the display REACH s Keyboard Family feature makes it easy to adapt an entire set of keyboards at one time Gallery Viewers makes it easier to find and load the keyboards pictures macros sounds and cursors you want Picture Gallery makes it easier to find the picture you want for your keyboard Word Sentence and Highlighted buttons for faster speech access Flexible file formats for pictures for keys and keyboard backgrounds jpg wmf Grab Picture option lets you quickly acquire pictures for your keys Graphics options e g tiling that make it easy to create professional looking keyboards Features that make it easier to creat
174. d Gallery Find the keyboard you want to load Look in ik board l sendas E alphabetic a to g no smart keys Categories 688 alphabetic ato g restore La eel search text gt Education Favorite prograrr i Favorites with la Favorites with sr Gamez Home Motor skills Number pads i Puzzles Secret code Figure 73 An example Keyboard Gallery dialog box It is worth your time to become familiar with the options available in the Keyboard Gallery Also this is a good place for you to learn more about Keyboard Families a unique feature in REACH that makes it more powerful and easy to use When you open the Keyboard Gallery all keyboards are listed in alphabetical order in the center section If you are looking for a specific keyboard you have four options 1 You can simply use the scroll bar to move up and down the list click on the keyboard you want and then press the OK button to select it Notice that when you click on one of the keyboards a small picture of that keyboard is displayed This 1s another useful tool for finding the keyboard you are seeking 2 If you know the Category of keyboard you are looking for e g Typing then select it from the list of categories on the left side and the list of keyboards shown will be those in that category Notice that when you select some of the categories e g Typing they will have sub categories listed under them For example the Typing c
175. d Word Button on the button bar or click on the Click here to add message that appears in the word prediction window when an unknown word is typed For more about the potential advantages of using Smart Lists when scanning see section 1 2 1 2 REACH with Smart Lists Technology For more about the adjustments you can make to Smart Lists see sections 2 11 7 2 Settings Smart Lists Scanning 2 11 7 3 Settings Smart Lists Appearance and 2 11 7 4 Settings Smart Lists Dynamic Labeling 1 4 5 Scanning and Smart Keys Technology Smart Lists 1s the best current approach for scanning However if you do not like the list based approach to typing for any reason another add on you should consider is Smart Key Technology Depending on the Smart Keys settings you have selected after you type the first letter using regular row column scanning REACH only scans the letters that Smart Keys has not removed or offers them first before offering the unlikely letters Either way your typing speed should increase because you do not have to wait while unlikely keys are offered In an experimental evaluation of Smart Keys an increase of 41 in typing speed was found for persons using scanning keyboards with Smart Key Technology compared to typing when using the same REACH without Smart Key Technology The primary reason for the improvement was that only likely letters are scanned or scanned first dependin
176. d a custom keyboard for math and a custom dictionary containing mathematical terms you can instruct REACH to only look in the math dictionary when the math keyboard 1s loaded To use this feature first create or identify the specific keyboard and dictionary you want to associate Then load the keyboard and then click on the Settings button Click on the Word Prediction tab and then click on Association Manager and the dialog box shown in Figure 9 is displayed Please Setup Dictionary Associations Please choose which dictionaries to look in while using the home basic keyboard Next from the dictionaries you choose designate your User Dictionary Your User Dictionary is the dictionary that will receive any words you add REACH will only look in the following dictionaries REACH Dictionaries Wa autoras Na Na Sound It Gut Berm This keyboard currently searches all open dictionaries Figure 9 Picture of the Association Manager dialog box In this dialog box select a dictionary that you want associated with the current keyboard in the left half of the dialog box and then press the Associate button You will see 1t moved to the right side of the dialog box Continue until you have associated all the dictionaries you want with the current keyboard Remember that when the keyboard is loaded it will look only in the associated dictionary ies If you change your mind click on any of the associat
177. d in the Reach5 User folder 234 dictionary A REACH file that contains words and their corresponding word frequencies docked keyboard or word prediction Options that allow the keyboard or word prediction word bar to be attached to the menu bar button bar etc and not able to be moved freely about the display floating double click A task performed by the user to make a selection Typically a mouse button is pressed clicked twice rapidly to make a selection when using a pointer drag A task performed by the user to make a selection Typically a mouse button is pressed clicked once and then held while the pointer is moved to a second location At the second location the mouse button is released completing the dragging operation dual switch scanning A scanning option in which the user moves from row to row or key to key by pressing the left mouse button and selects items by pressing the right mouse button dwell A REACH option that allows the user to make selections without an external switch This is done by pointing at a display location for a specified adjustable period of time Dynamic Labeling Part of Smart Lists Technology Patent Pending this feature displays the letters already typed and corresponding candidate subsequent letter s for as labels on the face of the key s This can be useful for anyone who finds it easier to recognize how a word begins than to remember determine the next letter to
178. d macros a ep beginning of paragraph ep beginning of word ep bold eae bottom of window ep browse document eee captialize all show Me all Macro Figure 96 The Macro Gallery Find the macro you want to load dialog box Ag same size REACH offers a Size Expert Click on the Alignment and Size ael button on the Key Details tool bar and you can select either the Alignment Expert or the Size Expert Alignment Expert Select the Alignment Expert option and you can select from four alignment options Align Keys only available if more than one key has been selected Align Top Labels their rectangular backgrounds Align Bottom Labels their rectangular backgrounds and Align Pictures Align Keys If you select a group of keys on the keyboard then select Align Keys in the alignment option the Alignment Expert Align Keys dialog box is displayed see Figure 97 When you select different Top to bottom and or Left to right options on this window you are provided a preview on the right side of the window When you have selected the alignment you want press the OK button To ignore your choices press Cancel Note Ifyou select an alignment option that is impossible because keys would overlap something that is not allowed in REACH M then a message box is presented explaining why your selection is not possible and the alignment is not performed Align Top Labels If you have selected a single key on the key
179. d or sentence that is in one of the word boxes word prediction windows where candidate words are displayed by simply pointing at that word box with your mouse To turn this option on click on the checkbox in front of the Words pointed at for in the In Word Prediction section of the Speech page of Settings Notice that you also can adjust the time period that you must point at the word box before its contents is spoken use the scroll buttons to select the time value Second if you would prefer to have the candidate words read to you one at a time e g to simplify the visual canning task turn on one of the Word Tips options found on the Word Prediction Word Tips page of Settings and also turn on the Speak each Word as it is shown option For more information on the Word Tips option see section 2 11 10 8 Settings Word Prediction Word Tips Note Ifa sound file has been attached to an abbreviation being pointed at in one of the word boxes then the sound file will be played instead of the text associated with the abbreviation For information about how to attach sound files to abbreviations see section 8 3 4 Adding Changing Deleting Abbreviations 1 7 4 Uses of Speech Speech Augmentation REACH can be used to augment speech Seven REACH features are relevant for speech augmentation First you can type a sentence and then have REACH speak the last sentence you typed either automatically see section
180. d the button bar and ScanBuddy if you have that AHF program When scanning the button bar you can select the Home keyboard button and get back to a keyboard that is scanning all home keyboards should be authored to be scanning keyboards Once you are on the home keyboard you should be able to select a keyboard link that gets you to where you want to go 1 e to a typing or speech keyboard On the Scanning page of Settings you also can select the Check this box for auditory scanning option by clicking on the box in front of it until a checkmark appears When this option is on REACH will attempt to provide speech feedback about which row key word or button 1s being offered even if the keyboard was not authored with auditory scanning in mind This feature can be useful to persons who have limited vision or who are not familiar with the keys words being offered Finally there is an option to have REACH automatically search for AHF s ScanBuddy program when scanning 1s initiated and start ScanBuddy if it is on your computer By default this option is turned on To turn it on click on the checkbox in front of Check this box to load ScanBuddy automatically until a checkmark appears to turn it off click on the checkbox until the checkmark disappears For an overview of scanning including scanning with Smart Lists see section 1 4 a2 2 11 2 1Settings Scanning Prompts and Timing To make adjustments
181. de appear to occur immediately However changes are not saved in the dictionary until the Done button is pressed Note All sentence changes only affect the currently selected dictionary If a sentence is to be changed in more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the change made in each dictionary Deleting a Sentence Sentences can be deleted by selecting the desired sentence from the word list and then pressing DES Delete the Delete button Note All sentence deletions only affect the currently selected dictionary If a sentence is to be deleted from more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the deletion made in each dictionary 203 8 3 6 Deleting Dictionaries If you want to delete an existing dictionary select it in the Dictionary Manager see Figure 138 and then press the Delete Dictionary Pele button You will be asked if you are sure that you want to delete the selected dictionary Deleted dictionaries are sent to the Windows Recycle Bin 8 3 7 Building Dictionaries from Text Files Note See the Legal Notice in section 8 3 Word Prediction Menu Dictionary Manager for warnings and information on the limitations of constructing dictionaries Because many REACH users want to include specialized words or enlarge the number of words in their dictionaries REACH now includes an option that lets you create new dictionaries very easily and quickl
182. do 215 063 HerMenmi HO DO aia 215 IOA Help Menus Search Por Hel py Das AA E 216 lOS Help Mena LOSA O A AA A E 216 1036 Help Menu About REACH Interface AUTO is 216 11 0 Using the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard eeeeocssssssececccossesceccososssesecessssssoe 217 11 Flow to Usea PARACE Key DO al srsccere iscsi tert areiee tenia ada o ls 217 11 2 Adding Words to the REACH Sound It Out User Dictionary occcccnnnncnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninoninininnnininaness 223 1 3 Selecta a Phone Keyboard rasio eaS N N uate isaausie N 225 17 11 4 Using Sound Feedback when Typing Phonetically oooccncnnnnnnnnnnncnccnnonononnnnnononnnnnnninoninonnnnnnnoninnnncnninininons 225 11 4 1 Sound Cues about Key Sounds Provided when a Key Is Pointed At onnnnnnnnnnncnnnoconononnnnnnnincnininnnininininos 226 11 4 2 Selecting a Phonetic Sounds Theme for the Sounds Played when Pointing at a Key cccccnnnnnnnnn 226 11 4 3 Sound Cues about Selected Sounds Provided in the Say It Window ccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 221 11 4 4 Speech Cues about Word Prediction Words Provided when Pointed At occcnnnnnnnninonononononenonininininininines 228 11 4 5 Speech Cues about the Last Word Typed provided by the Speak Last Word Button coccccccc 228 11 4 6 Speech Cues about the Current Sentence provided by the Speak Sentence Button cccccccccnnccnnno 228 11 4 7 Spe
183. e Homophones are words that sound the same but have different meanings for example Night and Knight REACH can display a Homophone Hint to help you choose which word you want to use Homophone Hints are displayed in the Word Prediction window only when you re using a Sound It Cut keyboard A Homophone Hint isn t really a definition of the word but rather a phrase which uses the word in its Typical context Please choose how you want ta use Homophone Hints from the choices below Twant ta see Homophone Hints all the time Show me Homophone Hints only when I point at the word that is a homophone I don t want to see Homophone Hints at all Figure 154 Picture of the Homophone Help dialog box where you can choose whether the short homophone help phrases are shown all the time when pointed at with a pointer or not at all One final important point should be made before continuing The above example in which the word light was typed was pretty easy 1n that the sounds forming the word light are quite distinctive What about words that contain more fuzzy sounds or combinations of sounds The pronunciation you report for a word can be influenced by where you live your dialect by your education by your ability to hear in general by your ability to discriminate among sounds in words by your familiarity with the target word by common mispronunciations by your ability to report pronunciations and by sim
184. e AutoType section is only available as an option when the AutoType option is turned on see section 2 11 10 4 Settings Word Prediction Options When active REACH will speak any letters that are automatically typed by the AutoType feature Turn it on by clicking on the checkbox until a checkmark appears 2 11 12 Settings Sounds Warning If you are using sound options sounds originating from other programs e g clock alarms or warning signals might not be played Note The sounds described in this section will be played only if you have a sound card capable of playing wav files Click on the Sounds category of Settings and many of the sound related options in are shown see Figure 56 If your computer can play sound wav files auditory feedback can be provided in a variety of situations Below is a list of the events that can trigger a sound file in REACH Fig Caret Track Sound Sounds can be played when certain events occur Fig Word Size Svein Re E Click on an event to change its sound Er s View When y EE A Options The word you typedis notin the dictionary pa More Optio A wordis selected from word prediction os l An Autospacel operation occurred 0 Punctuation A word or part of a word was AutoTyped A word was automatically corrected for you nentence Prediction has detected a sentence wae WordT ips A word was successfully added to a dictionary am E A word was automatica
185. e Sound Recorder dialog appears see Figure 92 The Sound Recorder dialog box lists the four steps in making the recording sound Gallery Find the sound you want to load Path amp Mame Look in i E QE ahfbang iscunds ahfbeep ahfbelll Categories a ahfbell2 QE ahfboo All Categories ahfchirp QE ahfclk1 ahfclk2 QE ahhclk3 ahfdrip QE ahfhonk ahfknack QE ahfmeow ahfoops QE ahfowl ahfpop 2 ahfpuz el Show Me E Sound Types Figure 91 The Sounds Gallery dialog box 138 Sound Recorder Choose a name for your recording Select the quality of your recording C High Fidelity TT Stereo Excellent Size Estimate for 3 sec recording 32KB Record your sound file by pressing the Record button Then preview the sound by pressing Play Repeat if necessary i qe j Record Flay Stop Total Time 0 00 Total Size DEB To keep and save the sound file press Done othenvise press Cancel ks Cancel Figure 92 REACH Sound Recorder dialog box Note Ifyou assign a sound wav file to the Pressed key state it overrides the default key sound that is set when you use the Select Key Sound option in the REACH Keyboard menu Speech Option If you select the Speech option from the drop down list of options on the Sounds EA button the Please Enter Something to Say dialog box is shown see Figure 93 Please enter something to say Figure 93 The Pl
186. e Thus to locate the sentence The review of this matter is still pending you would type The review of and when the target sentence appears in one of the word boxes and is selected the entire sentence is typed or spoken if speech synthesis is active Note Any sentence appearing in a word prediction word box will display a blue dot at the beginning to help you identify it as a sentence Note When the Sentence Prediction option is on any sentences detected will be moved to the beginning of the REACH Word Prediction word boxes Hint Ifyou use Sentence Prediction frequently and especially if the different sentences begin with the same words it might be useful to set REACH word prediction to the vertical orientation and widen the word prediction window so that more words in each sentence can be viewed Adding a Sentence To add a sentence to a selected dictionary type it in the text entry box under Word in the Dictionary Editor dialog box see Figure 141 As you enter the new sentence notice that when the first space is typed 202 REACH recognizes that you are entering a sentence and the Word label on the text entry box changes to Sentence The amount that can be automatically typed can be very large In general the total number of characters including spaces and punctuation can be up to 500 characters If the sentence you are adding is one that you will use very frequently select the Very Often option under
187. e Yes use numbering option to turn it off click on the radio button in front of No don t use numbering see Figure 51 2 11 10 8 Settings Word Prediction Word Tips Clicking on the Word Tips category of settings produces several options and settings dealing with REACH s Word Tips feature see Figure 52 If you would like to simplify the process of looking for a word in the word list try one of the Word Tips options see Figure 52 In the first option Show Word Tips Balloons REACH presents the words from the list one at a time in a balloon located close to where you are typing When you see the word you are typing press the Tab key and it will be typed for you and a space added Hint If you don t like where the text balloon is located you can use your mouse to drag it to a new location REACH Word Prediction then will try to keep that same distance from where you are typing 82 S Smart Lists word Tips shows each word in Word Prediction one word at Home Keyboard at a time Display amp Bw Favorites n Speech Show Word Tips Balloons right where I m in y y Word Predictior O P 4 Typing Show Word Tips in REACH Word Prediction Fig Caret Track z E i E imin EB View Wait how long before showing words secs gt Options Y More Optio Show each word for how long Secs 0 Punetuation nee 1 Wait how long before showing the next Sii secs Numbering wor
188. e automatically resized by REACH to fit onto the display area above the keyboard if the keyboard is docked or above the button and menu bars if the keyboard is floating Click on speak Word Word button to speak the last word you typed Click on the speak Sentence button to apo me sentence you typed Highlight some text in your application and then click on the wet Highlighted Highlight button to speak that text Note Maximize a window by clicking on the Maximize El button in the top right corner of most applications Ei Pressing the next program 94M button in also will attempt to maximize the next program displayed In many cases if a dialog box is hidden by the keyboard or if the keyboard is hidden by a dialog box REACH automatically will bring the one you want to come to the top when you point at it with your mouse or other pointer Note Sometimes for this pop to top feature to work you must make sure the dialog box is the active window In addition you can customize the REACH interface and keyboards to suit your special needs and abilities You can set whether REACH starts when the computer is started which keyboard to load and which application program s should also be started Just some of the many features designed into this software have been mentioned To understand the real power in REACH read the rest of this manual Also be sure to use the comprehensive help system provided with t
189. e sticky key down and the second analogous to the sticky key up 143 When you create a macro key you can author sequences of instructions that contain text special key actions functions or other existing macros To insert other existing macros see Macro Options Load two sections below Y our new macros might or might not work as you expect One of the problems is that there might be timing issues For example 1f you send one message to open a word processor and immediately send another message instructing that application to open a specific document it might not work because the second message arrives too early One tool for dealing with such problems is the Delay function listed under System functions on the right side of the dialog box In the above example you could try sending one message to open the application then delay for 30 sec then send the message to open the document Note You might have to use and adjust the time setting for the Delay function in order for your new macro to work correctly If you are creating a keyboard macro it might be easier to use the Keyboard Macro Recorder option With this option rather than selecting every special key separately from the list you can simply type in the key sequence from your keyboard see the next section for details Creating Macros Using the Start Recording Keystrokes Option Any key action can be saved as a Macro function but such functions usually are r
190. e REACH e mail and web macros to work REACH Functions Below the System Functions is a list of REACH Functions These all relate to operations that can be performed on REACH For example if you insert the Keyboard Hide function then when this key is pressed the REACH keyboard will be hidden Many of these options can be useful if you are using scanning keyboards For example you can scan to keys that contain REACH adjustments that otherwise are only available in the Settings dialog box which you cannot scan to unless you have ScanBuddy For scanning users REACH functions like Scan Keyboard Faster can placed on one key and Scan Keyboard Slower placed on another key to make it faster and easier and possible to make adjustments to scanning speeds Building Macro Keys WARNING REACH allows the user to create keys that execute macro functions when pressed It is possible that someone could accidentally or intentionally create a macro Key that does damage to your files or your computer When you create a macro key be sure that you enter commands that you know will not cause any problems Also be sure that you only accept keyboards from sources that you know would not create destructive keys Applied Human Factors Inc cannot be held responsible for any damage created by macro keys If you want a key to go beyond typing a letter or performing a standard key function such as Backspace then you should consid
191. e Ree ern et 117 2 A Wayne Our keys on tae Ney DO ceed ee 118 2 17 Alignine and Sizing a GTO of Ke VS AAA A AA AA 118 RARO CA A stad EAE saa chet acta EA 118 See AP O o II E E 119 TALS a 119 D2 sD EA A A 120 LLO keyboard and RS oi 121 32811 Aligning and Sizing Key Labels and Pictures 0ooooccnccnncncccnaaaaoaaooooooonoono nono nono ono nono nono nono nono no non nnnnnos 121 S202 Addme ClipArt of Other PICS id 121 Sall il LG Pictur AAA e aol ee eee 124 52 2 Suggested General Strategy for Authoring Keyboards ccccccccesseeessseseseeseseessesesseeeesessseeeseeeeeens 124 5 2 3 Changing an Existing Keyboard orcas 126 324 Authorm a NEW ING y DO al derenin aa 127 5 2 5 Laymo Out Keys om the Key boards nian ae os 128 So UNA the Key e e de sett 129 52 52 Chaneime the size and shape OA AAA eee 129 A COPIE KEYS a rN rr Tr re er 129 S254 e an tna T Aon ae ate ee ee 130 5 2 5 5 Selecting and Positionine a Group o i 130 SO Cane Ma Group OL CYS ns it a ta 130 o UE A A edn ates alder ace E teed eas 130 32 38 Deleting a Group OF LA A 130 5 2 6 Dino RE iron 131 Lol iRey Deas key Labe A A A 132 LO WG yD Cra KE a a 134 2103 Key Detalle Key PICS A dee 135 52 04 Key Details Key sound and Speechrenienni n a a 138 LO RENDER a E 140 3 210 07 Key Details Alameda td 144 A LA Eey A A Ueaeheneitceeaes 149 20 0 Key Details Key Stale iia 149 I2 Previewing Keys While in the Keyboard Authof A A eae 150 5 2 8 Makine Tr
192. e Trial You have day s left in your period To R A PAY purchase this software call us at 888 243 0098 GRECS Aino VEEL Ley If you purchased the software click this button license the software Applied Human Factors Inc for support call 888 243 0098 Ea To license your purchased REACH follow the three step procedure shown on the resulting window see picture just below In Step 1 you will email AHF three things a the Name of the person or organization who owns this product b the Serial Number for this product stamped on the CD and back of the User s Manual or emailed with your receipt if you purchased this with nothing shipped to you and c the Fingerprint for the machine you are licensing this 1s automatically shown on this window _ _ _ _ _ _ __a__ _ 2 Three Easy Steps to License Your Software Fill out the information below and then click i Email for License button or email the informat below to oe ee e m a A Ia This is the number stamped on your CD or key disk li teria a Ge a fers hy F a This code uniquely identifies your machine Email for License If the button does not launch your email please email the above information to license ahf net com or call us at the number below STEP 2 Wait for us to email your license code j In the meantime you may click the exit button and j re
193. e a volume control or right click on it and then open the volume control if you want to make other adjustments to your sound controls If you cannot find the speaker icon press the Windows Start button select the Control Panel and then double click on the Sounds and Audio Devices icon In the resulting window you can adjust the volume and make other adjustments to your sound system 223 There are three primary sources for sound speech feedback when using the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard cues about the sounds associated with the different keys provided when you point at a key with your mouse cues from the Say It feedback window when you click on the keys there or click on the Say It key and speech feedback about the words presented in the word prediction window and the homophone hint phrase for words that can sound like other words In addition some other speech features available in all REACH products can be useful and are briefly described below These include the speak last Word button the speak Sentence button and the speak Highlighted text button 11 4 1 Sound Cues about Key Sounds Provided when a Key Is Pointed At When you point at one of the keys on a phonetic keyboard a sound recording is played to provide a cue about the phoneme s represented by that key For example when pointing at the key for the short A sound a recorded voice might say a apple that is the sound and then a word that i
194. e and use auditory scanning keyboards Use keyboard keys to Print Pictures in your documents Smart Sticky Keys Double Click Drag and Right Click that revert to a single click if you are aiming at a button key or menu option where only a click is accepted Options for resizing keys keyboards and labels Quick Undo scanning option just hold your switch for a specified time Build a Dictionary feature makes it easy to create custom dictionaries Different speech voice options pitch speed and pronunciation can be adjusted Main and multiple custom dictionaries can be used simultaneously or one at a time Add Word button for quickly adding an unusual word to a user dictionary AutoType option that finishes typing a word when it 1s the only one possible from the letters you have typed and the words in the current dictionaries Word Tips option that presents words from word prediction one at a time either in a balloon located close to where you are typing or highlighted in the word prediction window scanning Words can be read aloud and are typed by pressing the Tab key AutoEdit option that corrects commonly misspelled words Sound files e g recordings of speech can be attached to abbreviations Sentence completion for sentences paragraphs up to 500 characters that is based on words that you have typed and sentences you have added to any of your dictionaries AutoAdd automatically adds words that are
195. e automatically after a click After clicking with Dwell you typically don t want to keep clicking in the same place This option causes Dwell to pause automatically after a click To start Dwell again just move your mouse Cancel Figure 28 The Dwell Pause Options page of Settings If the first top pause option is active REACH will present an area of the display top right corner where if you move the mouse cursor there a prompt will appear asking if you would like to pause Dwell see Figure 29 If you want to pause Dwell e g while you read a document or a web page then dwell click where it says Dwell here to Pause Dwell Dwell then will pause until you restart it by pointing in the same area of the screen and dwell where it says 61 Dwell here to Pause Dwell Figure 29 The Pause Dwell prompt that can be used to temporarily pause Dwell If Dwell is already paused the wording on this prompt changes to Dwell here to Restart Dwell Dwell here to Restart Dwell If you want this window to retract move your mouse outside the top right corner or aim it at the icon at the end of the window When you are finished pausing and want to restart Dwell aim in the upper right corner and the window will appear again but this time it will say Dwell here to Restart Dwell Aim there and Dwell is started again If you use Dwell and want this method available to pause dwell click on the checkbox in front of Offer
196. e click will be applied instead of a drag Hint The Drag Lock feature can be useful in some graphics programs 46 2 4 Button Right The REACH smart mouse mouse button emulator also provides a right button option This is especially useful if you are using a pointer with only one switch or if you have difficulty using the right mouse button For example you might want to use REACH s Hot Authoring feature in which you right button click on a REACH key to change its color label etc When the Right button is pressed once the label changes to Once The next time you point and click in an application three things happen 1 A right button click is sent instead of a left button click 2 The Once label returns to Right 3 The system returns to the standard left button condition If this button is pressed twice in a row the label changes to Lock and right button clicks continue to be simulated until the button 1s pressed a third time returning the system to the standard left button mode With REACH s Smart Sticky Keys if you have selected either the single or locked right click options and then point at and click on a menu option button etc for which a right click does not normally apply then 1 the picture on the Zj right click button changes to and 2 a single click will be applied instead of a right click Note You can use the right button click on a REACH to start REACH s Hot A
197. e combination of key presses System Functions REACH Functions etc For example a simple macro might hold the Alt key down while typing pressing the f key to open the File menu in Microsoft Word In REACH you can load predefined macros from different lists of macros e g Windows Macros Word Macros etc or you can create your own custom macros For more information see section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action 120 Keyboard Links Another powerful Key Action 1s to perform a keyboard link Ifa keyboard link action 1s assigned to a key when pressed that key loads another keyboard This lets you create Keyboard Systems such as the REACH Speech Keyboard System that comes with REACH For more information see section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action 5 2 1 10Keyboard and Key Labels With REACH you can place one or two labels on the Keyboard Background or on each key actually one or two on each of the three Key States for that key For information on Background Labels see section 5 2 12 7 Background Foreground Button for information on Key Labels see section 5 2 6 1 Key Details Key Label 5 2 1 11Aligning and Sizing Key Labels and Pictures To create attractive keyboards you might want all the key labels and pictures to appear in the same location within a key 1 e for the three Key States and across all keys To help with this REACH provides an Alignment Expert tool that aligns labels and pictures for
198. e key was selected Size Label Backgrounds and Size Pictures For more information on this valuable tool see section 5 2 6 6 Keyboard Details Menu Option Selecting the Keyboard Details option in the Tools menu of the Keyboard Author displays the Keyboard Details Dialog box The options here are discussed in section 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard Note If you already have created some keys and then change one of the options in the Keyboard Details dialog box the changes will not be applied to the keys that are already created or selected but will apply to keys that are created or selected after the change 5 2 11 4Help Menu The Help Menu in the REACH Keyboard Author software provides a quick way to get information and advice for making or changing keyboards Three help options are available Contents Menu Option Select the Contents option and view a list of general help topics Glossary Menu Option If you want to know the meaning of a specific term select the Glossary option Search Menu Option If you are trying to find a solution and know a key word related to the problem select the Search option 5 2 12 Keyboard Author Button Bar Options Several powerful options are available for quick use on the Keyboard Author Button Bar These are described in the following sections 5 2 12 1 Key Palette Button When you want to add a key to your keyboard click on the Key Palette Rex Palette button and
199. e the Numbers Task is selected 4 7 4 9 Words Task This task is similar to the Letters Task see section 4 7 4 7 Letters Task except that words made up of three consonants consonant consonant consonants or CCCs are presented instead of single letters You are instructed to enter each of the three letters as quickly and accurately as possible and if mistakes are made to continue to the next letter This task is included to provide additional information about your ability to type in a situation more similar to a real world setting The following twelve CCCs are randomly presented PXR VWG XJQ VGJ RDV GND RNP JXN GDR NWJ WXP and DPV The Words Task can be used to help determine 1 The best pointer switch combinations 2 Which keyboard is best for you 3 The best settings for the Dwell Switch see section 2 11 3 Settings Dwell 4 The best settings for the Wobble option see section 2 11 4 Settings Wobble Note Turn off Smart Keys and Smart Lists features when using the Words task because those features are designed to help you type words and in this task nonsense syllables e g pxr are typed See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Words Task is selected 4 7 4 10 Wobble Task If you have trouble holding a pointer in a steady position the Wobble Task can help measure your stability When using this task a cross is prese
200. e too dramatic for some users who might not like the keyboard changing that much Consequently other Smart Keys options are available If you select the third option Make them Gray and Inactive the outlines of the unlikely keys are still displayed 1 e they are grayed out but you cannot select them by clicking on them they are inactive The fourth option Make them Gray and Active is similar to the last option except that the grayed out unlikely keys can be used This option might be the best if you are typing a lot of unusual words that are not in the dictionary 1es you are using However the chances of accidentally pressing the wrong key increase because all keys are active 66 In the fifth option Swap Label and Background Colors keys that are unlikely are modified so that colors of their labels and background are switched For example if a key normally has a black label and a yellow background and it is found to be unlikely then the label would change to yellow and the background color would change to black Also with this option the unlikely keys are active 1 e they can be pressed at any time Note Ifa key has a picture on the key face that blocks the view of the background color the color switch might not be perceived However the color of the key s label if there is one will still change and should be visible The sixth option Change their Colors lets you select a color scheme for keys found to be unlike
201. e typing words with the phonetic keyboard Figure 156 below shows what the dialog box looks like after you have entered all of the sounds for the name Tammy Notice that the Say It key also is presented to the right of the sounds you have entered As with the standard Say It window you can click on any of the keys to hear their sound or click on the Say It key to here the sounds blended or pronounced 22 na OCIO WOTTON TATO ARA laa As ala a ma m Dots bF ag film m ja m p e lr ae r r MOW Ues Le WO U SOUTIL dSn th a phoneTic Kevboarc a F E build the we fay ou wish to add word wantt to add sounds like a A click the Say It button to hear your word When the word sounds right press the Next button Figure 156 Picture of REACH s Sound It Out Add Word Wizard dialog box after you have entered the four sounds that you use to pronounce the name Tammy At this point you have finished entering the pronunciation of Tammy and so you press the Next button When you do two things happen First the appearance of the Sound It Out Add Word Wizard dialog box changes to that shown in Figure 157 below the wizard now is asking you to type in the letters for the word you want to add Second your phonetic keyboard disappears and is replaced by a more conventional typing keyboard that uses an alphabetic layout Your task now is to use the more conventional keyboard to type in your friend s name as
202. ear close to the mouse cursor followed by the word Ready followed by the word Set followed by the mouse click If you select the Traffic Light then a picture of the traffic light will appear next to the mouse cursor showing a red light and when you continue to aim at a target the colors on the traffic light will go from red to yellow 1 e get ready and yellow to green 1 e get set and then the mouse click will be created In Step 3 you can select or create a sound to be played when the mouse click is simulated If you want to adjust the time periods associated with dwell see section 2 11 3 1 If you want to make pause options available when using Dwell see section 2 11 3 2 Finally 1f you want REACH to apply smoothing to the mouse cursor when using Dwell see section 2 11 4 Settings Wobble Note REACH Dwell might not work with some application programs especially graphics programs because of the way they were written Note When Dwell is on you will not be able to drag icons on your desktop without using the REACH Drag option on the REACH Button Bar Note The REACH Dwell feature should not be used with some of REACH s Assess Tasks Button Click Button Double Click Button Release Point and Click and Drag 2 11 3 1Settings Dwell Timing Kl REACH Startup E Customize the Dwell Timing Keyboards Programs Step 1 Set the length of time you have to aim to indicate that you are af Scanning ready
203. ease Enter Something to Say dialog box If you want the key you are creating to say something special when pointed at or pressed enter it into the text box of this dialog box You might want to say something different than what the key types directly For example you might have a picture ofan apple on the key face and the key might type the word apple when pressed but you might want it to say this is a red apple when it is pointed at Also you might want yet another phrase to be spoken when the key is pressed If so move to the Pressed key state and repeat this procedure When you have entered the text you want spoken into the text entry box press the OK button If you change your mind press the Cancel button Press the key action button to specify what the selected key will do when it is pressed 1 e its action or function The Key Action dialog box is displayed see Figure 94 Much of the power behind REACH keyboards is found in this dialog box Your key can do things ranging from very simple e g typing a w to very complex e g opening a document typing a paragraph speaking the typed words saving the document closing the document loading another keyboard etc In addition two different sets of actions can be assigned to each key one that is performed when the normal unshifted key is pressed and one that 1s performed when the shift key is pressed 1 e when the key is pressed with the Shift key d
204. ech Cues about Any Highlighted Text provided by the Speak Highlighted Button 228 IDS Selective 4 Photo Dic E AN A E 229 tG Ouestions and AMS WES AAA AA AA 230 12 0 Glosa ua la ins 233 13 0 MAI Ia A UTA A E E E A NE T E 245 18 Acknowledgements The REACH Interface Author program is part of a larger research and development effort supported by a Small Business Innovation Research Grant 2 R44 HD28864 02 from 1992 95 awarded by the National Institute of Child Health and Human Development NICHD If you have purchased REACH with Smart Key Technology REACH with Smart List Technology or the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard NICHD also funded work that help develop and test the those technologies 2 R44 HD37713 02 Applied Human Factors Inc expresses gratitude to NICHD for funding those projects The Principal Computer Scientist and software developer for this software is Kevin S Templer Mr Templer was the sole software developer for the previous two versions 2 0 and 3 0 and is the primary software developer and principal designer for this new version 5 Thanks also are due to Patrick A Nugent who worked on a very early version and also contributed to Version 5 especially Smart List Technology In addition thanks go to Michael J Roberts who contributed to the software development of version 5 and the test software used in the experimental evaluation of Smart Lists and the Phonetic Keyboard Ann J Hess
205. ecting the key itself Scanning Keyboards are especially useful for young users or for persons who have difficulty pointing with a pointer sen file A REACH file that contains the scanning instructions for a Scanning Keyboard All scn files have a scn file extension scroll bar Vertical or horizontal windows that contain scroll buttons which when pressed or dragged allow the user to move up down or left right respectively in a window or list that is too large to be displayed on the screen at one time sentence prediction With REACH you can enter sentences up to 500 characters into a user dictionary without using an abbreviation Later if you have the Sentence Prediction option turned on REACH will monitor words you have typed and display any sentences that match that pattern When you select a word box containing a sentence it will be typed single switch scanning A scanning option with which you click the left mouse button to select the correct row and then again to select the correct key size expert A feature in the Keyboard Author that allows you to equate the size of selected keys or the size of labels and pictures within a selected key Smart Key Technology or Smart Keys A letter prediction approach developed by AHF in which those letters not following the letter sequence already inputted based on words in the currently open dictionaries are removed or their color changed to help the user locate the next let
206. ed dictionaries and then click the Don t Associate button and it will be moved back to the left side of the display 30 You must designate one of the associated dictionaries as a User dictionary to which new words can be added e g when you press the Add Word button To accomplish that click on one of the associated dictionaries and then press the User Dictionary button Note The associations for some of the custom add on keyboards might be set up by Applied Human Factors Inc in a way that prevents you from changing the associations This 1s to insure that the custom keyboard behaves the way 1t was intended and so that nobody accidentally disturbs the associations Examples of such keyboards are the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard and the REACH Smart Speech keyboard system Note When a keyboard has associated dictionaries it only looks in those dictionaries Note Ifa keyboard does not have any associated dictionaries it will look in any dictionaries that are currently open in the Dictionary Manager 1 2 2 4 New REACH Speech Keyboard System Version 4 and later versions of REACH have an extensive speech augmentation system containing more than 120 speech keyboards with dozens of possible messages on each keyboard To try out this new assistive and augmentative communication AAC system click on the Speech Keyboards key found on most Home keyboards The yellow keys are links to other keyboards If you
207. ed in the Reach5 User folder containing the REACH Speech Dictionary abbreviations see speech dictionary Speech Dictionary The REACH Speech Dictionary feature is a special user dictionary provided with REACH which contains more than 350 abbreviation expansions for the purpose of augmenting oral if speech synthesis is 241 available or written when the words are typed into a document communication It is contained in a file named speech dic and found in the folder Reach5 User Speech Keyboard A term describing a keyboard that contains keys which have been assigned text to speak speech recognition A technology in which a person s vocalizations are recognized and translated to typed text or used to control the computer If you have speech recognition hardware and software a voice word set including spoken digits one to nine and your system 1s set so that this word set is available at all times consult the user s manual for the speech recognition system being used you might be able to use speech to select word boxes There is absolutely no guarantee that the REACH program will work with all speech recognition systems speech synthesis A technology in which computer hardware software is used to imitate speech REACH offers several options for speaking letters words sentences etc see the Speech page of Settings spelling alarm The sound used to alert you that a word has possibly been misspelled The so
208. ed just above when you point at a key on a REACH phonetic keyboard a recording is played as a cue about what sound that key represents You can select the kind of feedback you would like to hear when you point at a 226 key In the current version of the REACH Sound It Out Keyboard you can choose from two phonetic sounds themes In one theme when you point at the B key a recording of a voice saying bih is played This phonetic sounds theme is called Simple Phonemes because just the sounds are spoken In another theme when you point at the same B key a recording of a voice saying bih bus is played In this second Picture Phonemes theme the sound is spoken followed by a word containing the sound This theme is especially well suited for use with the Pictures phonetic keyboard because the spoken words match the labels of the pictures displayed on the keys For example the B key has a picture of a bus and when you point at 1t you hear bih bus to remind you of the sound for that key To try the different themes select Change Phoneme Key Sound in the Keyboard menu and the dialog box shown in Figure 159 is displayed To hear samples of one of the themes click on the speaker button to the left of the theme under Hear Samples To stop playing the samples click on the speaker again To select one of the themes for your phonetic keyboard click on its button If you do not want or need auditory prompts when you p
209. ee section 2 11 11 Settings Speech 42 1 7 2 Uses of Speech Tool for Finding Letters Auditory Keyboards Many of the REACH keyboards can speak their labels when pointed at with a mouse or other pointer This helps persons who are not familiar with a keyboard or who have difficulty seeing a keyboard To turn this feature on and set the time delay before speaking 1 e the time from when a key 1s pointed at until its label is spoken go to the Speech page of Settings and go to the Keyboard section If you turn on the Keys pointed at option then any sound files that have been attached to the Pointed At key state for a given key or the key s label will be played when pointed at for the specified amount of time If you select the Auditory Scanning Keyboard option on the Speech page of Settings then REACH will attempt to read the label of the pointed at key after it is offered when scanning REACH also will attempt to say something about the row being offered in scanning whether a descriptive statement was included during authoring e g vowels or nothing was authored about the row e g row A through Y 1 7 3 Uses of Speech Tool for Finding Words If you are learning a language e g English and have trouble locating words you are trying to type REACH offers two important options that can help you locate type and correctly spell the word you are looking for First you can have REACH speak a wor
210. egories Figure 77 The Picture Gallery dialog box Use the scroll bar to browse through the pictures and when you find the one you want click on 1t and then press the OK button to place 1t on the key or keyboard background On the left side the various picture categories are presented If you know which category your picture is in you will find it faster by first clicking on the category and then selecting 1t in the center section Below the list of categories find and press the Edit Categories button and four options are presented 1 New Category use this option to create a new category you must provide a name 2 Rename Category Warning The Category names are the names of subfolders in the main Pictures folder If you change the name of a category you also are changing its path so there will be problems with any other keyboard that is using pictures in the renamed category If that happens you will have to re author those keyboard and key pictures to reflect the new category name or change the category name back to its earlier name 3 Remove Category use this option to delete an existing category Warning Removing a category deletes all the pictures in that category Not only will they not be available for use but there will be problems with other keyboards which used those pictures 4 Cancel If you know a key word that is likely to be in the title of a picture enter that word where it says lt search text g
211. elect the settings and times you want to try The changes will not take effect until you start scanning 1 2 2 2 Graduated Dictionary REACH was designed to be flexible enough to assist people with a wide range of ages and abilities It is important to match the vocabulary size of the Main dictionary to that of the user and the situation You would not want to give a young child a dictionary containing 40 000 words and you would not want to give a college student writing a term paper a dictionary with 4 000 words This is especially true if you are using AHF s new Smart Lists feature because the lists can get long if you are using a large dictionary and don t really need it In the new REACH Main dictionary you can set the vocabulary to one of four levels ranging from a core vocabulary of 7 800 words to a very sophisticated vocabulary of 45 000 words To adjust the size of the Main dictionary select Dictionary Manager in the Word Prediction Menu click on the Main dictionary then click on the Edit button and the Main Dictionary Editor dialog box will be displayed see Figure 8 below a Graduated Dictionary Editor The REACH Main Dictionary can be adjusted for different levels of vocabulary Based on the descriptions provided below select the level that seems best For vou Then try it For a while to see how it works IF words that you Use a lot are not available come back and raise the level if there are many words that you
212. en in the Normal key state When the user points at the key with a mouse its appearance changes to that the Pointed At key state shown in the middle When the user clicks on this key its appearance changes again to the Pressed key state shown on the right side A t A t Normal FPomted At Fressed Figure 103 Example of the different appearances that can be created for the Normal left Pointed At center and Pressed right key states for one of the educational keyboards that comes with REACH 149 Normal Key State The Normal key state refers to the normal characteristics of a key appearance when 1t is not being pointed at with a pointer or pressed To change the key s state to Normal select Normal When you are in the Normal key state the title of the various tool bars will change to show the current key state e g Key Details Normal Pointed At Key State The Pointed At key state refers to the characteristics of a key appearance and sound when you point at that key with a mouse or other pointer To change the selected key s state to Pointed At key state select Pointed At When you are in the Pointed key state the title of the various tool bars will change to show the current key state e g Key Details Pointed Pressed Key State The Pressed key state refers to the characteristics of a key appearance and sound when that key is pressed This does not include any effects caused by the key s functi
213. en the key is pressed the name of the capitol is shown on the key Santa Fe and the answer is read aloud e g The capitol of New Mexico is Santa Fe eee Pe ee pe pe ye m Figure 120 Sample Quiz Keyboard that quizzes and teaches U S State Capitols For another Quiz Keyboard example load the math multiply x2 keyboard This keyboard presents a numeric question on each key face in the Normal key state e g 2X2 When pressed the answer is displayed as a number and read aloud two times two equals four 5 2 13 12 Game Keyboard Keyboards REACH keyboards also can be used for entertainment For example the Target Practice Keyboard is included to provide an entertaining way to practice aiming your pointer accurately When you click at one of the targets you get feedback Another example of a game that was created with REACH is the Search for Gold game You can try it out by selecting the search keyboard With this keyboard click on different picture cues provided and receive printed and spoken clues that help you find the secret hidden golden treasure see Figure 121 5 2 13 13 Storybook Keyboard Keyboards REACH Storybook Keyboard keyboards combine pictures printed text very simple animation and spoken text to make learning more interesting An example Storybook Keyboard system included with REACH is the Three Little Pigs keyboard system Typical of Storybook Keyboard keyboards several keybo
214. ent shapes and sizes These keys can be dragged to the keyboard and used as they originally appear or they can be reshaped once dropped on the keyboard Performance Aid Keyboard A term describing any keyboard or keyboard system designed with the goal of improving a user s performance in a job education or any other real world setting phonetic dictionary A special dictionary that contains words and their corresponding phonetic encodings The primary phonetic dictionary in REACH is labeled sounds like and the phonetic user dictionary is labeled sounds like user phonetic keyboard A special keyboard that allows you to type a word by selecting the sounds in the word instead of the letters in the word phonetic keyboard theme A special keyboard theme that contains at least one phonetic keyboard phonetic sound theme When you point at one of the keys on a phonetic keyboard a sound file can be played to help you determine what sound that key represents a phonetic sound theme is a set of such sound files which are presented in the same way for example the sound is spoken followed by a name of an object starting with that sound phonetic typing A unique way of typing in which you type the words by entering the sounds in the word instead of the letters in the word picture keys Any REACH key that contains a picture that is displayed in one or more of the three key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed point and click A
215. enu 185 186 187 239 position of window 76 193 predicting words 239 Pressed Key State 121 150 Programs Menu 10 99 100 Puzzle Keyboard 33 163 164 177 240 Quick Speech 43 Quiz Keyboard 33 119 150 163 172 173 240 REACH Button Bar 34 35 42 45 55 60 64 73 86 95 96 97 99 151 167 185 186 189 190 191 211 212 213 238 REACH Dwell 59 60 187 REACH Keyboard Author 40 41 114 175 215 REACH Main Dictionary 80 238 REACH Menu Bar 34 99 103 113 185 189 190 193 211 215 REACH Smart Mouse 59 REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard 27 28 184 REACH Speech Dictionary 44 168 207 241 REACH Speech Keyboard System 33 44 121 166 237 240 REACH Word Prediction 32 34 36 64 74 76 77 79 80 82 83 84 95 151 168 171 189 190 193 194 195 196 197 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 234 235 238 243 Reading Assistance Keyboard 174 175 Release Task 105 107 109 247 Repeat Key 91 92 93 Reverse 36 152 Right Button 33 186 187 Run 7 99 100 Save Keyboard 153 154 Save Keyboard As 153 154 Say It button 218 240 Say It window 219 220 223 227 228 Scanning Expert 54 125 153 161 162 240 scanning instructions 35 52 125 127 151 152 153 154 161 162 175 176 211 240 241 Scanning Keyboard 21 33 35 36 51 57 78 151 161 163 175 176 211 212 213 241 Scanning Keyboards 35 36 51 57 78
216. er building a macro key For example if you want a key on a REACH keyboard to perform the Windows Copy function which for most programs usually has a keyboard shortcut of pressing the Control key and the c key you can compose that macro in the Key Action dialog box To create a simple Copy macro key first select the Control key function from the list of key functions on the right side and then press the Insert Command button The term Ctrl is displayed in the Key Action text box Next type the letter c from the hardware or REACH keyboard The term Ctrl c now is shown in the Key Action text box Finally enter another control command by selecting the Control key function and then pressing the Insert Command button The final macro term is now displayed Ctrl c Ctrl The second control command is required because the first one acts as a control key down instruction and the second acts as a control key up function For any such sticky key operations in which a shift control alt key is held down while another letter or letters are pressed you need two commands one analogous to pushing that key down and the second analogous to letting it up Remember that sticky keys are depicted by bold red type surrounded by brackets Note Ifyou are making a macro that uses a sticky key Shift Control Alt you must insert two of them e g two Controls two Alts etc The first can be thought of as analogous to th
217. er is allowed to enter textual information e g a file name title bar The title bar is the usually distinctively colored horizontal rectangle that appears at the top of a window and usually contains the name of the program transparent key Any REACH key that contains a bmp picture with a color that has been defined as transparent With transparent keys the user can see through the transparent portion to the key face color In addition if the key face color is set to None by using the Key Details option in the Keyboard Author module then the user can see through the transparent portion all the way to the keyboard face undo in Keyboard Author The Undo button in the Keyboard Author removes the last change you made when authoring a keyboard 242 undo in REACH A button in REACH that when pressed undoes the last typing action This can be the last letter typed the last word selected from word prediction the last letters autotyped etc User Dictionary A customized dictionary created by a user and filled with words abbreviations or sentences vertical window In REACH s word prediction you can decide whether alternative words are presented in a vertical window words appear in rows from top to bottom or a horizontal window words appear in columns from left to right Change orientations by either double clicking on the title bar or selecting Vertical or Horizontal orientation in the Settings dialog bo
218. er sources However many individuals and companies that create art will let you use their art as long as it is for your own personal use and you are not trying to sell it or profit from it of course that is true of the artwork available in AHF products Important Note You are responsible for insuring that you are not illegally or improperly using someone else s copyrighted or protected artwork The following discussion assumes that you have obtained appropriate permission or have a license agreement to copy or utilize the artwork for your own personal use There are four places where pictures can be used in REACH on the keyboard background and on the key face for the Normal Pointed At and Pressed Key States for each key In all cases a tool bar is present that contains the Picture A button When you press this button four options are presented and two of them are relevant to this topic Find a Picture and Grab a Picture Using the Find a Picture Option to Locate and Place a Picture When you select Find a Picture the Picture Gallery dialog box is displayed See Figure 77 In the center section all the pictures in the REACH Pictures folder are presented rather than their labels to help you more quickly find the one you want Many of them have to be shrunk in order to display them in this window so you cannot determine their actual size 121 Picture Gallery Choose a picture for the key Look in pictures Cat
219. ern is repeated before scanning pauses whether to activate an option that lets you undo your last typing action or row selection by holding your switch and how long it must be held down how long and whether a prompt is presented to reverse the direction of scanning single or dual switch only and how long to offer ScanBuddy if it is installed on your computer To adjust any of these times first click on the event you want to change then click on the increase El button or decrease hd button to the right of the list of events to adjust to the desired time The first event sets the number of scanning cycles that are performed before scanning pauses automatically For example if you have it set to 1 it will offer the keyboard the word prediction bar the Button Bar and ScanBuddy if installed one time before pausing To start scanning again operate your switch once If you have this option set to 2 then it will repeat the same cycle twice before pausing The second event is Prompt to undo after holding the switch When this option is active a green checkmark appears to its left During scanning this option offers you the opportunity to Undo a selection row key or word 56 prediction selection by continuing to hold the switch closed only available in single and dual switch scanning The prompt is displayed when the selected time has passed and when the undo operation is available Note The Scanning Pause option
220. es not provide a warranty that the operations and functions in the REACH Interface Author software will meet Your requirements or that the operation of this software will be uninterrupted or error free AHF warrants any CD or other medium provided by AHF for the purpose of installing this program for ninety 90 days from the date of purchase by You You must provide a dated receipt This warranty is limited to defects in materials and workmanship of the medium under normal use The complete liability of AHF is the replacement of any such CD or other medium that does not meet the warranty provided by AHF in no case is AHF liable to You for lost profits lost data or any other damages due to direct or indirect effects from using this software In all cases AHF s liability is limited to the price of this software G Exporting this Software Program You shall not directly or indirectly sell export transfer transport give or in any way deliver this software product to countries or agents of countries that are embargoed or restricted by the export laws of the U S Government You are responsible for obtaining current information about which countries currently are included in the list of prohibited countries IF YOU FAIL TO COMPLY TO THE CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This license 1s governed by the laws of the County of Bexar State of Texas United States of America If You have any questions abo
221. eserved for key actions that involve a combination of special keys special functions text etc To make it easier to create a Macro function press the Start Recording Keystrokes button and you can simply type your key sequence into the Key Action text box For example if you want to create the Copy macro discussed above you could simply press the Record button and then just type in the Control and hold it down then c and then let up the control key from your keyboard When you are finished press the Stop Recording Keystrokes button Note If you use the Keyboard Macro Recorder be sure to turn it off when you are finished by pressing the Stop Recording Keystrokes button Macros Options Load In addition to the Special Keys and Special Functions discussed above you also can Load a predefined Macro function and insert it in the current key Press the Load button and the Macro Gallery Find the macro you want to load dialog box is displayed see Figure 96 Different macro functions that come with REACH and those that you have created and saved using the Macro Save command below are presented in the main central window Use the scroll bar to search for the macro you want On the left side you can select from different categories e g Windows WordPad etc You also can search for a macro by entering a key word or term on the right side of the dialog box and then pressing the Find It button When you have sele
222. etic a to h block Education l alphabetic a to 2 one line Favorite prograrr Favorites with la asci code 1 Favorites with er ascii code 2 Games o Al ascii code 5 Motor skills ascii typing start Number pads l f P audito scanning alphab Puzzles Sacer cade al auditor scanning qwerty E A show Me All Keyboards Figure 104 The Keyboard Gallery Choose a name for the keyboard dialog box Exit Menu Option Select the Exit menu option when you are finished authoring Hint Remember to provide new names for any standard REACH keyboard that you have changed so that the original keyboard is still available for possible later use Specifically use the Save Keyboard As option instead of the Save Keyboard option so that you can assign a new name 5 2 11 2Edit Menu Several useful options are found in the Edit Menu and are described below 154 Undo Menu Option Selecting this option produces the same result as pressing the Undo ndo button on the Keyboard Author Button Bar REACH will try to undo the last action Most actions can be undone but some cannot e g saving a keyboard cannot be undone Repeatedly pressing this button continues undoing previous actions Caution There is no Redo option so make sure you really want to undo an action before you select this option Copy a Key Menu Option Selecting this option produces the same result as pressing the Copy 244
223. ew keyboards and 1s intended to follow the procedure strategy described above For a discussion of the types of keyboards you can make see section 5 2 13 Types of Keyboards that Can be Authored 125 5 2 3 Changing an Existing Keyboard Now that you are familiar with the various menu and button options and have a general strategy for proceeding information and suggestions will be provided on how to use REACH when changing an existing keyboard this section or when creating a new keyboard from scratch see section 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard Recall that when you first start the Keyboard Author it asks whether you want to Open and Change a Keyboard or Make a New Keyboard Figure 78 If you want to change an existing keyboard either select the Open and Change a Keyboard option on this window or if you have been authoring another keyboard select the Open Keyboard option from the File Menu in the REACH Keyboard Author In either case the Keyboard Gallery dialog box is presented see section 5 2 1 1 The Keyboard Gallery and Keyboard Families for more information on the Keyboard Gallery While you have the Keyboard Gallery dialog box open browse through the different categories of keyboards and keyboards that are provided You also can click on the name of any keyboard and see a small picture of it Also notice that when you select the Template category several template keyboards are provided to make
224. ey state check to see if the title of the tool bar is Key Label Normal then the label is automatically applied to all three key states 1 e Normal Pointed At and Pressed However you also can change the labels in the Pointed At and Pressed key states 1 Click on key state e button on the Key Details tool bar 2 Select the key state you want e g Pointed At 3 Press the key label EN button again producing a new Key Label Pointed tool bar 4 Type in a different label for the Pointed At key state Also you can change the label in the Pressed key state so that different labels appear for each of the three key states If you want a label to appear in the Normal key state but no labels in the Pointed At or Pressed key states simply move to the desired key state press the key label A button and delete the label for that key state The first time you assign a label to a key it is called the Top label because it appears in the top portion of the key However you can drag the text box and label to any location you want Also if a key already has a top label assigned and you press the key label button again a second Bottom label text entry box appears close to the bottom of the key Using these features you can have two labels appear on the key For example you might want a capital Q to mon appear on the top of the key and a small q to appear on the bottom of a key for some users Note You also can use the Ali
225. eyboard function e g Delete Shift Enter etc REACH s Key Actions go far beyond that For example words sentences paragraphs etc can be typed and read aloud by a single key The other primary Actions that can be performed are Special Key Functions Special Action System Functions Special Action REACH Functions Execute Macros and Keyboard Links These are briefly introduced in the following sections Special Key Functions Special key functions include Enter Shift Delete and other common special key functions found on many computer keyboards In the Keyboard Author these functions can be selected from a list For more information see section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action Special Action System Functions These are not keyboard functions but system commands that can be very useful Examples include E mail starts an e mail message to a specified address Web goes to a specified Internet address Shutdown exits Windows etc These functions also can be selected from a list For more information see section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action Special Action REACH Functions These commands perform some function within REACH M Examples include Button Bar Hide hides the button bar Menu Show shows the Menu Bar Keyboard Home loads the current Home Keyboard Again these are simply selected from a list of alternatives For more information see section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action Execute Macros A macro is som
226. eyboards keyboards are for fun but also can provide stimulus response stimulation as well as point and click practice Simply click on one of the rectangular pieces and it is removed showing part of the puzzle Reset the puzzle by pressing the Start Over key These also can be great for practicing using a pointer For an example of an easy puzzle 91 pieces load Puzzle Easier For a more difficult puzzle 299 pieces load Puzzle Harder To make your own Puzzle Keyboard use the REACH Keyboard Author feature Load the Template Puzzle Easy keyboard to make an easy puzzle and the Template Puzzle Hard keyboard if you want to make a hard puzzle Create the picture you want using a graphics program and load it as a keyboard picture in Keyboard Details and you are done 5 2 13 19 Memory Assessment Keyboard Keyboards REACH keyboards can be used to practice or test memory skills A variety of approaches can be taken depending for example on 1 The type of information being used 2 The procedure being used 3 The retention period 1 e the time period between presenting the information and being tested on it Type of Information The type of information presented is up to you Spatial information in the form of drawings or scanned pictures can be used as a keyboard background see section 5 2 12 7 Background Foreground Button or key face in the Normal Pointed At and Pressed key states see section 5 2
227. f selected keys First select the set of keys you want to change using the dragging or shift key procedures described above Notice that all the keys in the selected group are changed to the Normal key state and that the Key Details Normal State tool bar is presented You can use several of the options on this tool bar to change characteristics of all the keys in the selected group For example the color label text font label font color label font size etc can be changed for all the selected keys Virtually everything can be changed except the actual label what it says and the key action function because those are variables that are almost always unique for each separate key 5 2 5 7 Aligning a Group of Keys If you would like some help aligning group of keys on your keyboard first select the group using one of the methods A described above press the align size ll button point at the Align Expert option and then click on the Align Keys option and the Alignment Expert dialog box appears see Figure 82 Here you can choose from a variety of options related to aligning your selected keys For information on how to use other options in the Alignment Expert see Alignment Expert in section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size Press the OK button to complete your choice or the Cancel button if you change your mind 5 2 5 8 Deleting a Group of Keys 130 If there 1s an entire group of keys that you want to remove
228. fered in the word prediction window Ifso you could click on it now and it would be typed into your word processing program or whatever program you are typing into Also shown in Figure 148 the keyboard is updated by Smart Keys again to show you the sounds that follow L long I Finally notice that the Say It window has been updated showing both of the sounds we already selected Now you must search for the third and final sound in the target word the T sound After you find and click on the key representing the T sound the Sound It Out program again goes into action and changes the keyboard the word prediction windows and Say It window see Figure 149 You know that you have finished entering the sounds for the target word so you should check out the yellow word to see or hear if it is the one you are after By pointing at the yellow light word you hear the synthesizer say light and confirm it is the correct word Again depending on your abilities background and familiarity with seeing the word light you might simply recognize the word and click on it to type it Either way you have found typed and correctly spelled the target word 219 Will you turn on the BH 4 oH Page 1 Sec 1 111 ro a ce In Coli English U 5 2 tignt 2 tiea lightly a Figure 149 The display after the third and final T phoneme is selected Smart Keys continues to predict the next sound the word predictio
229. ffered see Figure 145 These include Contents Getting Started How Do I Search for Help On Glossary and About REACH Interface Author and are described in the following sections REACH also offers context sensitive help at a number of different sites in the REACH software e g on the various Settings pages in the Assessment Module in the REACH Keyboard Author etc If you select Help at any of those sites help information directly relevant to those modules is presented 10 1 Help Menu Contents Selecting the Contents Help Option produces the Help window showing topics on the right also you can select the Contents tab at the top for another list of topics Choosing any one of these topics produces text and pictures related to that topic In addition you are able to move to even more detailed discussions of specific areas of interest Using the Contents option you can move to more and more detailed information receiving relevant information as you go 10 2 Help Menu Getting Started Because REACH is an innovative windows management system it does not always follow windows conventions For that reason many users might benefit from an overview of how REACH works Selecting the Getting Started Introduction and Overview of the REACH Interface Author Software option provides a way to access general information about what REACH can do The topics available include discussions of
230. files are shown The keyboards that have scanning instructions with them have colored keys on their icons While you have this dialog box open take some time to look through the names of the dozens of keyboards that come with REACH Also note that you can select a specific subfolder or Category of keyboards on the left side of this dialog box When you click on any keyboard name a small picture is displayed Save Keyboard Menu Option Use the Save Keyboard option to save a keyboard using its current name Hint Remember to provide new names for any standard REACH keyboard that you have changed so that the original keyboard is still available for possible later use Specifically use the Save Keyboard As option instead of the Save Keyboard option so that you can assign a new name Save Keyboard As Menu Option Use the Save Keyboard As option when you want to save a keyboard with a different name You will be asked to provide a name at the top of the resulting Keyboard Gallery Choose a name for the keyboard dialog box see Figure 104 You do not have to enter an extension REACH automatically provides the correct extension 1 e kbd Also on the left side of this dialog box you can select a Category which 1s a subfolder where this keyboard is to be saved Press the Edit Category button in the lower left corner if you want to add a new Category subfolder Rename an existing Category Remove a Category or Make a C
231. formance aid 1 Using the REACH Dictionary Editor or abbreviation expansion features professionals using technical and easily misspelled or mistyped jargon or persons repeatedly entering the same text phrases into a database program can store the terms or phrases either in their true form Sentence Prediction or in abbreviated form abbreviation expansion With this approach both typing time and errors can be significantly reduced 2 Performance Aid Keyboards can reduce work time and errors For example if you have a job where you are entering illness or injury information into a medical database you can create a keyboard system with pictures that will help you identify the anatomical site of the illness or injury and correctly type the corresponding information quickly and accurately As another example if you are a computer programmer working in the C language a keyboard can be made which by pressing a single key types the format for a specific C command so that all you have to do 1s move the cursor and fill in the appropriate details While most useful Performance Aid Keyboard keyboards are targeted for a specific job or setting an example comes with REACH to give you a feel for what can be done To try this sample keyboard load the Address Book keyboard However to make this keyboard useful you should first use Hot Authoring or load it into the REACH Keyboard Author and fill in the appropriate information e g names phone n
232. g on which option you use with Smart Keys 38 1 4 6 Using Scanning with ClickAssist Technology ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 If you are using scanning and have trouble operating your switch as accurately as you would like then you should try AHF s ClickAssist technology With this option you can define your own switch action to get rid of some of those unintentional selections that can occur before or after the switch action you wanted to make If you tend to click your switch two or more times before you really intended you can set ClickAssist to disregard any clicks that are shorter than a designated duration Similarly if you tend to click a couple extra times when releasing your switch you can instruct ClickAssist to ignore any clicks that occur within a set period of time after the first click These changes are made on the Scanning ClickAssist page of Settings Using REACH s Hot Authoring Features Note The Hot Authoring feature described in this section can be turned off 1f for example you tend to accidentally press the right mouse button use the Don t Allow Hot Authoring option in the Keyboard Menu Similarly if you find that Hot Authoring does not work check to make sure that it is turned on select the Allow Hot Authoring option in the Keyboard Menu For more information on turning on off Hot Authoring see section 5 7 Keyboard Menu Allow Don t Allow Hot Authoring While yo
233. g the Done button returns you to the main Assessment Tasks Dialog box If the Save option is selected you are asked to enter the file name for the resulting data The data that are printed or saved include specific data for each trial as well as summary statistics see section 4 7 3 Data and Statistics Reported in Assess Press the End Tasks button to exit Assess 4 7 2 Scanning Dwell Wobble ClickAssist Smart Keys and Smart Lists in Assess The Assess tasks will not work with scanning keyboards To turn off scanning click on the No Scanning option in the Keyboard Menu REACH s Dwell switch and Wobble feature should not be active when conducting the Assessment button and pointer tasks because both the assessment task and Dwell require precise timing However they can be used with the Letters Numbers and Words tasks Similarly turn off the ClickAssist feature when using the Assess button or pointer tasks Finally turn off Smart Keys and Smart Lists features when using the Letters or Words tasks because those features are designed to help you type words and in those two tasks single letters or nonsense syllables e g xvh are typed 106 4 7 3 Data and Statistics Reported in Assess At the end of each assessment task a brief performance summary is displayed The information presented varies from task to task You also have the option of printing and saving the resulting data If either of those optio
234. ge 6000 full picture set or the Small 2 800 picture set then you have lots of pictures that you can choose from to add to the keys on your REACH keyboards In addition the keys on the 120 keyboards in the REACH Speech Keyboard System that comes with REACH automatically will fill up with pictures Figure 7 shows the same REACH Speech keyboard with left and without right the Mayer Johnson Pictures If you add a new picture or change an existing picture using Hot Authoring or the Keyboard Author when you select the picture option the Picture Gallery will be displayed There you will find all the Mayer Johnson Pictures in a separate folder labeled Mayer Johnson Pictures While this set of pictures usually comes in one single large folder AHF has assigned them to different categorical folders e g nouns verbs food etc to help you locate the picture that 2 1s perfect for your situation As a result more than one copy of a given picture might be found e g a picture of a person eating might be found in the nouns food folder and also in the verbs food folder 7 May I have BOGE eeej s Speech Home Food Breakfast Figure 7 One of the REACH Speech keyboards with left and without right Mayer Johnson pictures Notice that the labels on the keys with the Mayer Johnson Pictures are located below the pictures If you prefer the labels on top you can go to the Keys Change Labels tab of Setting
235. ghlighted for a period of time If you still don t respond the third fourth and fifth rows are highlighted in turn If you click your switch when for example the third row is highlighted then the individual keys in that row are highlighted one at a time until you select one by clicking your switch Then the scanning pattern then starts all over again If you have auditory scanning turned on go to the Speech page of Settings then REACH tries to provide aural cues for each row and key when offered When this feature is active REACH will attempt to provide spoken cues about the rows and keys being offered even if the keyboard was not authored for auditory scanning This can be very helpful for people who have trouble seeing or reading the options presented If the REACH Word Prediction option is shown above the keyboard as in Figure 10 then the entire row of predicted words is highlighted as part of the scanning cycle see section 2 11 10 Settings Word Prediction If you see the desired word in the list and click your switch REACH starts scanning the word list and then you can select the word you want Another scanning feature is the Reverse Prompt option not available with Inverse Scanning Turn this option on or off in the Scanning Prompts amp Timing page of Settings click on the General tab When you are in scanning mode and this feature is active a Reverse cue is presented It is only presented mo
236. gn expert to align the labels the rectangular label backgrounds on a single key 1 e the Normal Pointed At and Pressed key states and or across different selected keys see section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size There are several options available on the Key Label tool bar and they are described in the following sections The Label Text Color Button Option This button produces the Color dialog box see Figure 85 132 Figure 85 The Color dialog box Here you can select the color of your label 1 e the letters in your label from a variety of options Pick the color you want and then press the OK button The Label Font Button Option This button produces the Font dialog box see Figure 86 where you can select from a variety of fonts Font Regular F USPS Bar Code F Verdana Lolors Figure 86 The Font dialog box You also can select the font size and style you want A preview area is presented to provide you a better idea of what the label will look like When you have made your selections press the OK button to make the changes or the Cancel button to ignore the changes you made 133 The Label Background Color sl Button Option Press this button to change the color of the label background the rectangular area that the label is printed in When pressed the Color dialog box is presented see Figure 85 except that one additional option is present Specifically there is a Transpa
237. green dot to help you recognize that an abbreviation is contained in that word box Note If the abbreviations are appearing in the word boxes along with the text to be typed spoken and you would rather not see the abbreviations go to the Word Prediction More Options page of Settings and select the Do not show abbreviations in word boxes option Similarly if the abbreviations are not appearing in the word boxes and you would like to see them select the Show abbreviations in word boxes option on the same page of Settings Hint If you use abbreviations frequently and especially if the different abbreviations begin with the same letters or words it might be useful to set REACH word prediction to the vertical orientation and widen the window so that more words in each abbreviation can be viewed Hint Because there are no words beginning with X in the Main Dictionary and very few beginning with Z it might be useful to begin abbreviations with one of those letters so that they come up quickly and are less likely to conflict with other common words Similarly it might save time to select abbreviations that contain unusual letter sequences For example using nbuy as an abbreviation in the above example is better than using nobuy because there are no words that begin with the letters nb but there are many that begin with no Also if you have Smart Keys the Smart Keys will know about the b following the n Adding an Abbreviat
238. h information from two different sources If using a mouse or a mouse emulator REACH uses a real or simulated left mouse button click for the first switch 1 e the single switch for single switch or inverse single switch scanning and the first switch in dual switch scanning and a real or simulated right mouse button click for the second switch in dual switch scanning If you are using the mouse buttons directly as your switches or if you are using other switches that emulate mouse button clicks then select the Mouse option Note If you are using a joystick or other pointer that emulates a mouse then select the Mouse option 57 If you are using switches on a joystick directly or switches that emulate those from a joystick then select the Joystick option This option tells REACH to treat Switch 1 from your joystick as a left mouse button click and treat Switch 2 from your joystick as a right mouse button click 2 11 2 3Settings Scanning ClickAssist ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 Figure 25 shows the ClickAssist page of Settings where you can turn on and adjust this powerful assistive feature FAI REACH Startup 2 Keyboards Programs 3 Scanning Prompts amp 1 Switches Please select the choices below that best describe your click style while scanning check all that apply I don t need any help with clicking restore to default setting I make multiple clicks and then I push the but
239. hange to Horizontal View and selecting that option will change the orientation of the word bar to horizontal Similarly if the word bar is currently displayed in a horizontal orientation one of the options in the Word Prediction menu will be Change to Vertical View and selecting that option will change the orientation of the word bar to vertical when you change from horizontal to vertical the word bar automatically is changed from Docked to Floating 8 6 Word Prediction Menu Turn Caret Tracking On or Off The Caret Tracking feature allows the word prediction word bar to move around in an attempt to stay out of the way and not block your view of where you are typing the text caret This option is available word prediction is floating If this feature is turned off you will find an option labeled Turn Caret Tracking On in the Word Prediction menu and selecting that option will turn caret tracking on If caret tracking 1s on you will find an option labeled Turn Caret Tracking Off in the Word Prediction menu and selecting that option will turn caret tracking off For more information on Caret Tracking see section 2 11 10 1 Settings Word Prediction Caret Tracking 8 7 Word Prediction Menu Turn Word Tips On or Off The Word Tips feature presents candidate words one at a time in either a balloon shaped window close to where you are typing or in the word bar by highlighting them If this feature is turned off you w
240. has a homophone hint then it will read the word first and then the homophone hint for more on homophone hints see Section 11 1 How to Use a Phonetic Keyboard If you want to turn this option off press the Settings button on the REACH button bar select the Speech tab on the left of the Settings dialog box to produce the Speech page of settings see Figure 158 and find the Word Prediction section Next click on the check box in front of Words pointed at until the check mark is removed If you want to change the time delay before the word 1s read aloud press the Settings button on the REACH button bar and select the Speech tab on the left of the Settings dialog box see Figure 158 Find the Word Prediction section where it says Words pointed at for seconds and use the scroll buttons there to increase or decrease the time delay that occurs before the word is read aloud when you are pointing at it 11 4 5 Speech Cues about the Last Word Typed provided by the Speak Last Word Button Another potentially useful speech tool that comes with all versions of REACH 1s the Speak Last Word button found on the REACH button bar When you click on it the last word REACH entered is read aloud 11 4 6 Speech Cues about the Current Sentence provided by the Speak Sentence Button Yet another useful speech tool that comes with REACH is the speak Sentence button found on the REACH button bar When you click on i
241. hased the Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols add on This page of Settings applies only to those keys keyboards If you decide you do not want to show such pictures click on the check box in front of Show the pictures until the checkmark is not shown To have them shown again click on that check box until the checkmark is shown On the lower part of Figure 62 notice that you can determine where the labels for such keys are displayed by checking on the option you prefer Labels can be left alone first option displayed at the top of the key second option or displayed at the bottom of the key third option 2 11 14 3 Settings Keys ClickAssist ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 Select the ClickAssist subcategory of Keys and the ClickAssist settings are presented which take effect when you are using point and click input see Figure 63 these are the same settings as found on the ClickAssist ClickAssist page of Settings If you tend to accidentally click when you don t intend to when using a pointer you can set ClickAssist to ignore any click that isn t longer than a specified duration Also if you accidentally make multiple clicks right after a good click you can set ClickAssist to ignore any click that occurs before a specified amount of time after a good click The first option turns on off ClickAssist and the second third and fourth options turn on the three major correction
242. hat it sounds like is now being shown in one of the other word prediction boxes Whether the question mark is blue or green if you point at any such word you will see and hear that word used in a short phrase or homophone hint This is done to help you decide which word is the one you are after For example Figure 150 shows what you would see if you pointed at the word lied shown in Figure 4 The brief phrase not true he lied is shown and also read aloud to help you decide 1f this is the L long I T word that you are after Figure 150 The word lied when pointed at in the word prediction window A short phrase or homophone hint is included to help you decide 1f this is the target word Because the phrase not true he lied doesn t seem right for the word you are after you can point at the other completed L long I T word and when you do you hear and see the phrase shown in Figure 151 This one sounds more like the light you are after so you click on it and it is typed for you 220 Figure 151 The word light when pointed at in the word prediction window shows a short phrase to help you decide 1f this 1s the word you are after The word OR 1s used to let you know this word has more than one common meaning There are a few points to make about these homophone hints First they are not definitions they are just short expressions that include that word These phrases were created with the goal of making it more
243. have purchased the optional Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols set of pictures the keys on these keyboards automatically will show pictures see left side of Figure 7 above Ifyou have not purchased the picture set the keys will not show these pictures see right side of Figure 7 1 2 2 5 Improved Hot Authoring To make a quick change to a key right click on it and the Hot Authoring dialog box is shown In addition to the standard hot authoring features change the label color keyboard link and action of that key you also can add or change a sound or picture Of course you also can use the REACH Keyboard Author to make those and other more dramatic changes like adding or removing keys or changing the scanning pattern by selecting Make in the Keyboard menu When you make a change with hot authoring the change is saved with the keyboard 1 e it is not just a temporary modification For users who accidentally right click you can block hot authoring by selecting Don t allow hot authoring in the Keyboard menu 1 2 2 6 Keyboard Previews in the Keyboard Gallery When you are in the Keyboard Gallery looking for a keyboard to load or link to now you can see a picture of each keyboard before selecting it Just click on the name of the keyboard of interest and a small picture will be shown for a short period of time The next time you save that keyboard e g after hot authoring a key or after saving a keyboard from the Keyboar
244. having to indicate the right row again Notice that you also can adjust how long this prompt is offered 53 Options for Audible Sounds and Speech Prompts For the keyboard scanning events and most similar events listed in the following three sections you can instruct REACH to play an audible sound 1 e wav file or speak specified text Specifically at the bottom of the Prompts amp Timing page look under Select an audible prompt you can specify a sound file to be played when that event occurs Sound or text you want spoken Speech To play a sound click on the Choose button and the Sound Gallery Find the sound you want to load dialog box appears see Figure 131 This dialog box shows the sound files that come with REACH located in the Sounds folder To preview one of the sounds click on it with your mouse When you find the sound you want click on it and then press the OK button For information about adding sounds see section 2 11 12 Settings Sounds To have synthesized speech speak something when the selected event occurs type the text you want in the text entry box to the right of Speech For example you might want to hear first row spoken when the first row of keys is offered during scanning Note There are four ways to have scanning cues read aloud 1 e auditory scanning First a keyboard can be authored to provide sounds and speech when a key is pointed at These sounds are then played dur
245. he Change Keyboard Size option in the Keyboard menu to adjust its size Note The main disadvantage of using a floating keyboard is that the keyboard can block your view of the application you are working with When docked AHF s Windows Management feature reduces this problem because the applications are shown above or below if you have REACH docked to the top the REACH keyboard In Step 3 you can decide whether you want the REACH Button Bar and keyboard and word prediction if they are docked to be located at the bottom of the display or at the top of the display When the Button Bar is at the top the order of REACH components from the top down is Menu Bar if displayed Button Bar keyboard if docked and displayed and word prediction if docked and displayed 2 11 5 1Settings View Word Prediction Select the Word Prediction subcategory under View in Settings and different display options are presented for word prediction see Figure 32 Here you can change the orientation of the REACH Word Prediction word bar where the different word prediction candidate words are displayed The word bar can be either horizontal or vertical Ifin horizontal mode you can select how many words you want displayed 1 e how many word boxes are in the word bar In vertical mode you also can adjust the number of words presented but you do this by dragging the height of the word bar Select which window orientation
246. he alphabet When you select one of the letter tabs e g as in the x tab selected in Figure 141 REACH displays all text letters words abbreviations beginning with that letter in the list box on the left side see Figure 141 where a list of speech abbreviations is shown 8 3 3 Adding Changing Deleting Words One of the fastest ways to add a word that you just finished typing to a user dictionary is to click on the Click here to add message that appears in the word prediction window when an unknown word is typed You must do this after you finish typing the word but before you type a space or punctuation mark Another fast way of adding a word to the Na user dictionary is to press the Add Word 4 Merd button on the REACH main button bar if it is not grayed out If it is grayed out that means the word you just typed is already in one of the open dictionaries When this option is used REACH places the new word in the first user dictionary it encounters with a name that starts user If no such dictionary is open it will prompt you and let you decide which user dictionary to open Of course you also can use the Dictionary Editor to add words to any of the user dictionaries Words in the Main Dictionary cannot be added changed or deleted However you can add change or delete words abbreviations or sentences in any user dictionary Adding a Word To add a word to the currently selected dictionary type that word in
247. he beginning of this manual for information about our web site The following sections provide more information on different types of keyboards that can be created with REACH 5 2 13 1Standard Typing Keyboards Standard Keyboards are defined as those that are relatively common REACH simply simulates such keyboards providing the same general appearance and functions A good example is the REACH computer keyboard which copies the layout of a typical 101 key computer keyboard United States layout Several international keyboards also are included look in the typing folder and select the International subfolder Another example is the typing keyboard which limits the keys to common typing keys like a typewriter 5 2 13 2Special Keyboards Special keyboards are defined as those intended to help someone type or enter data more easily but which are not as common as standard keyboards One example is the numeric key pad Number Pad which is useful when entering numbers Another example is the functions and numbers keyboard which is provided so that if you are using the standard typing keyboard that has letters and other typing characters but no computer functions you can use a link key to quickly load the Functions keyboard 163 5 2 13 3Template Keyboards Template keyboards are provided to help you author new keyboards They contain keys laid out in various patterns e g to save you the trouble of lining up rows a
248. he software especially the How do I feature 34 Note In order for characters words sentences etc to be sent to an application the Turn Typing On option in the Keyboard Menu must be on when on it will read Turn Typing Off and the application must have the focus You can give a program the focus by clicking on its window Usually when a program has the focus the background color of its title bar at the very top changes to a distinctive color Note It might be helpful to move the Windows Taskbar the bar that displays the Start button to the bottom or top not side of the display To do this simply click on the Taskbar and drag it to the bottom or top If you position the Taskbar at the same location as REACH M turn off the Auto hide feature 1 e if the Taskbar hides itself when not being pointed at To turn off the Auto hide feature 1 Click on the Taskbar using the right mouse button 2 Select Properties from the resulting menu 3 Click on the Auto hide option from the resulting Taskbar Appearance or Taskbar Properties dialog box until the checkmark disappears Also you should select the Always on Top option if you use the Taskbar very frequently 4 Click on the OK button to complete your selection 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards Some users might have difficulty using a pointing device to select keys If you cannot use a pointer you might be able to operate a left mouse button swit
249. he speak when pointed at option on the Speech page of the Settings dialog box This approach can provide speech augmentation without cluttering your application with a lot of text Ifa sound file has been attached to the abbreviation being pointed at then the sound file will be played instead of the text associated with the abbreviation 207 Table 1 Outline of the naming scheme used in speech dic MM First Character x Calls all abbreviations in the originally installed REACH Word Prediction Speech Dictionary file Conversational phrases Third Character 1 Phrases with I as subject Third Character u Phrases with you as subject Other phrases are not in specific categories Second Character e Second Character d Drinks No specific subcategories Second Character e Entertainment Third Character f Films Third Character g Games Third Character m Music Third Character tv Television Third Character x Second Character f Third Character b Third Character d Third Character e Third Character f Third Character m Third Character s Third Character u Third Character v Third Character x Second Character h Third Character c Third Character g Third Character h Third Character m Third Character p Third Character x Second Character I Third Character
250. here you click not just on REACH keyboards Note The settings found on the ClickAssist ClickAssist Settings page are the same as those on this page 94 2 12 Button Next Program Sometimes it is hard to keep track of the open applications REACH provides some assistance with its next Program application Pregam button Pressing this button automatically brings another open application to the top Continue pressing the Program button and the open application programs are brought to the top if possible If the keyboard is docked REACH automatically attempts to identify active application programs bring them to the forefront and moves them upward on the display so they appear above the keyboard or below the keyboard if you have moved REACH to the top of the display Also REACH attempts to automatically maximize the application and resize its window so there is no overlap between it and the keyboard You can maximize a program by pointing and clicking on the Maximize BJ button located in the top right corner of most application windows If the REACH keyboard is not docked REACH still attempts to locate and display different running applications and to position them above the REACH Button Bar or below if it is on the top However if undocked the keyboard will appear on top of the application depending on where you have the keyboard and application positioned Occasionally pressing the Program bu
251. hich you first locate what you want to say and then click on the key to speak it The more elaborate is the new REACH Speech Keyboard System which is linked to the Speech Keyboards key on most home keyboards The second is the traditional REACH Speech Keyboard System a relatively simpler system that has always been available in REACH and which includes pictures The third system uses a combination of REACH keyboards and abbreviation expansion see Other REACH Speech Keyboards A fourth approach uses abbreviation expansion combined with a special speech dictionary see Using the REACH Speech Dictionary EN O me ld e ome my time patty May I have scrambled coffee cereal fried egg syrup eqqs english haah BET ds jelly Food Home muffin browns o ls Typing i Keyboard Food Breakfast Figure 114 REACH Speech without Mayer Johnson Pictures 165 The REACH Speech Keyboard System is by far the most elaborate of the speech keyboard systems that comes with REACH M It contains 120 keyboards conceptually linked together For example on the main page you can select from 20 categories of nouns e g food places people etc select a link to the adjectives home page select a link to the actions home page etc Figure 114 shows an example keyboard from the food group Notice that no pictures are shown That is the way that the REACH Speech Keyboard System comes no pictures which is fine for an adult user f
252. hipped a CD or a User s Manual the Serial Number is provided on your receipt While email is preferred license ahf net com other contact information is provided in the readme file in the User s Manual and at the end of this License Agreement AHF then will provide You with 1 the user s name and 2 a License Code which You must enter on the License REACH Interface Author window and press the Enter License button to license REACH to that machine If more than one computer are to be licensed You must perform the above procedure for each computer being licensed Because of the copy protection strategy used by AHF if You should make significant changes to Your computer s hardware Your license could be automatically terminated If this happens contact AHF to obtain another license code be prepared to provide Your name contact information the name of the product the Serial Number and the Fingerprint code D Privacy Issues Your name contact information product name and the serial number are the only data obtained during the licensing procedure These data are required to insure that only valid customers are granted a license These data are not used for any other purpose and Your information is not sold leased or in any way transferred outside of AHF E Terms of Use for this License Agreement For each individual license purchased this License Agreement entitles You to use this program in one of two ways 1 this product may
253. his approach is that customized help with homophones is provided For example when the user enters the short E sound the expression read have read that book 1s displayed to help the user discriminate it from red red white and blue In contrast when the user enters the long E sound the cues are changed so that the phrase read will read a book is displayed to help the user discriminate it from reed reed by pond OR reed instrument e This approach sounds hard how do you know it will work A prototype version of this product was tested on children and adults with and without spelling disabilities and without most of the enhancements included in the final product The entire experimental session lasted about an hour and a half so it is unlikely that any subject had more than 30 minutes exposure to any one condition Each subject was aurally presented a list of words to spell using either a the REACH on screen alphabetic keyboard or an early prototype phonetic keyboard The spelling lists were counterbalanced across conditions and contained comparable 230 words suitable for the two age levels Half the words in each list were easy did not violate any common rule and half were hard did violate some common rule Results showed a significant increase in spelling accuracy for all subjects but 1t was the most dramatic for the subjects with a spelling disability There was a 150 increase in spelling accuracy for the 14 chi
254. ich row is being offered and which key is being offered This can be useful for persons with limited vision for persons who are not familiar with the language or to help a user clarify what a picture label means In REACH options are available to turn virtually any keyboard into an Auditory Scanning Keyboard but such keyboards probably are most effective when they are specifically designed for auditory scanning To create a custom auditory scanning keyboard use the same procedures used to create any keyboard except add the following steps 1 For each key that you want to speak or play a sound file use the key state Pal button in the Key Details tool bar and move to the Pointed At key state 152 i 2 Press the sounds l button in the Key Details tool bar select Speech and type in what you want spoken when that key is offered during scanning If you prefer a more distinctive voice or a distinctive sound to be played when that key is offered select the Sound option instead of the Speech option and then select a sound file that contains a recorded voice or else record your own voice describing this key s action To help with this REACH comes with several spoken wav files e g letters a to z numbers 0 to 9 etc 3 When using the Scanning Expert see next section assign a description to be spoken or a sound file to be played that for each row in the keyboard These descriptions are read during scanning when that row
255. ick on the radio button in front of I want Smart Lists to look the way word prediction looks To make changes to the way that words appear in word prediction click on the Word Prediction tab in Settings then click on the Word Size amp Color tab and make your changes on the resulting page You also can get there by selecting Word Size Color in the Word Prediction Menu If you have selected the first option where Smart Lists look like the keyboard keys and you want to change the appearance of both the keyboard keys and the Smart Lists you can use Hot Authoring or the REACH Keyboard Author to change the appearance of the keys and those changes automatically are applied to Smart Lists 70 FAI REACH Startup Keyboards Programs Smart Lists Appearance Smart Lists normally have the same appearance as the last key you typed However below you can change the appearance to match the appearance of word prediction I want Smart Lists to look the way the keys on the keyboard look I want Smart Lists to look the way word prediction looks Because Smart Lists will look similar to word prediction in colors font and size You must change word prediction s appearance in order to change Smart Lists appearance Home Keyboard i tl gt El gt x Figure 39 The Smart Lists Appearance page of Settings 2 11 7 4Settings Smart Lists Dynamic Labeling Available only if yo
256. ictior activate product gt i add or remove debuggi lt Speech aud address book ET Sounds A adobe acrobat 5 AIR a G FA america online 7 Y POW Se Figure 42 The Favorites page of Settings 73 on 1t and then press the Add button To remove a program from your list of favorites locate 1t in the list of Current Favorite Applications list box on the right click on it and then press the Remove button If you cannot find the program you are seeking in the list of programs press the Browse button and search for the program When you find it click on it and press the Add button Press the Cancel button if you cannot locate your program and want to quit looking for it You then might want to use the Find option in the Windows Explorer to find the location of the program and then come back to this window and use the Browse option to add it REACH automatically places the favorite programs you have selected on the keys of your current Favorite Programs keyboard They are placed in the order that they are listed on this Favorites page of Settings Your Favorite Programs keyboard 1s identified by the links from your home keyboard 2 11 10 Settings Word Prediction The REACH word prediction engine is a powerful feature that is built into REACH Click on the Word Prediction category for a brief description of the options available in the Dictionary Manager and Association Manager as
257. ile A file that contains information about a picture that has been stored using a special bitmap or bmp format Such files all have bmp extensions The REACH Interface Author program can use bitmaps for keys or keyboard backgrounds browse A term used for certain dialog boxes that allow the user to look for a desired file Typically the user can select the drive folder etc button bar A window that contains buttons for quick access to different options without using the menus When you first start REACH the Button Bar is visible near the bottom or top of your display However it can be hidden and it can be moved to the top of the display cancel A command that usually terminates some operation ignoring any previous changes or modifications For example ifa cancel button is pressed on a dialog box the system is restored to the state it was in when the dialog box was first presented and any changes that might have been made are usually ignored caret The small blinking text cursor that appears where you are typing in most applications requiring text entry caret tracking An option that moves the word prediction window out of the way so you can see where you are typing in the application Children s Keyboard A term describing any keyboard or keyboard system that was designed specifically for children click A task performed by the user to make a selection Typically a mouse button is pressed clicked once to ma
258. ill find an option labeled Turn Word Tips On in the Word Prediction menu and selecting that option will turn Word Tips on If Word Tips is on you will find an option labeled Turn Word Tips Off in the Word Prediction menu and selecting that option will turn Word Tips off For more information on Word Tips options see section 2 11 10 8 Settings Word Prediction Word Tips 8 8 Word Prediction Menu Quick Words The Quick Words are the words phrases or sentences that appear in between words or sentences e g after a space or period is typed You can change the words that are presented there or change their location by pressing the Quick Words option in the Word Prediction menu For more information on the Quick Words options see section 2 11 10 9 Settings Word Prediction Quick Words 209 8 9 Word Prediction Menu Homophone Help If you are in the demonstration mode or if you have purchased the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard add on and you enter a series of sounds that results in more than one word then those words are called homophones Examples of homophones are to too two for four fore principle principal etc REACH can help you determine which word 1s the one you are after by presenting and reading aloud a short phrase containing each word Selecting the Homophone Help option in the Word Prediction menu produces a dialog box where you can choose from three options
259. in class or at a lecture and using your computer to take notes you might not want speech or sounds to be played while you type If you want to stop ongoing or future speech or sounds completely click on the Turn Sounds Off option in the Options menu While the sounds are off this menu item changes to Turn Sounds On and you can resume playing sounds and speech by selecting this option Warning Remember that you must turn this option back on later when you want REACH to speak or play sounds Note If you turn all sounds off and exit REACH the next time REACH is started they are turned back on automatically 4 6 Options Menu Smart Keys Options Available only if you purchased Smart Keys If you purchased AHF s Smart Keys option select the Smart Keys Options option to display the main Smart Keys page of Settings All of the options associated with Smart Key Technology can be found on the two subcategory pages of Settings How They Display and Other Settings For more information see section 2 11 6 Settings Smart Keys 104 4 7 Options Menu Assess REACH has a built in set of assessment tasks designed to help you an assistive technologist a teacher a counselor a health care provider a parent etc adjust your computer system to maximize your abilities These tasks also can be used as research tools for example when testing novel user interfaces When the Assess option 1s selecte
260. information about adding abbreviations to a new or old dictionary see section 8 3 4 Adding Changing Deleting Abbreviations Note Ifyou want to speak a sentence without typing it turn on the Speak play keys when pointed at option on the Speech page of the REACH Options dialog box This approach can provide speech augmentation without cluttering your application with a lot of text If a sound file has been attached to the abbreviation being pointed at then the sound file will be played instead of the text associated with the abbreviation Fifth REACH has three different Speech Keyboard Systems that are dedicated to speech augmentation The main system has over 120 speech keyboards with links for moving quickly from category to category This 1s called the REACH Speech Keyboard System and you can enter it from most of the home keyboards This system has no pictures on the key faces unless you purchase and load the optional Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols at which time the keys on these 120 keyboards will automatically load pictures Sixth the second speech keyboard system is called the REACH Speech Screen System This was the original speech keyboard system provided in the early versions of REACH and is included in case someone is familiar with it Pictures are included with this small system Initially six speech categories are offered When you select a category e g food and drink another keyboard is loaded that has
261. ing Menu For more information on using scanning keyboards see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards and for the various options available in scanning see section 2 11 2 Settings Scanning Auditory scanning keyboards read the names of the rows or the keys being offered during scanning To try a sample Auditory Scanning Keyboard load the Auditory Scanning Alphab keyboard with keys arranged alphabetically or the Auditory Scanning QWERTY with keys arranged in traditional QWERTY format and start one of the three scanning options in the Keyboard Menu Notice that as the rows of keys are scanned they are announced e g row 1 row 2 etc Also when a row is selected the individual keys are spoken as they are scanned e g a b c etc If you find that an Auditory Scanning Keyboard is useful for you then you also should consider turning on the I want Auditory Scanning option found in the Scanning page of Settings For more information on authoring scanning and auditory scanning keyboards see section 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructions and section 5 2 12 8 Scan Expert Button For information on how to turn most keyboards into auditory scanning keyboards see the I want Auditory Scanning option in section 2 11 2 Settings Scanning Note Scanning Keyboards should not be used with Assess see section 4 7 2 Scanning Dwell Wobble 5 2 13 17 Secret Code Keyboard Keyboards Secret Code Keyboard
262. ing if you are using Smart Lists while pointing and clicking there are no strong recommendations about which settings to use The one possible exception is that if clicking is difficult or tiring for you try the Less Keyboard More Lists Fewer Clicks option because along with the longer lists multiple letter extensions can be included If you like staying on the keyboard longer check out the Dynamic Labels option to see 1f you like that If you do not like seeing a list until it only contains words and is short e g contains 9 words or less select the Always on keyboard unless there is one list option and set the maximum number of words in that list to be 9 in the Always display a list when option Below is a list of six potential advantages of using Smart Lists when pointing and clicking 1 Decreased Work number of clicks required Reason When using a standard on screen keyboard with no typing enhancements one click is required for each letter Depending on which setting the user has selected Smart Lists can offer more options than there are subsequent individual letters For example you might be offered in addition to its parent yo after the initial y is typed Also as the user goes further into the word and especially for long words Smart Lists is more likely to show multiple letter candidates and even entire words Finally when a word is selected from a Smart List a trailing space is
263. ing scanning when that key is offered With the Scanning Expert you also can assign sounds or speech to be played for each defined row Second you can turn on the auditory scanning option found on the Scanning page of Settings With that option REACH attempts to speak something for most events e g the label of the key In the third method described just above you can specify text to be spoken when specific scanning events occur In the fourth method you can record speech as a sound file and use 1t to announce specific scanning events by playing those sound files when the event occurs also described just above Note Ifyou have sounds or speech played while scanning REACH will not proceed to the next scanning step until the sound or speech 1s completed so you might want to use short sounds or expressions so that your total scanning time 1s not slowed down too much Note If you have both a sound and speech selected speech takes priority Prompts and Timing for Word Prediction Scanning Press the Words Words f button and a list of time events and current time settings associated with word prediction scanning is presented see Figure 21 Use the tour buttons below to select a scanning category Then select the event you want and make the adjustment a Offer Word Prediction for 2 00 seconds al a Highlight the first word in Word Prediction 2 00 seconds a Highlight each word in Word Prediction for 2 00 seconds sr
264. ion To add a new abbreviation type it in the text entry box under Word in the Dictionary Editor dialog box see Figure 141 When entering an abbreviation notice that when the equal sign is typed REACH recognizes that an abbreviation 1s being entered and the Word label on the text box changes to Abbreviation The amount that can be automatically typed is relatively large In general the total number of characters including the abbreviation all spaces the equal sign and the text to be typed can be up to 500 characters If the abbreviation you are adding is one that you will use very frequently select the Very Often option under How often is the word used If itis one that is used frequently select the Often alternative Ifthe new abbreviation is not used very often select the Occasionally alternative this is the default value Finally press the Add button and the new abbreviation disappears from the text entry box and appears in the list of words When you have finished adding abbreviations press the Done button to exit the Dictionary Editor dialog box 200 Note All abbreviation additions only affect the currently selected dictionary If an abbreviation is to be added to more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the additions made in each dictionary Note The AutoEdit dictionary only contains abbreviations and it will not allow you to add anything but abbreviations Note
265. ionary that have a consonant sound following an initial L sound Keys for unlikely sounds are removed to help make it easier for you to locate the next sound 3 Finally to provide you feedback about which sounds you already selected a new window is presented in a location close to the text caret of the program you are typing into This window currently shows the L sound key you just selected and a Say It button This button is provided to give you feedback about what you have already selected remember nothing is actually typed until you select it from one of the word prediction windows If you click on any of the icons you have entered only the L sound key at this point a sound recording is played for that key This is the same recording you would hear if you pointed at the L sound key on the keyboard When you click on the Say It button located at the right end of the selected sounds your speech synthesizer will attempt to blend 1 e pronounce all of them together as one word the sounds you already selected Depending on your speech synthesizer program this might or might not be very accurate It probably will not be very accurate after only one sound 1s selected you are better off just clicking on the L sound icon However after several sounds have been selected the Say It button can be a useful tool to remind you where you are in the target word 218 Continuing with the example of typing the word light yo
266. is offered e g Row A to G Creating Scanning Instructions After you have completed your keyboard or at least laid out all the keys on the keyboard and don t intend to remove or add any more press the Scanning Expert 2230 E Pet button on the Keyboard Author Button Bar When you do the Scanning Expert dialog box appears see Figure 111 For information on the procedure to use when creating scanning instructions see section 5 2 12 8 Scan Expert Button 5 2 11 Keyboard Author Menu Options The Keyboard Author Menu Bar is located just above the Keyboard Author Button Bar see Figure 71 In the following sections the menu options are listed and described 5 2 11 1File Menu New Keyboard Menu Option If you have been working on one keyboard and have finished with it selecting the New Keyboard option presents a new blank keyboard If you haven t saved the last keyboard you are asked if you want to save the keyboard before any changes are lost When you select this option a blank keyboard that is the standard keyboard size will be displayed as well as the Keyboard Details dialog box see section 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard Open Keyboard Menu Option Select the Open Keyboard option if you want to change a keyboard that came with REACH or that you authored earlier When selected the Keyboard Gallery dialog box appears see Figure 95 showing the contents of the REACH Keyboards folder All keyboard kbd
267. is targeted for anyone who wants help spelling words Users type with the sounds in a word phonemes instead of the keys All REACH products and demos come with this demonstration dictionary and corresponding phonetic keyboards The demonstration dictionary contains only words beginning with the N sound To try this out go to one of the Favorite Keyboards keyboards and select either the children s or adult s phonetic keyboard For more on REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard click here The Phonetic Demo User dictionary 1s the dictionary where words and their phonetic encodings would be added if the demonstration version of Sound It Out allowed it which it does not 195 If you have questions about what the different icons mean in the Dictionary Manager click on the Legend 2 button at the bottom of the Dictionary Manager and the REACH Word Prediction Dictionary Manager Legend ls box will appear with a list of icons and their meaning see Figure 140 If the Main Speech or AutoEdit dictionaries are accidentally destroyed they can be recreated by reinstalling REACH word prediction However the original frequencies are reinstated and any learning of your word usage are lost Dictionary Manager Legend This picture means the Main Dictionary ls in use Main Dictionary i not in use Open dictionaries are used by word prediction Click on the dictionary to close it Closed dictionaries are not used by word prediction Clic
268. it has been in Figure 157 Sound Om Ack Word Wizard A a J Lr da fl s a ora se elled r USING the regular typing p a oa F R h j E ise Papell out the word you wish to add e the correct spelling of the word you want in the box below MA S Figure 157 Picture of REACH s Add a Word Wizard dialog box after using a more conventional keyboard to type the new word Tammy that you are adding to the phonetic dictionary Notice that there are two buttons just below where the word has been typed Both buttons will use your speech synthesizer to pronounce the word you are adding When you press the Speak This Word button the word will be pronounced based on the letters you have entered In contrast when you press the Play Phonetic Word button the 224 word will be pronounced based on the phonemes sounds you selected on the previous screen using the phonetic keyboard These two pronunciations might or might not be the same If you are not happy with the way your word sounds when you press the Play Phonetic Word button press the Back button to return to the phonetic keyboard and change the sounds you have selected you might not be able to get the word to sound exactly right If you are not happy with the way your word sounds when the Speak This Word button is pressed you can change that pronunciation also First finish adding the word and then go to Section 4 2 Options Menu Voice to find ou
269. ite prograrr Favorites with la Favorites with sr Gamez Home Motor skills Number pads Puzzles Secret code Figure 95 The Keyboard Gallery Find the keyboard you want to load dialog box When you locate the keyboard you want select it by clicking on it and then press the OK button in the upper right corner the dialog box Press the Close button to exit the dialog box without making a selection Special Actions Keys Options On the right side of the Key Action dialog box there is a section that presents different Special Actions When the Key Action dialog box is first displayed the Keys option is selected by default Here different standard keyboard functions are listed To assign or add one of these functions to the current key action select it by clicking on it and then press the Insert button at the bottom ofthe list The inserted function now appears in the Key Action text entry box Most Special Action functions are printed in bold blue type and surrounded by brackets to help you discriminate functions from regular text that will be typed or spoken However sticky keys are printed in bold red type and surrounded by brackets Sticky keys are those which usually are held down while some other key is pressed e g Shift Control Alt Note Be sure to press the Insert Command button simply selecting a function is not sufficient to insert the command To remove a Special Key or Function that has alre
270. k on the dictionary to open it A closed dictionary with a question means it did not load properly Clicking on the dictionary name allows you to change its name This example shows a dichonary s name changed to legal Figure 140 REACH Dictionary Manager Legend dialog box Note The graphics interface in the Dictionary Manager has been provided to make it easy to add delete open close load save and edit dictionaries It is highly recommended that you use this interface to perform these operations rather than using other methods e g using the Windows Explorer Note Do not attempt to modify the REACH Word Prediction Main Dictionary by using some other program e g a word processor or a file editor Because it is encrypted attempts to change the Main Dictionary will damage this file Note The AutoEdit dictionary only contains abbreviations and it will not allow you to add anything but abbreviations 8 3 1 Creating a New Dictionary REACH lets you create your own custom user dictionaries Two options are available 1 Create a new empty dictionary by pressing the New J button 196 3 Build 2 Create a dictionary that contains words from an existing text file by pressing the Build 8 3 7 Building Dictionaries from Text Files button see section When creating a new empty dictionary you are asked to give it a name After you have entered a name for the new dictionary the Dictionary Editor
271. ke a selection when using a mouse ClickAssist Technology ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 This isa REACH feature that allows the user to define a switch input It 1s intended to help filter out accidental switch closures click error A term used in the REACH Assess tasks denoting an error that usually indicates that you have clicked the pointer button too soon e g clicking before reaching the target box on the Point and Click task or dropping the dragged item before reaching the target box on the Drag task cursor mouse cursor The picture or icon used to show where the pointer is currently aimed The appearance of this cursor when pointed ata REACH keyboard can be changed in the Cursor page of Settings default The value of a setting or variable that is predefined Default values are used to save the user time so the user doesn t have to set every value when using a program For example the default keyboard color in REACH is set to light gray but like most default values it can be changed to another color dialog box A window containing information instructions or options It is typically used to either present information or obtain information dic files Files that contain REACH dictionaries The Main Dictionary main dic is located in the Reach5 User folder Words may not be added deleted or changed in the Main Dictionary User dictionaries e g user dic and speech dic are locate
272. keyboard unless there is one list a Smart Keys More Keyboard Fewer Lists fa How They Dis E J Medium Keyboard Medium Lists fa Other Settine l l fl Less Keyboard More Lists Few Clicks El Smart Lists O Less Keyboard More Lists Shorter Lists fa Point And Clic Always display a list when there are 1Q words or less in a list fa Scanning Appearance Step Select how words appear in the list fea Dynamic Labe Alphabetically PES Home Keyboard More likely words first Step 3 Select the type of list that you prefer Show longer lists in two columns O Always show the list in one column E Favorites A Word Prediction v Step4 Display Word Prediction with Smart Lists OK Cancel Figure 37 The Smart Lists Point And Click page of Settings Step 3 Decide if you want longer lists presented in two columns or one column If you select the Always show the list in one column option then remember that for longer lists you will have to click on the scroll down icon to display the remaining items in the list Step 4 Decide if you want words to be shown in word prediction when using Smart Lists 2 11 7 2Settings Smart Lists Scanning Available only if you purchased Smart Lists The Smart Lists Patent Pending approach to typing can help you significantly reduce the number of clicks and increase your speed if you are using scanning to type with a REACH keyboard Figure 38 shows
273. l When you have completed your selections in Settings click on the OK button at the bottom of the Settings dialog box To undo the changes that have been made on this Settings page but not any other changes made in Settings click the Undo button at the bottom of the Settings dialog box you must do this before leaving this page To cancel all changes made on all Settings pages click on the Cancel Cancel button 49 2 11 1 Settings REACH Startup REACH provides several startup options These include automatically starting REACH starting with a specific keyboard and starting one or more application programs For other features the general rule is that REACH will start with the same options that were active when REACH was last exited On the REACH Startup page of Settings you can indicate whether you want REACH to start on computer startup or not There are two other pages of settings related to startup dealing with which keyboard to load and which programs to start see next two sections Note Selected Startup options do not take effect until 1 REACH is exited and 2 REACH or Windows depending on the option is started again 2 11 1 1Settings REACH Startup Keyboard On the Keyboards page of Settings found under REACH Startup you can determine which keyboard to load when REACH first starts As shown in Figure 17 you can have REACH load the Home keyboard the
274. l appear The first option on the REACH Menu Bar is Programs see Figure 64 Nest Program REACH Startup Startup Program Aun Exit Figure 64 The Programs menu in the REACH Menu Bar The Programs Menu is provided to help you gain quick access to application programs Options range from automatically starting a program when REACH starts to running a program after REACH has started 3 1 Programs Menu Next Program REACH provides a quick method of moving from one open application to another Selecting the Next Program option brings up the next active program on the Program Turntable also see section 2 12 Button Next Program 5 Programs Menu REACH Startup To save you time several startup options are provided Select this option to display the REACH Startup page of the Settings dialog box where you can instruct REACH to start when your computer starts see section 2 11 1 Settings REACH Startup You also can decide which keyboard to load when REACH starts see section 2 11 1 1 Settings REACH Startup Keyboard Note Selected Startup options do not take effect until 1 REACH has been exited normally and 2 REACH is started again 3 3 Programs Menu Startup Programs Select this option to see the REACH Startup Programs page of Settings Here you can select one or more application programs to be started automatically when REACH starts For more information
275. lder 5 2 1 13Aligning Key Pictures To make your keyboard look great you will want the pictures to line up so that they all appear in the same location within a key 1 e for the three Key States and across all keys To help with this REACH provides an Alignment Expert tool that aligns pictures for a selected key or group of keys For more information see section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size 5 2 2 Suggested General Strategy for Authoring Keyboards This section is intended to provide a general strategy for authoring keyboards The procedure presented here is just a suggested strategy you might find another approach that works better 1 Decide whether one of the keyboards provided with REACH e g one of the template keyboards can be used as a foundation for your new keyboard or whether it is better to start your new keyboard from scratch If an existing keyboard can be used go to section 5 2 3 Changing an Existing Keyboard for more information 2 Make decisions about the general characteristics of the keyboard e g background color or picture label font style font size font color whether it should belong to a current or new keyboard family etc 3 Decide on the size of the keyboard If you do not want the keyboard to be the default size use your mouse and drag ad the edges to the size you want If you want the keyboard to take up the entire screen press the Full Screen ullscteen button
276. ldren and a 122 increase for the 10 adults In fact the children with spelling disabilities spelled significantly more accurately using the phonetic keyboard than the children in the control group using the standard keyboard The results also showed that all subjects took significantly longer when using the phonetic approach and so that could possibly be a problem to deal with However 1t could be that 30 minutes of practice was not enough time for the subjects to become proficient in this new approach more research is needed here e Who should use these products and how should these products be used These products are expected to become good examples of universal design because virtually anyone could benefit from this approach A person with significant spelling difficulties might use the phonetic keyboard as the primary method for typing Others might use a standard hardware or onscreen keyboard most of the time and use the phonetic keyboard only when they encounter a difficult word or when they need help with homophones Theoretically a person who knows nothing about written English but knows how words sound and how they are arranged to make meaningful sentences could write using this approach For that reason it could possibly be useful for students for whom English is a second language for very young students or for students with cognitive deficiencies Presumably providing a way for a user to easily find and spell a sought word will reduce an
277. le clicks notice that a checkmark appears in front of Double Click in the Options menu and that the label on the Double button changes to Lock Until turned off by selecting the Click or Drag menu options or pressing the double click Lock button on the REACH Button Bar single mouse clicks are converted to double clicks The locked double click state produced by this menu option also can be selected by pressing the Double button on the Button Bar twice until its label changes to Lock 6 3 Pointer Menu Drag If you need help performing a dragging operation selecting the Drag menu option sets REACH to perform one for you Notice that a checkmark appears in front of Drag in the Options menu and that the Drag label changes to 185 Lock Selecting this option 1s the same as pressing the Drag button on the Button Bar until 1ts label changes to Lock Drag operations continue to be performed 1 e the first click turns drag on and the next click turns 1t off until you turn this feature off by selecting the Click or Double Click menu options or by clicking on the drag lock button on the REACH Button Bar until Lock disappears and Drag appears The locked drag state produced by this menu option also can be selected by pressing the Drag button on the REACH Button Bar twice 6 4 Pointer Menu Left Button The Left Button option in the Options Menu is provided so that you can return to the
278. lects the correct row by releasing a single switch and then selects the correct key by releasing the switch jpg picture format A graphic format that has a jpg file extension and can be used by REACH to display a picture on a key or keyboard background kbd file A REACH file format containing information about a keyboard All kbd files have a kbd file extension key align To line a number of items up in arow The Align button in the Keyboard Author M allows you to line keys up automatically key action The name given to the specific act that a key will perform when pressed key details A set of tool bars in the Keyboard Author module that allows you to assign labels colors functions pictures actions and sounds to keys key face In REACH the visible part ofa key The key face can have different background colors text labels and can display a graphic image Also the background color text label and picture can all be different for each of the three key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed key label The text top and bottom that appears on the face of a REACH key key palette In the REACH Keyboard Author program users are provided a keyboard palette that contains keys with different shapes and sizes These keys can be dragged to the keyboard and used as they appear or they can be reshaped once dropped on the keyboard key picture A picture bmp wmf jpg or movie avi that is used on a ke
279. lette or if you frequently use a key of a specific size you easily can change the keys on the Key Palette First load the palette keyboard the key palette 1s a keyboard Because you will be changing this keyboard you should make a backup first by saving it with a different keyboard name e g palette backup Next modify the keys on the palette keyboard to suit your needs If you want a key to have certain functions or contents use the Key Details tool bar options to define the key Finally save the new palette as palette do not select a specific category and exit the Keyboard Author module The next time you start the Keyboard Author your newly created Key Palette 1s presented when you point at the Key Palette button If you used the Key Details options to define the key then the new keys will contain those properties e g colors labels function etc Note You cannot drag a key to a location where part of it overlaps another existing key If you attempt this REACH presents a message stating that keys are overlapping and then returns the key to its original location 5 2 5 2 Changing the Size and Shape of a Key The sample keys provided on the Key Palette might not suit your needs If you want a different size or shape select one of the four keys provided drag and drop it at the keyboard location where you want it to appear and then resize or reshape the key Do this by moving the mouse to one of the four square black anch
280. lication to see where they are in the word or if the last letter they intended to type made it to the application and occasionally check the word prediction window to see if the target word is presented In addition changing from one task to another task can itself be thought of as a task and takes time With Smart Lists once a list is shown the user s task remains the same recognize the option that is most similar to the beginning of the word being typed 5 Decreased Motor Response Rationale Once a list is presented all the information necessary for the user to complete typing the word is restricted to a space the size of the list being presented Also the list is physically located at the site that the user last positioned the pointer In general the physical movement required to point on the next selection in subsequent Smart Lists is less than that required if the user stayed on the keyboard 6 Simplified Motor Response Rationale Once a list 1s presented pointer movement is primarily vertical up and down Because there are different implications and benefits for Smart Lists depending on whether you are using scanning input or point and click input two different pages of settings are provided for Smart Lists one that takes effect if you are using scanning and another for when you are using point and click see section 2 11 7 2 Settings Smart Lists Scanning and section 2 11 7 1 Settings Smart Lists Point and C
281. lick 1 2 1 3 Dynamic Labeling Technology part of the Smart Lists Add On Dynamic Labels Patent Pending a part of Smart Lists is a new approach to assisted typing targeted for persons who prefer using Smart Keys with a standard keyboard and who find it easier to recognize the beginning of a word rather than the next letter in the word as with standard on screen keyboards When active Dynamic Labeling provides an altered or additional label on the key s face to show you what letters have already been typed and how the typed letters would appear if that key were selected Figure 3 below shows an example keyboard before any letter is typed top and then two possible outcomes for that keyboard after the initial letter 1 has been typed bottom Notice that for both outcomes Smart Keys has removed those letters that do not follow I For the keyboard on the left Dynamic Labeling has replaced the standard label with a Dynamic Label showing the way words beginning with that letter would appear If typing the word lonesome then you would look for the key that best matches the way lonesome begins 1 e lo This is in contrast to conventional typing in which you must know remember what you already have typed and search for select the next letter o The right bottom keyboard in Figure 3 shows another option for Dynamic Labeling in which both the conventional key label is shown on the top of the keys a
282. lly added to a dictionary a GuickiWord ley Hot Keys lt Speech Numbering Press the Browse button to to pick a sound file Press the Record button to make your own x Cancel Figure 56 The Sounds page of the Settings dialog box 87 The word you typed is not in the dictionary A word 1s selected from word prediction An AutoSpace operation occurred A word or part of a word was AutoTyped A word was automatically corrected for you Sentence Prediction has detected a sentence A word was successfully added to a dictionary A word was automatically added to a dictionary Note If you have the speak While Typing Keys option turned on see previous section then speech takes priority and any sound attached to A REACH keyboard key is pressed might not be played Similarly if you have speak From Word List When selected option turned on then the any sound attached to A word is selected from word prediction might not be played Note Any sound attached to a REACH keyboard key 1s only played if the key being pressed does not specify a key sound Ifa key on any keyboard has already been assigned a sound through the REACH Keyboard Author program that sound overrides the Key Sound setting made here On the Sounds page of Settings you can select any of these events and assign a sound file to it so that the sound will be played when the event occurs To select a
283. long with the Menu button and the Stop button is not offered when the Button Bar is scanned 3 A Start scanning button is used to start the scanning procedure 4 A Stop scanning button can be used to pause the scanning process 5 The Undo button provides faster access to undo typing errors With Single Switch Scanning a single switch left mouse button is used to select the correct keyboard row and then the correct key To pause scanning point at the Stop button To stop scanning click on the Stop button While scanning is stopped you can use the REACH Menu most of the REACH buttons and make changes in the current application To resume scanning press the Start scanning button To completely turn off scanning select No Scanning from the Scanning Menu For more information on using scanning see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards Note Ifyou exit scanning with one of the three scanning options selected then the next time you start REACH it automatically will start scanning If you do not want this to happen select the No Scanning option before exiting REACH 9 3 Scanning Menu Dual Switch Scanning To prepare your system to begin dual switch scanning select the Dual Switch Scanning option in the Scanning menu When you select this option you will notice that your REACH Button Bar changes see preceding section In Dual Switch Scanning use the left mouse button to move from row to row
284. ls The second step if you select Yes allows you to align the labels within each selected key so that for example when you point at the key and press it the label stays in the same relative location Align Bottom Labels The procedure for aligning bottom labels is the same as the procedure for aligning the top labels and is discussed in the previous section Align Pictures The procedure for aligning pictures is the same as the procedure for aligning the top labels and is discussed above Size Expert If you have selected a key and select the Size Expert option when you point at the key alignment and A size Ll button on the Key Details tool bar three alternatives are provide Size Selected Keys only available if more than one key was selected Size Label Backgrounds and Size Pictures Size Selected Keys Sometimes you might want all the keys or a selected group of keys to all be the same size If you select the Size Selected Keys option then the Sizing Expert dialog box is presented see Figure 100 where you can resize the selected keys horizontally vertically or both Sizing Expert Grow to largest Shrink to smallest Change Heights f No change Grow to largest Shrink to smallest Figure 100 The Sizing Expert dialog box When you have selected the sizing operation you want press the OK button If you change your mind press the
285. luent in English but pictures can be an important addition for some users Consequently you can purchase the Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols add on and these keyboards will automatically load pictures as appropriate and you have 6 000 total pictures to select from if you want to add more keyboards or change keys on the existing keyboards Figure 115 shows the same keyboard as Figure 114 except that pictures are added If you do not have speech synthesis on your computer you still can use Speech Keyboard to assist in communication Load a word processing program and give it the focus make sure the Turn Typing Off option in the Keyboard Menu is showing and then use any of the keyboards in the REACH Speech Keyboard System feature The words and sentences will not be spoken but they will be printed in the word processor window so that someone else can read what you want have typed orange juice gt da grape juice D ic Fes scrambled coffee milk i egas Food Home TE a munin i Speech Home Food Breakfast Keyboard Figure 115 REACH Speech with MJ Pictures a want more please thank you sts muffin bacon B wy E Note If there you cannot hear speech output to make sure that 1 the Speech box is checked in the Key Action dialog box for that key in the Keyboard Author module 2 the Turn Key Speech On option in the Keyboard Menu it reads Turn Key Speech Off the Turn Sounds On option in the
286. lumn X Figure 38 The Smart Lists Scanning page of Settings Step 2 Select whether items in the presented lists are ordered alphabetically or by their probability of use For scanning it is highly recommended that the words are ordered by their probability 1 e the More likely words first option Overall this approach will reduce the overall time you spend waiting while scanning and increase your speed Step 3 Decide if you want longer lists presented in two columns or one column This is a matter of personal preference If you select the Always show the list in one column option then remember that for longer lists some of the words will not be shown in the initial list presented When scanning REACH automatically will show you the rest of the list after the first section has been offered If you are good at visually scanning longer lists try the two column display 2 11 7 3Settings Smart Lists Appearance Available only if you purchased Smart Lists The appearance of the options offered in a Smart List the letter font size color and background color can match that of the keyboard key last typed or that used to present words in the word prediction windows see the settings page shown in Figure 39 Most of the keyboards have been initially set to take on the appearance of the keyboard keys However if you want the lists to appear dramatically different from the keys e g much smaller or larger then cl
287. lus keyboard examples multiple study test sequences are presented Retention Interval The amount of time between the presentation and test keyboards is of course important Researchers believe that there are different stages of memory Depending on the length of time between stimulus presentation and recall researchers have shown that different kinds of memory are involved For example sensory memory 1s involved for very short durations e g a few seconds short term memory for somewhat longer times e g up to 30 seconds and long term memory for even longer periods of time While you cannot precisely control the time exposures of stimulus presentation and time period between presentation and testing with REACH you can use the scanning keyboard option to gain some control over the amount of time a stimulus 1s presented and the interval between presentation keyboard and test keyboard To control the amount of time a stimulus is presented embed the stimulus picture letter word etc in the Pointed At key state of a scanning keyboard and then adjust the amount of time you want to display the stimulus by adjusting scan time values on the Scanning Prompts and Settings page of Settings To control the amount of time between the presentation and test displays put additional wait keys on the presentation keyboard test keyboard or a wait keyboard that is presented in between the other two Finally set the amount of delay by pr
288. ly Click on this option to turn it on Click on the Label button just below the sixth option and you can pick the color of the label from the resulting Color dialog box Similarly press the Background button and you can pick the background color you want for the key 2 11 6 2Settings Smart Keys Other Settings Available only if you purchased Smart Keys Click on the Other Settings subcategory under Smart Keys to see other Smart Keys options see Figure 35 When using Smart Keys you might not want all keys to be affected For example you might only want keys that type letters to be removed or changed as you type In Step 1 you can select which types of keys you want to always remain on the keyboard Your choices include Number Keys Punctuation Keys Keys that Don t Type Anything Macro Keys and Keyboard Link Keys If you want any of these key types to always remain unchanged on your keyboard click on the checkbox in front of that category until a checkmark appears In Step 2 you can turn on off REACH s AutoType feature The AutoType option completes words you are typing based on 1 the letters you have already typed and 2 the words in the dictionaries you currently have open If AutoType is active and detects there is only one letter that follows the letter s you have typed it will type the next letter for you Similarly if AutoType detects that there is only one word that begins with the lette
289. mbering the number keys can be ER Favorites used to select which word to type however not the Number m Pad keys bd Word Predictior Caret Trac This may make it faster to select a word from Word f Prediction ih Word Size E lev 0 Punctuation Mumber ing iS WordTips a GuickWord ey Hot keys ai gt You can Use the Hot Keys F2 n to turn numbering on and off Toggling number on and off may be helpful if you need to type a number Cancel Figure 51 The word prediction Numbering page of the Settings dialog box REACH Word Prediction constantly presents possible words abbreviations or sentences based on the letters already typed There are two ways you can select displayed words or sentences by using a pointer to point and click on the word you want or by pressing the number keys on the keyboard while using the Use Numbers option When this option 1s active numbers appear along with the words in the first nine word boxes and pressing a number key 1 9 sends the text in the corresponding word box to the application The number keys immediately above the letters on a standard computer keyboard should be used not the numbers on the numeric keypad The numbers on the numeric keypad are still available for typing numbers provided the Num Lock key is turned on Note You also turn on off the Use Numbers option with Hot Keys type F2 then n To use the numbers option click on th
290. mentarily and only if there are more than five options 1 e five rows in a keyboard five keys in a row five word boxes in Word Prediction It appears at the beginning of each such cycle 1 e at the beginning of the rows keys or word boxes If you click your switch while the Reverse cue is present then the standard scanning order e g left to right is reversed e g right to left This feature provides faster access to keys or words on the opposite side of the keyboard Another very useful scanning option is the Undo by Holding Switch option If you make a mistake e g select the wrong row or the wrong letter rather than waiting for scanning to the scan the whole row or to scan to the Backspace key or Undo button hold your switch closed for a set time period it is adjustable and the last typing action will be undone After offering keyboard rows and word prediction REACH offers the Button Bar for scanning If you click your switch when the button bar is offered with a prompt the buttons on the button bar will then be offered one at a time In general three approaches to scanning are available with REACH single switch dual switch and inverse single switch If you use scanning it is highly recommended that you also purchase an AHF product called ScanBuddy When you purchase AHF s REACH Scan Plus you receive REACH Smart Key Technology or Smart Lists Technology and ScanBuddy M In general if ScanBudd
291. menu and select the Exit option You will be given different exit options and a chance to cancel the exiting procedure unless you have instructed REACH not to show the warning again Uninstalling REACH If you are transferring your license to another machine you must uninstall REACH from the first machine To uninstall REACH use either of the two following procedures You will have to repeat the licensing procedure described above on the new machine Note Be sure to copy any new altered dictionaries and new altered keyboards you want to save to a diskette or another location before uninstalling use the Save dictionary option to copy the dictionaries to diskettes so they can be loaded onto the new computer see section 8 3 8 Loading Saving Dictionaries Original dictionaries e g speech user etc will be eliminated when you uninstall 1 Press the Windows Start button select All Programs then REACH Interface Author 5 and then Uninstall REACH and then follow the instructions provided OR 2 Go to the Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs select REACH 5 Uninstall from the resulting list click on the Change Remove button and follow the instructions provided If you are moving your license to another machine you must follow the procedure described above in the Installing REACH section when licensing the new machine 10 Table of Contents LICONSA FCO MENO ui AAA AA ie 2 Installi
292. mine whether a QWERTY keyboard produces faster or more accurate input than an alphabetic keyboard The nine letters used in the Letters Task E T O A H L X C N were randomly selected from nine sections of the QWERTY keyboard QWE RTY UIOP ASD FGH JKL ZX CVB and NM in order to represent different physical locations on a standard keyboard Letters are presented in a different random sequence each time the Letters Task is conducted See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Letters Task is selected Note Turn off Smart Keys and Smart Lists features when using the Letters task because those features are designed to help you type words and in this task only single letters are presented 110 4 7 4 8 Numbers Task Similar to the Letters Task in the Numbers Task you are asked to enter single digits 0 9 presented one at a time This task can help determine which keyboard is best for when you are entering numbers e g when you are using a calculator spreadsheet or database Digits are presented in a different random order each time the Numbers Task is conducted Note Turn off Smart Keys and Smart Lists features when using the Numbers task because those features are designed to help you type words and in this task only single numbers are presented See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure onc
293. more typical left button mouse click mode after being in the right button click lock mode see next section When you select this option a checkmark appears in front of Left Button in the Pointer menu Selecting this option 1s the same as pressing the Right lock button on the REACH Button Bar until its label says Right instead of Once or Lock 6 5 Pointer Menu Right Button Although most pointer operations require a single left button click there might be times when you want to simulate a right mouse button click For example in Microsoft Windows environments you sometimes can get additional information or options by right clicking on an item e g an icon on the desktop For that reason REACH lets you simulate a right button mouse click double click or drag This can be useful if you only have one switch on your system or 1f you have trouble using the right button Selecting the Right Button menu option turns this feature on Notice that a checkmark appears in front of Right Button in the Options menu and that the Right button label changes to Lock While turned on REACH converts every left button click to a right button click until it is turned off by selecting Left Button from the Options menu see Left Button section just above or by pressing the Lock right button on the REACH Button Bar until its label changes from Lock to Right Selecting this option is the same as pressing the Right
294. n 5 7 Keyboard Menu Allow Don t Allow Hot Authoring REACH s new Hot Authoring feature provides a quick way to change the appearance and actions of keys on your keyboards However there might be situations where you do not want this option available For example 1f you use a mouse and tend to accidentally hit the right mouse button instead of the left button Hot Authoring can get in the way because it is launched when you right click on a button Also you might be a teacher who doesn t want this option available to your students In either case you can turn off Hot Authoring by selecting the Don t Allow Hot Authoring option from the Keyboard menu When you want to turn it back on select the Allow Hot Authoring option from the Keyboard menu 5 8 Keyboard Menu Go to Sound It Out Themes If you are in the demonstration mode or if you have purchased the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard add on there are three new keyboard themes available for you that provide quick links to both a phonetic keyboard and a standard typing keyboard Selecting this menu option takes you to a keyboard where you can select one of those 183 themes For more information on phonetic typing see Section 11 0 Using the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard 5 9 Keyboard Menu Change Phoneme Key Sound If you are in the demonstration mode or if you have purchased the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard add on sound files can be
295. n candidates change and the Say It window is updated If you complete a word and find that two or more words are shown in yellow that means they are homophones words that are different but sound alike like for and four In Figure 4 notice that there are two words in yellow light and lied These two words are not true homophones like to too and two but they have been made homophones by REACH Sound It Out because depending on how you pronounce the last sound in each word they easily could be confused by some people Depending on the words you are seeking you might see two three or even more yellow homophones appear Whether true homophones or words that might sound alike to some people the REACH Sound It Out program provides you with help when these occur This help is signaled by a question mark shown in the word prediction box with the word Such question marks are shown in Figure 147 the word left Figure 148 the word light and Figure 149 the words light and lied If you are reading this information in color you also will notice that the question marks in Figure 147 and 148 are painted in blue and the question marks in Figure 149 are painted in green When a blue question mark is shown it means that this word sounds similar to at least one other word but no such word is currently being shown in the other word prediction boxes Ifa green question mark is shown it means that at least one of the other words t
296. n for X seconds then it is a real click so that it says If I hold the switch down for 2 00 seconds then it is a real click Second after making a good click if you tend to bounce the switch again after the real click is made you can have ClickAssist help with that by checking the third box I make another accidental click after a good click so wait a while before allowing another click and just below that enter the amount of time you want ClickAssist to wait 58 before allowing another click For example 1f you want to wait at least 3 00 seconds before allowing another click enter 3 00 so that the statement now reads Wait 3 00 seconds then allow me to click again Note There is an important reminder at the bottom of this page of Settings If you find that you can release your switch more accurately than you can make your switch you should try Inverse Single Switch Scanning If you are not sure open the REACH Assessment Battery found in the Options menu try both the Click and the Release tasks and compare the resulting data to determine if you are faster and have fewer errors releasing than clicking suggesting that you should use Inverse Single Switch Scanning method or if you are faster and have fewer errors clicking than releasing suggesting that you should use the Single Switch Scanning method 2 11 3 Settings Dwell External switches such as a mechanical switch eye blink switch puff and sip switch etc
297. n most Favorite Keyboards keyboards a link to such a Favorite Keyboards keyboard is provided on most Home keyboards On this page of Settings you can determine how the Dynamic Labels are displayed On the top half of this page select whether how Dynamic Labels are displayed on keyboard keys when they are not pointed at The first option turns on off Dynamic Labeling Select the second option and the standard key labels are replaced with Dynamic Labels With the third option the standard labels are retained but new Dynamic Labels are added to the bottom of the key s face In the fourth option only keys which will result in one or more letters being AutoTyped are dynamically labeled On the bottom half of the page select whether how Dynamic Labels are displayed on keys when they are pointed at with a mouse The first option turns on off dynamic labeling for keys which are pointed at Select the second option and the standard key labels are replaced with Dynamic Labels when you point at them with your pointer In the third option the standard labels are retained but new Dynamic Labels are added to the bottom of the key s face when you point at them with your pointer Select the fourth option and only keys which will result in one or more letters being AutoTyped are dynamically labeled when pointed at 2 11 8 Settings Home Keyboard P f p da ER oD our Home Keyboard is the main keyboard in
298. n the Tab for the first letter in that word or by typing the word in the Word text entry 198 box in the upper right hand corner of the Dictionary Editor REACH automatically will switch to the correct tab and highlight the current candidate word If there are many words beginning with the same letter use the vertical scroll bar to scroll to the target word in the list box or type more letters in the text entry box When the word is visible in the list click on it and it will be highlighted in the list and displayed in the Word text entry box Next use the pointer or arrow keys to position the cursor in the text entry box to make the desired change and then make the change If you want you can change the word s frequency ofuse When the changes are complete press the Change currently selected dictionary button and the altered word is updated in the Note Ifthe Add button is pressed the originally selected word will remain in the dictionary and the modified word will be added as a new word Ifthe Change button 1s pressed the originally selected word will be deleted and replaced with the changed word Note All word changes only affect the currently selected dictionary If a word is to be changed in more than one dictionary then each dictionary must be selected and the changes made in each dictionary Deleting a Word To delete a word that 1s in the selected dictionary locate the word to be deleted as discussed in the
299. n you can select it and change the voice settings When selected the Voice Box dialog box is displayed containing options for the voice used by the speech synthesizer see Figure 68 To listen to one of the voices click on it in the list box on the left side and hear that voice speak a few words After you have select the voice you want you can fine tune its pitch and speed by adjusting the slide controls at the bottom of the dialog box see Figure 68 If there are words that the speech synthesizer is mispronouncing press the Pronunciation Fronunciationl button and change the pronunciation of a specific word by first typing in the word and then spelling it phonetically the way it sounds e g type in the word gypsy and then spell it like jip see Note The Pronunciation and the Pitch options only are available if you have a speech engine that support them 4 3 Options Menu Speech Selecting the Speech option in the Options menu produces the Speech page of the Settings dialog box For a discussion of the various speech options see section 2 11 11 Settings Speech 4 4 Options Menu Sounds Selecting the Sounds option in the Options menu produces the Sounds page of Settings For a discussion of the various sound options see section 2 11 12 Settings Sounds 4 5 Options Menu Turn Sounds Off On There might be times when you want your computer to be quiet For example 1f you are
300. nagshadlanst aul assaateahaaditnenegiuceendes 172 SL iZ Game keyboard Keyboards pensarse ia ida 173 EME Storr book key board M Keyboar A EE AN EA etd eee cede ae 173 5 2 13 14 Reading Assistance Keyboard Keyboards ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 5 2 13 15 Performa ce Aid Keyboard KeyboardS ooocccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenenes 175 LSO CAMINA ke OA SN a a a a aes 175 Lo Sedel Code keybord Keyboar dS e AE E O TEO 176 213 18 Puzzle keyboard Ke yi a AAA 177 5 2 13 19 Memory Assessment Keyboard Keyboards cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 321320 Motor skills Keyboard Key DOS ss i aaa a 180 IA A A A cee cette ces cae ade te cess tated ee ceeds 181 5 3 Keyboard Menu Change Key board S176 iia 181 54 Keyboard Menu Select Key Sound ri ad 182 59 Keyboard Menu Tum Typine Olt or On a 183 30 Keyboard Menu Turnkey Specem On On cite nite a ar E 183 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 0 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 7 0 Teh 72 7 3 7 4 Es 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 8 0 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 Keyboard Menu Allow Don t Allow Hot Authorlng oocccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnoss 183 Keyboard Menu Goto Sound Out Themes is 183 Keyboard Menu Change Phoneme Key Sound ios 184 REACH Men Bars Pointer ainia Aci AA
301. ncluded to help you decide which of two or more words that sound alike is the one you are after horizontal window In REACH word prediction words can be presented in a horizontal window from left to right or a vertical row from top to bottom To change from one orientation to the other either double click on the word prediction title bar if floating or select the preferred alternative in the Word Prediction View page of Settings Hot Authoring A feature in REACH that allows you to quickly make changes to keys on a keyboard without starting the REACH Keyboard Author Right click on a key and a menu is presented where you can change that key s label color label font key action picture sound or link to another keyboard You also can change the key color and label font for all the keys on that keyboard 236 hot keys A single key or series of keys that when pressed perform some operation Hot keys usually provide a quick short cut for persons who want to use the keyboard instead of a pointer to conduct operations icon A usually small picture that in Windows is used to represent an application program An application usually can be activated by double clicking 1ts icon Interpreter Keyboard A term describing a keyboard or keyboard system designed to automatically convert text in one form to another e g from one language to another inverse single switch scanning A scanning option in which the user first se
302. ncludes that sound For more information about what other sound options are available for when you point at a key see Section 11 4 2 Selecting a Phonetic Sounds Theme for Sounds Played when Pointing at a Key If you want to turn this option off so that no sounds are played when you point at a key press the Settings button on the REACH button bar select the Speech tab on the left of the Settings dialog box see Figure 158 below and click on the check box in front of Speak play keys when pointed at until the check mark is gone Bl REACH Startup Select what you want REACH to speak Keyboards is Programs Weer O Letters Words O Other OG Scanning O Punctuation Sentences R Dwell Word Prediction A word selected from Word Prediction lew El WordTios Words pointed at for 19 I seconds Home Keyboard Keyboard E Favorites Speak play keys when pointed at for 1 5 E seconds e Word Prediction Speech AutoType 4H Sounds E e ar Cancel Figure 158 The Speech Page of Settings in REACH If you want to change the time that REACH waits before playing such a sound return to the same Speech page in REACH Settings locate the Speak play keys when pointed at for seconds option and use the scroll buttons there to increase or decrease the time delay that occurs before the key s sound 1s played 11 4 2 Selecting a Phonetic Sounds Theme for the Sounds Played when Pointing at a Key As discuss
303. nd 5 2 6 2 Key Details Key Color A different background key face color can be assigned to each of the three key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed The default background colors are light gray Normal light blue Pointed At and light green Pressed 134 To assign different key face colors first click on the key you want to change or group of keys 1f desired then select the key state you want 1 e Normal Pointed At or Pressed by using the key state Pal button on the Key Details tool bar and then press the Key Color Ka button on the Key Details tool bar This produces the Color dialog box where you can pick a color you want by clicking on 1t and then clicking on OK see Figure 85 Notice that on this Color dialog box there is an option for Transparent This is an important feature that produces a transparent key face background color when selected When you make a key for a Storybook Keyboard or a Game Keyboard keyboard you might want to select Transparent so that you can see through to a picture on the keyboard background 5 2 6 3 Key Details Key Picture REACH lets you place a picture bmp wmf jpg on your key face To create a background bmp file for a keyboard you are making simply start the Microsoft Windows Paint program or some other program that creates bmp wmf or jpg graphics files When you press the Key Picture Al button a drop down menu appears with five options that are listed a
304. nd a Dynamic Label is added to the bottom If you have purchased the Smart Lists add on or you are using one of AHF s demo versions of REACH you can try the Dynamic Labels feature Set Smart Lists to one of the settings in which you stay on the keyboard for a while before the Smart List appears e g one of the More Keyboard options You also might want to select a keyboard with wider keys 25 al mm Po iai Del Spacebar ups PEER i Figure 3 Pictures showing examples of two Dynamic Labeling options after the first letter 1 has been typed Note If you are running the program as a demonstration copy or have purchased Smart Lists select one of the Dynamic Labeling demonstration keys found on most Favorite Keyboards keyboards a link to such a Favorite Keyboards keyboard is provided on most Home keyboards 1 2 1 4 The REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Add On Note This information is for anyone interested in phonetic typing However you must have either a functioning demonstration version of REACH or a purchased licensed copy of the Sound It Out Keyboard to apply the information contained in this section The REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Patent Pending another innovative approach to typing allows you to type a word by inputting its sounds phonemes instead of its letters Originally targeted for persons with spelling disabilities this approa
305. nd columns but all the keys are empty that 1s they have not been defined Scanning instructions are already created for most of these keyboards but if you remove or add keys you must redo scanning Template keyboards range in size from very small 1 e one row by two columns named Template 1x2 to fairly large 1 e five rows by ten columns named Template 5x10 Template keyboards also are available to help you make easy Puzzle Keyboard keyboards Template Puzzle Easy difficult Puzzle Keyboard keyboards Template Puzzle Hard Speech Keyboard keyboards Template Speech and Memory Assessment Keyboard keyboards e g Template Memory Spatial Template Memory Numbers etc If one of these templates suits your needs load it into the Keyboard Author and start defining the keys Note Whenever you use one of the template keyboards be sure to use the Save As option to assign your keyboard a new name Do this right after loading it so that the original undefined template keyboard is still available the next time you need it 5 2 13 4Children s Keyboard Keyboards As the educational and entertainment potential of computers is becoming realized more and more children are becoming computer users Because of its multimedia capabilities REACH provides tools for making computers more accessible for very young children Ge L A TEELT 7 Escape C Restore Figure 112 Sample Children s Keyboard While
306. nd described in the following sections Note All pictures must be located in the Reach5 Pictures folder or one of its subfolders Note For all of the following options if you select a picture for the Normal key state it automatically is placed on the Pointed At and Pressed key states To change the picture for the Pointed At or Pressed key states use the key state Ea button on the Key Details tool bar to move to the desired key state and then perform one of the following procedures to select a picture for that key state Find a Picture Select this option and the Picture Gallery dialog box is displayed see Figure 87 Picture Gallery Choose a background picture for the keyboard Look irr pictures Categories Figure 87 The Picture Gallery Choose a picture for the key dialog box Here you can look for the picture you want by using the scroll bar You also can pick a category on the left side of this dialog box or you can search for a key word using the Find It option on the right side of the Picture Gallery enter a descriptive term then press the Find It button 135 When you find the picture you want click on it and then press the OK button Press the Close button if you do not want to select a picture When a picture is selected it is placed in the top left corner of your key in its original size You can click on it and drag it to another location or you can select the Edit the Picture de
307. ng or two dual switch scanning switches For example when REACH 1s in single switch scanning clicking the left mouse button or any other device that emulates a left mouse button click can be used to select keys Background How Scanning Works Before describing how to create scanning instructions it is useful to describe how the REACH scanning options work also see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards When in any of the three scanning modes and scanning a keyboard the rows and columns are systematically highlighted and you can select a key by first picking the row that key is in and then picking the key Most of the keyboards that come with REACH can be scanned because they come with scanning instructions Similarly you can create scanning instructions for any keyboard that you author Also if the REACH Word Prediction feature is shown then it is offered as a row during scanning In addition the REACH Button Bar is also offered during scanning Finally if you have AHF s ScanBuddy product then ScanBuddy also is offered so you can use it to perform mouse actions anywhere on the display If you do not make any selections and let REACH go through its entire scanning cycle the order for scanning 1s 1 Keyboard Rows 2 Word Prediction Word Bar 3 REACH Button Bar 4 ScanBuddy if ScanBuddy 1s available 151 If no selection is made for any of these options then REACH repeats this cycle again as m
308. ng amp Uninstalling REACH Software cccssssssssssccccccssssssssscscccccsccessssssccccssssceesssssssccooees 6 Hardware Soim are Requirements A A 6 A kc a Bh cy ar ern ete Rr re We en ete Rt rn nee Re ee eT ee eee eee ee eer eee 6 Unas REACH M sre eR Ene AGT eR PP 2 OR En AO A eS a eR ee a ee 10 Fable OF AAA oeae a aaa ONCE ere A AOAN ONERE EEE EEUE 11 AcKknowWlcde cemento ios 19 MO EP OCU CUION IPPO CARPA N TU ns tceceuceaseueuacssasavessteostastcevesesicenvessses 21 1 1 How to Use This Manta add 21 2 Whatis REACH ira is 21 1 21 Assistive Add On s for REACH Version a dad bs 21 2 Smart Ey LeChmOlo y Add Oi 42 242 taser cesceees aii stelatsts a a dae 22 21 2 Smart Lists Technolo oy Add On taa ata 23 1 2 1 3 Dynamic Labeling Technology part of the Smart Lists Add On ooccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininininos 25 1 2 1 4 The REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Add OM oooccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininines 26 1 2 1 5 Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols Add ON occcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninininininininininines 27 14222 New Foame s to RACE 28 LZZ EME a 4 oy Sad ide 28 22 2 Graduated DICO id 29 2D IASSOCIA Ed ICON AE dis 30 1 2 2 4 New REACH Speech Keyboard System u ccannsessaesvie wedesaeesaeasiedieannalamagieaspoieeeesasatiedieannniaeaae ness 31 LS A ss oases ete cease acta seemed ae end rae see edo re 31 1 2 2 6 Keyboard Previews in the Keyboard Gallery
309. ngine the Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols if purchased or provided with this REACH product or the AT amp T Natural Voices if purchased or provided with this REACH product This License Agreement extends to any free upgrades or documentation that AHF makes available to You NOTE If You install the Microsoft Text to Speech Engine a copy of Microsoft s License Agreement is presented separately During installation You are required to accept both the REACH Interface Author software License Agreement and the Microsoft Text to Speech Engine License Agreement F Limited Warranty THE REACH INTERFACE AUTHOR SOFTWARE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED COMPLETELY ASIS THERE IS ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BE IT EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED THIS INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR FUNCTION AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS THE COMPLETE RISK ASSOCIATED WITH THE QUALITY OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS PROGRAM IS YOURS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE License Agreement continued F THERE IS ANY DEFECT YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR LOST PROFITS OR CORRECTION BECAUSE SOME STATES AND SOME COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES THE ABOVE EXCLUSION S MIGHT NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE AND COUNTRY TO COUNTRY AHF do
310. ngs you can define the general layout of the REACH keyboard word prediction and button bar In Step 1 you can decide whether you want to be able to see the Menu Bar you also can press the Menu Menu button to hide show the Menu Bar or use the Hide Show Menu Bar option in the View menu and whether you want to see the Word Prediction Word Bar where word prediction candidates are displayed you also can use the Hide Show Word Prediction option in the View menu To select either of these options click on the checkmark in front of them until a checkmark appears To remove them click until the checkmark is gone In Step 2 you can decide whether you want the REACH keyboard docked 1 e attached to the REACH Button Bar as was standard in early versions of REACH or floating a free standing window that can be moved to a desired location by dragging its title bar Similarly you can decide whether you want the REACH Word Prediction word bar to be docked attached to the keyboard if the keyboard is docked or attached to the Button Bar if the keyboard is floating or floating a free standing window that can be dragged to a desired location or can be set to track the cursor see section 2 11 10 1 Settings Word Prediction Caret Tracking Click on the radio button to select the options that you want until a black dot appears in that circle Note If you select floating for the REACH keyboard you might want to use t
311. ning move the pointer to the Stop _2 button and click on it Scanning then will stop While scanning is stopped you can use the REACH Menu most of the REACH buttons and make changes in the current application To resume scanning press the Start scanning button To completely turn off scanning select No Scanning from the Scanning Menu For more information on using scanning see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards Note If you exit scanning with one of the three scanning options selected then the next time you start REACH it automatically will start scanning If you do not want this to happen select the No Scanning option before exiting REACH 9 5 Scanning Menu Prompts and Timing REACH offers different prompt options Also the time associated with most scanning events can be adjusted The Prompts and Timing option in the Scanning menu produces the Scanning Prompts amp Timing page of Settings where you can select different prompt options and where you can adjust scanning times see section 2 11 2 Settings Scanning 213 214 10 OREACH Menu Bar Help Contents Getting Started How Do l Search For Help On Glossary bout REACH Interface Author Figure 145 The Help menu in the REACH Menu Bar Virtually all of the information in this manual is also contained in the REACH Help System When you select the Help Menu option various methods of finding help are o
312. not in any open dictionaries AutoShow hides the word prediction window until you have met a set criterion number of keys time or both Punctuation option provides automatic spacing and capitalization Zoom lets you enlarge where you are typing and where you are pointing Dwell switch that has different options available for pausing Dwell REACH Word Prediction Feature Windows Management Tools Many Scanning Options Multimedia Keyboard Author Speech Augmentation Alternatives Ten Assessment Tasks AHF Keyboard Format Standard Picture Text Keys Abbreviation Expansion amp Sentence Completion Speak Highlighted Text Option Speech Dictionary Feature for Word Prediction Sound Keys Application Program Management Personal Dictionaries Automatically Speak Last Word Sentence Options Animated Keys Get Keyboard Keys to Build Keyboard Systems Transparent Keys Change Cursor Shape Options 32 e Adjustable Dwell Time Switch e Add Last Word to Dictionary Shortcut e Sizable Keyboards in X amp Y e Adjustable Pointer Smoothing e Startup and Exit Options e Drag Double Click and Right Button Emulation The REACH Keyboard Author M Authoring System Lets You Author Different Kinds of Keyboards Storybook Keyboards Standard Keyboards Game Keyboards Exploratory Keyboard Performance Aid Keyboards Children s Keyboard Quiz Keyboards Scanning Keyboards Puzzle Keyboards Musical Ke
313. not perhaps the easiest to learn or even the best configured keyboard the standard QWERTY keyboard remains the standard for the foreseeable future One REACH Children s Keyboard Children uses simple animated keys and sounds to entertain children while helping them start to learn the location and names of the keys on a standard QWERTY keyboard see Figure 112 5 2 13 5Exploratory Keyboard Keyboards REACH also provides Exploratory Keyboards to stimulate even younger children who are not yet ready for a traditional keyboard For example one Exploratory stimulus response Keyboard is provided The Explore keyboard see Figure 113 provides animated transparent keys along with sounds and speech describing relatively simple events For example when you point at one of the keys the frog jumps In addition this keyboard can be presented as a scanning keyboard for children who cannot yet use a pointer 164 e Start Scanning A Stop Scanning gt e f ar a Jj LO Vii E PISTA j a a WEEE 4 Ss T i Z TID PM AMES NZ A aS Figure 113 Sample Exploratory Keyboard stimulus response keyboard 5 2 13 6Speech Keyboard Keyboards the REACH Speech Keyboard System For a general discussion of speech augmentation in REACH see Uses of Speech Speech Augmentation REACH comes with four different approaches designed to help you augment your speech Two approaches use traditional speech screens with w
314. ns is selected then more detailed information is available printed or stored By default when Assess data are stored they are placed in the Reach5 Data folder under the log file name that you are asked to provide Of course you can direct the data to another location by changing the path disk folder etc The general format for printed and saved data is similar for all tasks In the printed and stored format raw data are presented in addition to some summary statistics Latency accuracy and error measures are recorded as appropriate for the task Following are lists of the variables reported in the Results Summary dialog box and definitions for the statistical terms used Click Double Click and Release Task Data The measures reported are the mean median and standard deviation across all conducted trials The time measure is from the Go instruction until the entire response is completed 1 e click double click or release In addition the number of false starts 1s reported starting before the instruction Go is presented Point Point and Click and Drag Task Data The measures reported are the mean median and standard deviation across all conducted trials The time measure is from the Go instruction until the entire response 1s completed 1 e point point and click or drag A summary also is presented of the mean times for trials where the direction was up down left and right In addition the mean time
315. nside the list so that a text caret appears and make your changes e g use the arrow keys to move around the delete key to remove words etc Be sure that all words sentences are separated by a comma Words are presented in the same order that they appear in the list 2 11 10 10 Settings Word Prediction Hot Keys The Hot Keys category provides a list of hot key options see Figure 54 Using these Hot Keys you can perform many REACH Word Prediction operations from the REACH or hardware keyboard Below is a list of Hot Keys and their functions 84 Word Predictior Hot key Caret Tract List j Some Hot Keys need two keystrokes For example Fe we f means press the Function Key Fe then press the w i Word Size EY on Hot Key 3 Hot key Action E e 1 1t0 2 Types text in same numbered word box a P TAB Selects the current Word Tip 9 More Optio Punctuation b amp Le Pe ve Pauses Word Tips eee F2 a Adds word to a user dictionary aa ord ips Fen Turns numbering on and off Sa QuickWord F TAB Sends a Tab to your application F2 F2 Sends an Fe to your application Learning these keys could increase your productivity Cancel Figure 54 The word prediction Hot Keys page of the Settings dialog box Hot Key s Hot Key Action 1 to 9 Types text in corresponding word box when numbering is on Tab Types a word sentence presented by
316. nt dialog box is shown where you can select from a variety of fonts sizes label colors background colors etc see Figure 81 To help you decide a preview area is presented 127 In Step 2 there are three choices to make If you want REACH to set up authoring so that the key s label is spoken when it is pointed at click on the checkbox in front of Automatically add speech output when pointed at until a checkmark appears If you do not want this click until the checkmark is removed Similarly select the second checkbox if you want REACH to automatically set up a key so that its label will be spoken when it is pressed Finally you can have REACH automatically transfer the label of the key to its key Contents that is the letter or words that are typed when the key is pressed This is useful for most typing keyboards e g which type the letter a when a is on its label Font Font style Size Justify Regular fi E Let Center Right F Tw Cen MT Condense F Tw Cen MT Condense Fr USPS Bar Code F Verdana bi Sample Text m Author Colors Figure 81 The Font dialog box In REACH you can have a key play a sound or speak text when it is pointed at You also can set the amount of time that you must point at the key before it plays the sound or speaks In Step 3 you can override the amount of time established in the general REACH setting see the Speak play sounds when pointed a
317. nted and your job is to aim the pointer as accurately as you can at the center of the cross The data reported are the standard deviations for horizontal and vertical movements while you are trying to aim steadily at the cross In this case the standard deviations are measures of movement so the larger the standard deviations the more unsteady you are Try using this task to evaluate your ability to aim with little movement when using different kinds of pointers While other considerations also are important e g performance on the Point task the ability to hold the pointer steady is an important consideration when choosing a pointer If this task reveals a great deal of unsteadiness then you should consider using the Wobble feature when using REACH not when using the assessment tasks the Wobble feature will not work when using the Wobble assessment task See section 4 7 1 for details of the procedure after the Wobble Task is selected 111 112 5 0 REACH Menu Bar Keyboard Select Make Change keyboard Size Select Key Sound Turn Typing CFF Turn Key Speech OFF Cont Allow Hot authoring Go to Sound It Gut Themes Change Phoneme Key Sound Figure 70 The Keyboard menu in the REACH Menu Bar The Keyboard menu see Figure 70 contains many exciting options ranging from selecting a different keyboard to authoring a new keyboard Descriptions of these options are found in the following sections
318. o add or modify keys Figure 106 The Background Editor tool bar produced by pressing the Background button Background Color Button By default the background color of REACH keyboards is gray If you would like a different color press the background color Ka button on the toolbar and then pick from one of the colors in the resulting Color dialog box see Figure 107 Press the OK button to use the color you selected or press the Cancel button if you change your mind and want to keep the previous background color When you have finished all changes to the background press the finished background iis button on the Background Editor tool bar 158 Figure 107 The Color dialog box Background Label Button You can add up to two text labels on the background of the keyboard by pressing the background label EN button When you do a menu drops down offering the top label or the bottom label Select the label you want to add edit and a text entry box appears on the keyboard background as well as the Background Label Editor tool bar see Figure 108 414 4388 AE Figure 108 The Background Label Editor tool bar To move the text box point at one of the edges of the text box until the mouse cursor takes on the appearance of a double arrow and drag the text box to the desired location You also can click on one of the four dark squares located on all four corners of the text box and change the size of the tex
319. o make sure 1t 1s okay with the authors copyright to use the file for your personal use 1 e loading it into a word processor saving it as a txt file and then extracting words to be used in a personal dictionary If you look on the Internet you often can find dictionaries glossaries or word lists relevant to specific settings make sure with the owner of such word lists that it is okay with them if you build a dictionary from their list Next select Build option enter a name e g Algebra enter the path and name of the new txt file e g CAMy Documents algebra txt or use the Browse Bisse US Build lt button to locate it and press the Build It button During the creation of the new dictionary the Dictionary Builder Statistics dialog box is presented When building the new dictionary REACH will compare each word in the identified txt file with words in all other open dictionaries If 1t finds a word that is already contained in one of the open dictionaries e g the might be in the text file but it already is in the Main dictionary it will not include it in the new Algebra dictionary The Dictionary Builder Statistics dialog box will show both the number of words that have been completed and the number of unique words found 1 e the number of words in the new dictionary Press the Exit button when you are ready to return to the dictionary dialog box Press the Done button when you are finished
320. oard Theme keyboard lets you change your keyboard theme to one that incorporates a phonetic keyboard For example when using such a theme the home keyboard will have links to both a phonetic keyboard and a standard REACH typing keyboard using letters Also each typing keyboard will have quick links to the other The third method is similar to the second except that you move to the Select a Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Theme keyboard by selecting the Go To Sound It Out Themes option found in the Keyboard menu on the REACH menu bar 11 4 Using Sound Feedback when Typing Phonetically You should try this program in a variety of configurations to find the one that works best for you However the original intent was to provide an environment rich in aural feedback to help users who might be having problems reading writing printed text If you haven t already done so be sure to install the Microsoft speech synthesizer that comes with REACH or some other speech synthesizer Also make sure that the sound system on your computer is turned on and at the right volume for your situation If in a classroom library or other setting where you want to reduce the chances of bothering others consider using an earphone most computers now have jacks available so that you can plug in an earphone or headset To adjust the volume look for a picture of a speaker M in the tray of the Windows task bar Try left clicking it to produc
321. of smoothing that wobble performs move the slide to a smaller value left to decrease smoothing or a larger value right to increase smoothing until you are happy with the performance of Wobble Changes are not made until you exit Settings Try different values to determine if Wobble helps you and if so what value works best Also the Wobble task in the Assess option select Options from the main menu and then Assess can provide some guidance about the appropriate wobble setting based on measures of your steadiness 2 11 5 Settings View Rl REACH Startup Customize the Layout of the REACH Windows Keyboards Stepl Choose what should be visible PU Programs Seanning The Menu Bar R Dwell O Word Prediction vir Stepe Make the keyboard or Word Prediction docked or free floating B Word Predi Keyboard Word Prediction rea Smart Keys Bees q O Dock It Bock It mart Lists de Float It Float It al Home Keyboard E Favorites de O Step i Choose where you want the REACH button bar to be e Speech Put REACH at the bottom of the screen lt ma E Put REACH at the top of the screen OK X Figure 31 The View page of Settings 63 Click on the View option on the left side of the Settings dialog box and the View page of settings 1s shown on the right side see Figure 31 Also the Word Prediction subcategory is displayed in the list of categories On the View page of setti
322. oint at the keys turn them off see the preceding Section 11 4 1 Sound Cues about Key Sounds Provided when a Key Is Pointed At Change Your REACH Phonetic Sounds Theme A phonetic sounds theme 1s a set of sound recordings These sounds are heard when you point at a key on a phonetic keyboard They provide you a cue about the sound or phoneme that goes with that key Below click on a phonetic sounds theme For the REACH phonetic keyboard Hear Samples Phonetic Sounds Theme Picture Phonemes i Simple Phonemes i Cancel Figure 159 Select Phonetic Sounds Theme Dialog Box 11 4 3 Sound Cues about Selected Sounds Provided in the Say It Window When you start a word by selecting the first sound in the word using the phonetic keyboard the Say It window appears in the application near the text caret where you are typing At this point the Say It window will have two parts the left section will show the key faces of the keys you already have selected and on the extreme right will be a final Say It key For example when typing the word tape after you select the first T sound the Say It window Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Figure 160 The Say It replay window as the sounds T long A and P are selected 221 looks like that shown in Frame 1 of Figure 160 After selecting the second long A sound the Say It window changes as shown in Frame 2 of Figure 160 Finally after you
323. om a previous version of REACH and you want to use one of the user dictionaries from the older version use the Windows Explorer or My Computer to copy those dictionaries from the old User folder to the User folder under the new main folder ReachS If you are purchasing after having used a demo version of REACH 5 OR upgrading from an earlier licensed version of REACH 5 and you want to save any words sentences and abbreviations you added to the user speech or speech2 dictionaries use the Windows Explorer or My Computer to rename those files before installing The files are located in the Reach5 User folder If you are upgrading from a previous version of REACH and you want to use any of the keyboards pictures sounds etc from the older version use the Windows Explorer or My Computer to copy those files from the older subfolders under the old Reach main folder to the corresponding subfolders under the new main REACH folder Reach5 If you are purchasing after having used a demo version of REACH 5 OR upgrading from an earlier licensed version of REACH 5 and you want to save any keyboards that were modified but were not renamed then use the Windows Explorer or My Computer to rename those files before installing REACH 5 Important Ifyou are installing this program on a network or a single computer with restricted user accounts you must install and license this program as the network administrator After th
324. om any open dictionar J More Optio a Y 0 Punctuati Ta AutoEdit a Numbering o AEI i call ook In the Autocdit dictionary and automatically WordT ips correct misspelled words a Sluick Word nee Abbreviations mf Ao O Show abbreviations di Speech et k _ gt OK Cancel Figure 48 The word prediction Options page of Settings AutoType Option The AutoType option completes words you are typing based on 1 the letters you have already typed and 2 the words in the dictionaries you currently have open If AutoType is active and detects there is only one letter that follows the letter s you have typed it will type the next letter for you Similarly if AutoType detects that there is one and only one word that begins with the letter s you have typed it types that word for you 78 For example if you type tes AutoType will type a t test and if you continue typing in then AutoType will finish the word by typing a g and a space resulting in testing a space is typed because there are no other words with that root Besides words AutoType also works with abbreviations and numbers Turn on off the AutoType option by clicking on the checkbox in front of AutoType You also can speak the letters typed by clicking on the box in front of Speak AutoType Letters Sentence Prediction Option If you have a dictionary open that contains sentences e g for speech augmentation
325. ome Microsoft Windows conventions For example there is no promotional title bar that takes up real estate There is a menu bar but you can hide it or show it by pressing the Menu Menu button You also can hide the REACH keyboard by pressing the Hide Hide button if a program requires little text entry e g graphics In order to provide larger keys or diverse keyboards the Home Keyboard approach allows you to get to your home keyboard by pressing the Home button and from there you can press keys that link you to a number of other keyboards of your choosing 33 e my no of oh on or so to up us we pela at Backspace Caps Enter Numbers Lock q Functions shit Mz fx Mc Mv N Um Ml Me fe Gshitt ag ae i j i Escape Ctr MA MSpacebar Left Right MUp Down restore L 4 Programs Options Keyboard Pointer View Word Prediction Scanning Help Keyboard qwerty basic E 02 10 Phi 5 9 2005 A ESO CIE ES PEPE Menu Double Drag Right Last Horne HEH Word Sentence Highlight Settings Program Hide oo Undo Figure 10 REACH layout displaying a docked keyboard REACH Menu Bar below the keyboard REACH Button Bar below the Menu Bar and REACH Word Prediction top As part of Windows Management you can page through all open programs applications by pressing the next Program Progam button Also most applications that have been maximized enlarged to fill the entire display ar
326. on being executed such as typing speaking running macros etc To change the selected key s to the Pressed key state select Pressed When you are in the Pressed key state the title of the various tool bars will change to show the current key state e g Key Details Pressed REACH allows you to determine the characteristics of the keys for each of the three key states You can have different labels different pictures and different background colors for each key state In addition you can assign different sounds to be played or speech for the Pointed At and Pressed key states 5 2 7 Previewing Keys While in the Keyboard Author The easiest way to preview what a selected key or selected group of keys will look like and sound like later in REACH is to select the key s click on the key state Pal button in the Key Details tool bar and then move your mouse cursor down and up the list of three key states Normal Pointed At and Pressed to see how they appear If only one key is selected you also will hear any associated sounds 5 2 8 Making Transparent Keys For many keyboards you might want key faces that are partially transparent This is especially true for Storybook Keyboard and Quiz Keyboard keyboards see section 5 2 13 13 Storybook Keyboard and section 5 2 13 11 Quiz Keyboard For example you might want the picture of a bird on a key face to appear to blend in with a picture of a tree which is on the keybo
327. onary must be loaded and the abbreviation deleted in each dictionary Attaching Sound Files to Abbreviations There might be times when you would like an abbreviation to play a sound file when selected or type text as well as play a sound file One example relates to using REACH Word Prediction as a speech augmentation system If you would like to have a recording of your voice or someone else s voice played instead of a synthesized voice then this option can be used To attach an existing sound file to an abbreviation either type the abbreviation in the Word text entry box to add a new abbreviation or select an existing abbreviation to add a sound file to an existing abbreviation Next if the sound AIA n Browse file already exists press the Browse button see Figure 141 and select the sound file to be played Note All sounds that come with REACH and all sounds created with the Record option see below are located in the Sounds subfolder of the main Reach5 folder Although it is not necessary it is probably smart to move all sounds to be used into the Sounds subfolder before attaching them to your abbreviations 201 If no appropriate sound file exists and you have the right hardware e g microphone and compatible sound card you might want to create the sound file that gets attached to the selected abbreviation After selecting the abbreviation get 4 your microphone ready and press the Record Reco
328. ons 8 Periodically save the new or modified keyboard If you are modifying a keyboard but you want to retain a copy of the original keyboard use the Save As option and give the modified keyboard a new name When first saving the keyboard select a category that contains similar keyboards e g typing keyboards so that the family settings will apply to the keyboard you are creating If you are creating a new kind of keyboard create a new category or subcategory and make it a keyboard family so that all keyboards that you add to that folder will have the same characteristics See section 5 2 1 1 The Keyboard Gallery and Keyboard Families for more information on Family Settings 9 You can preview the new keyboard on the fly by loading it into REACH Every time you save the keyboard in the Keyboard Author REACH automatically reloads the keyboard so you can quickly test preview the changes you made Note Ifyou started with one of the REACH keyboards that had colored keys on its icon when you selected it then that keyboard already has scanning instructions most keyboards that come with REACH already have scanning instructions Of course if you don t like the scanning pattern for those keyboards you can modify it using the Scanning Expert The next section provides some information and suggestions if you are changing an existing keyboard The second following section provides suggestions and information about authoring n
329. or corrections you can make First Check Box The first option indicates ClickAssist is turned on no checkmark or currently not selected a checkmark To start ClickAssist select one of the other options to turn it off click on this option 89 2 Programs d Scanning AR Dwell eS 4 Wobble Bed View If you have trouble performing a mouse click then the ClickAssist Smart Keys settings might be able to help With ClickAssist technology REACH will determine when you have 4 Favorites made an actual click anywhere in REACH or anywhere on your 2 Word Predictior display On the ClickAssist page you can describe your click style To use ClickAssist while scanning please go to the ClickAssist page Under the Scanning Settings El gt x Figure 58 Picture of the ClickAssist Settings page of Settings feel ClickAssist sl i gt Pl Programs Please select the choices below that best describe your click style Coa Scanning check all that apply AR Dwell erate I don t need any help with clicking restore to default setting Wobble a View I miss the target when I push the button down but I am able to lift Smart Keys up on the target s Smart Lists alm Home Keyboard o I make multiple clicks and then I push the button down for some E Favorites time and lift e Word Predictior If I hold the switch down for 1 00 seconds then it is areal click Speech if Sounds I make another a
330. ord prediction word boxes Figure 47 When displaying candidate words in the word boxes REACH Word Prediction initially is set to display text using Times New Roman font type in bold style with font size equal to 12 and font color set to black However you can change the font type style size effects and color of the text appearing in the word boxes by pressing the Word s Favorites Customize the appearance of REACH Word Prediction A Word Predictior CO A SS or Choose the background color font and font color for the Caret Track mood liek J Background Word s View olor Font Preview Sd Options Ma More Optio Pointed At e Punctuation Choose the background and text color for when a word is 1 Numbering highlighted or pointed at with the mouse 2 e Background Word s l r Word Tips Color Color Previews Cae Quick ord ey Hot Keys Figure 47 The Word Size amp Color page of the Settings dialog box Font L J button in the Normal section of the Word Size amp Color page see Figure 47 This 1s especially important 1f you have limited vision and want to display very large words 1 e by increasing the font size or have normal vision and want to display a larger number of words 1 e by decreasing the font size You can change the background color by pressing the Background Color EN button and picking the color you want 71 Similarly the background color and font color c
331. ors that appear on the key s corners when it is selected wait until the mouse cursor changes to a double arrow and then drag that corner to achieve the desired shape or size 5 2 5 3 Copying Keys Use the Copy button to reproduce the size and shape of a key that you have created Note that all of the attributes of the key are copied 1 e the key s shape color function etc The Copy option is especially useful if you have created an unusual key and you want several of them to appear on the same keyboard To copy a key first select 1t by clicking on it when selected a black resizing square appears on each corner and the Key Details tool bar appears Next press the Copy button and a duplicate copy is created When you move your mouse cursor back inside the keyboard the duplicate copy will adhere to your mouse pointer as if it were being dragged Now drag the newly created key to the desired location and click the mouse switch to drop it onto the keyboard If you want another copy of the same key press the Paste button on the Button Bar again Note You cannot drag the new key to a location where part of it overlaps another existing key If you attempt this REACH presents a message stating that keys are overlapping and then returns the key to its original location 129 5 2 5 4 Deleting Keys Ne If you want to remove a key or a group of keys select the key s you don t want and press the Delete Dele
332. ou can press the Last keyboard button on the REACH Button Bar 167 Note The Speech Keyboard System option is not intended to be a complete system Rather it is intended to be a foundation on which you can build to suit your speech needs If you find it too limited for your needs try the REACH Speech Keyboard System Note In order for a key to provide speech output the Speak Text box must be checked in Key Details for that key and the Turn Speech On option in the Keyboard Menu must be selected if it is there and the Turn Sounds On option in the Options Menu must be selected if it 1s there Note If you are using the Microsoft Text to Speech Engine that comes with REACH and would like to try a different voice select the Voices option from the Options Menu and select a different voice 5 2 13 80ther REACH Speech Keyboards Three other keyboards are part of the second keyboard approach to speech augmentation using REACH These keyboards are described below Speech QWERTY Keyboard Persons Things Keyboard and Speech Abbreviation Keyboard These keyboards can be selected to increase flexibility when augmenting speech Speech QWERTY Keyboard The Speech QWERTY keyboard Speech QWERTY can be selected from the Speech Screen Help keyboard the Speech Screen Entertainment keyboard the Speech Screen Conversation keyboard or by using the Select option from the Keyboard Menu This keyboard is intended to provide
333. ou press a period comma question mark or exclamation mark from your REACH keyboard the following events will occur 1 REACH automatically deletes one space if appropriate 2 The selected punctuation mark is typed 3 The appropriate number of spaces are typed 1 e one after a comma and two after a period question mark or exclamation mark 4 Ifa letter is then typed REACH automatically capitalizes it 1 e first word in a sentence If you don t like REACH word prediction automatically performing these actions turn this option off by clicking on the checkbox in front of From the Keyboard until the checkmark disappears You also can select punctuation marks from the list of QuickWords the words presented in between words If you select a word box containing a punctuation mark the above four events always will occur regardless of whether the From the Keyboard option is on or off If you want punctuation marks offered in between words when the Quick Words are presented check the box by In Word Prediction If you do not want punctuation marks offered in the word prediction windows click on the box until the check mark is removed 2 11 10 7 Settings Word Prediction Numbering The Numbering subcategory of Word Prediction offers you a way to use numbers to select which word box you want see Figure 51 81 S Smart Lists Word Pe Home Keyboard Numbering If you select es use nu
334. ou use a pointer When you use Wobble a second arrow mouse cursor appears This is the active cursor and depending on how you have set wobble it will usually move slower than the actual mouse cursor It is the second arrow cursor that determines where the mouse click 1s delivered Whether you should use the Wobble feature depends on the type of pointer you are using the amount of control you have over the pointer and your personal preference While increasing the Wobble setting tends to increase accuracy in some situations it also tends to slow down the pointer a feature that some users might not like To turn on the Wobble feature click on the checkbox in front of Click here to use wobble until a checkmark appears To turn it off click on the box until the checkmark is removed 62 El REACH Startup Fi Wobble is useful if you have difficulty keeping the pointer steady It Keyboards can be used by itself or with Dwell to help you aim better Programs Scanning i Mote To drag or double click use the Drag or Double buttons on 8 Dwell the REACH Button Bar Wobble View E O Click here to use wobble Smart keys Er Sm Lists Adjust the amount of smoothing using the slider below Home Keyboard _ ae Bill gt a avorites ee a cet Word Prediction lt Speech d Sounds m IA m s u E El gt D x Ok Lindo Cancel Figure 30 The Wobble page of Settings To adjust the amount
335. ound you want by using the scroll bar You can select a category subfolder on the left side of the dialog box to help narrow your search Also you can enter a key word in the text box and press the Find It button on the right side of the dialog box To hear one of the sounds files just click on it To select a sound file as the default key sound select it click on it and then To look in other locations press the Look In L amp button When you locate the sound you want you can copy it using the Copy Paste button move back to the home folder using the Look In button select a category and paste it in REACH using the Copy Paste button 182 To exit the dialog box without making any changes press the Close button Finally if you do not want any default key sound press the None button 5 5 Keyboard Menu Turn Typing Off or On For most situations you will want REACH to type letters and other text to the application with the focus However there might be times when you do not want text sent to an application In these situations select the Turn Typing Off option When you do two things happen First 1f you press a key that normally types a letter or word 1t will not Second this option label changes to Turn Typing On With the new REACH Family Keyboard Settings approach you can turn text output off in one keyboard e g speech keyboard because you don t want everything typed to the current a
336. ovided to allow you to display the REACH keyboard if it has been hidden len i Selecting the Show Keyboard menu option is the same as pressing the Show keyboard 2 button When you select this option its label changes to Hide Keyboard Hint To maximize the viewing area of the application program hide the keyboard and press the Menu Bar button until both keyboard and menu bar are hidden You also can hide the REACH Button Bar and Menu Bar if shown by pressing the Control and Alt and H hide keys at the same time To show them again press the Control and Alt and H again 7 2 View Menu Hide or Show Word Prediction If you do not want the word prediction Word Bar to appear whether it is floating or docked then press the Hide Word Prediction option in the View menu When you do the word prediction bar will disappear and this menu option changes to Show Word Prediction If you want the word prediction bar to be visible select the Show Word Prediction option in the View menu 189 7 3 View Menu Hide or Show Menu Bar T Selecting the Hide Menu Bar menu option produces the same outcome as pressing the Menu Menu button on the REACH Button Bar Also when selected this menu option changes to Show Menu Bar To make the Menu bar appear either press the Show Menu Bar option in the View menu or press the Menu Menu button on the REACH Button Bar 7 4 View Menu Make Word Prediction Horizont
337. oviding the number of keys that when multiplied by the scan time equals the desired interval For example if you want to wait 30 sec between stimulus presentation and the Scan Time is set to 3 0 seconds then use ten scanning wait keys between the presentation and the test key or keyboard 5 2 13 20 Motor Skills Keyboard Keyboards REACH keyboards can be used to practice the motor skills involved in pointing and clicking activities For example if you use scanning keyboards you can practice clicking your switch with the Baseball keyboard Your job is to press the switch when the ball gets to the plate see Figure 128 If you press at the right time you get a home run Otherwise you get feedback about whether you were too early or too late You can change the speed of the ball by adjusting scan time values on the Scanning Prompts and Settings page of Settings Practice your pointing skills with the Road Race Start keyboard Move your mouse cursor to the Start button and then follow the road to the finish line see Figure 129 When you finish the first track try the second and third more difficult race tracks 180 Figure 128 Sample Motor Skills Keyboard that let s you practice clicking your mouse Figure 129 Sample Motor Skills Keyboard that let s you practice aiming your pointer 5 2 13 21 Macro Keyboards REACH keyboards can contain macro keys that do more than just type or speak For an example Macro ke
338. own 139 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action Key Action Moria Figure 94 The Key Action dialog box Normal and Shifted Options All of various key actions described in the following sections can be assigned to either a Normal key press 1 e when the Shift key is not pressed or to a Shifted key press 1 e when the Shift key is pressed When the Key Action dialog box is first presented it automatically 1s opened to the Normal key press option e g notice in Figure 94 that the Tab at the top of the main text entry box is set to the Normal Any action defined while on the Normal Tab will be performed when the key is pressed without the Shift key down If you want to assign a different action to be performed when the Shift key is down then click on the Shifted tab at the top of the text entry box You now can enter an entirely different key action Note Ifyou assign text or a function to the Normal key press REACH assigns the same function to the Shifted key press If you want a different shifted function or text delete what has been assigned and add your text or function Also REACH attempts to automatically generate the proper shifted function for single letter keys 1 e if you assign b to the normal key press REACH automatically assigns B to the shifted key press However REACH does not attempt to assign shifted characters to any keys that are not letters numbers punctuation etc
339. ox appears saying Click now to reverse If you operate your switch while this message box is displayed REACH jumps to the last row or word box or button depending on what is currently being scanned and starts moving backwards toward the first row This can provide a quick short cut for getting to the other end of the keyboard Once a row has been selected the first e g left most key in that row is highlighted Keys then are highlighted one at a time from left to right If you click your switch when any key is highlighted it is pressed and the key s action is non executed e g the letter a is typed If you have selected the Prompt me to stay in row option in Settings see section 2 11 2 1 Settings Scanning Prompts and Timing and you select a row but do not select a key in that row then a prompt will appear instructing you to Click now to stay in this row If you click when this prompt is displayed the selected row will be scanned again If you do not click when this prompt is presented then scanning will return to the first row If you have not selected the Prompt me to stay in row option in Settings and you select a row but do not select a key in that row then no prompt will appear and scanning will return to the first row Auditory Scanning Keyboards An Auditory Scanning keyboard 1s one that reads information about the row or key aloud or plays distinctive sounds to help the user identify wh
340. ply getting the sounds wrong AHF has taken steps to try to reduce the risk that such factors might reduce your chance of finding the word you are after You shouldn t have to be able to perfectly pronounce a word in order to find it Also the goal here is not to teach you the correct pronunciation for a given word although that could be a goal for some future AHF products Rather the goal is to allow reasonable variations in pronunciation of a target word to all result in the production of that word we want you to find and write the word you are after On the other hand when too much variation is allowed some users might find some of the words presented a little unusual because they do not seem to match the sounds that they selected As a result AHF has provided four different dictionaries to choose from which vary in the number of words they contain and in the amount of variation in pronunciation they provide see Section 11 3 Selecting a Phonetic Dictionary In our above example of finding typing spelling the word light the final T sound provides an example to demonstrate the possibility of varying pronunciations leading to the same word It is conceivable that some user of this program might hear say or report the final T sound in the word light as a D sound because of the similarities in those two sounds With the Sound It Out Keyboard you can make such a mistake and still end up being offered light the word you were af
341. pplication and text output will 1 automatically be turned off when you go to other similar keyboards e g another speech keyboard in the same family 2 automatically be turned back on when you move back to a different family of keyboards e g a typing keyboard where you have text output turned on 5 6 Keyboard Menu Turn Key Speech Off On Depending on the situation you might or might not want REACH to speak the contents of keys when they are typed If you are typing and benefit from hearing the identity of each key as it is typed then you should turn key speech on so that the menu option says Turn Key Speech Off Other times you might not want key speech on because it might be distracting for others near by In those situations you can turn key speech off by clicking on the Turn Key Speech Off menu option When you do two things happen First if you press a key its contents will not be spoken and second this menu option changes to Turn Key Speech On With the new REACH Family Keyboard Settings approach you can turn key speech off in one keyboard e g a typing keyboard because you don t want every character you type to be spoken and key speech will 1 automatically be turned off when you go to other similar keyboards e g another typing keyboard in the same family 2 automatically be turned back on when you move back to a different family of keyboards e g a keyboard designed for speech augmentatio
342. procedure used to make selections Typically a pointer is used to identify a location on the screen point and then a switch is activated to select the option at that location click Pointed At key state For a key on a REACH keyboard the Pointed At key state refers to the appearance and sound of a key when it is being pointed at with a pointer e g mouse pointer Any device such as a mouse light pen trackball joy stick etc that can be used to emulate a typical mouse pointer in Microsoft Windows Usually pointers have two functions a way that the user can point at something on the display and a way that the user can make selections e g a switch predicting words There is some semantic confusion about the distinction between word prediction and word completion Regardless of the term used REACH provides word and sentence options based on in order 1 the initial letters typed and 2 the word frequency values for the words abbreviations sentences words sentences with higher values appear earlier Also REACH presents the same frequent two letter words in between words e g after a space punctuation mark or Enter key is typed 239 Pressed key state For a key on a REACH keyboard the Pressed key state refers to the appearance and sound of a key when it is pressed preview box A window that provides the user a sample of what a change will look like program turntable A term used in a previou
343. r s you have typed then it types that word for you FAI REACH Startup Be a m rrr Step 1 mart Keys can help increase your typing speed by removing SLI unlikely keys Choose what you want Smart Keys to do Py Programs FTSE A ey Scanning I want Smart Keys to Keep a Dwell Numbers Keys 2 Wobble d View feo Smart Keys fa How They L Macro Keys fa Other Setti Keyboard Link Keys Punctuation Keys Keys that don t type anything El o Stepa AutoType will automatically type ports of words when its PE Home Keyboard possible Do you want to use AutoType i Favorites O ves Cd Word Prediction eat i O No ike D X PR OK Lindo Cancel Help Figure 35 The Other Settings for Smart Keys page of Settings kS i gt 67 For example if you type tes AutoType will type a t test and if you continue typing in then AutoType will finish the word by typing a g and a space resulting in testing a space is typed because there are no other words with that root Besides words AutoType also works with abbreviations and numbers Turn on the AutoType option by clicking on the radio button circle in front of Yes To turn it off click on the circle in front of No You also can speak or stop speaking any letters that are AutoTyped in the AutoType section of the Speech page of Settings 2 11 7 Settings Smart Lists Available only if you purchased Smart Lists Rl REACH
344. r some other location to the Lace Dictionary Manager Ge Click the Save button to save the user ol dictionary to disk or some other location Save Figure 143 The Loading amp Saving Dictionaries dialog box Many REACH Word Prediction users want to exchange dictionaries with friends and colleagues To make the 32 exchange of dictionaries easier REACH Word Prediction provides the Load Save L0adB3ve button in the Dictionary Manager see Figure 138 If you want to import or load or save a dictionary e g load a dictionary from a diskette or save a dictionary to a diskette press the Load Save button and the Loading amp Saving Dictionaries dialog box will appear see Figure 143 Loading a Dictionary If you want to load a dictionary e g copy 1t from a diskette or some other location into the Dictionary Manager use the following procedure F 1 Press the Load Save 498454 button in the Dictionary Manager to produce the Loading amp Saving Dictionaries dialog box 2 Press the Load Load button to produce the Open dialog box Browse and locate the dictionary you want to load 4 Once you have found the dictionary click on it and press the Open button to copy it into the Dictionary Manager 99 Saving a Dictionary To save a dictionary use the following procedure 1 In the Dictionary Manager select the dictionary you want to save or back up 2 Press the Load Save button to prod
345. rd button and the Sound Recorder dialog box will appear see Figure 141 The Sound Recorder dialog box lists the four steps in making the recording 1 enter the name of the sound wav file you are creating 2 select the quality of the recording 3 make the recording press the Record HE 0o1d 1 button to change your mind press the Cancel button Note Any abbreviation being displayed in a word prediction word box that has an attached sound file will be presented with a green dot to indicate it is an abbreviation followed by the name of the sound file in brackets e g ahfpop followed by the abbreviation and any associated text 8 3 5 Adding Changing Deleting Sentences REACH offers a Sentence Prediction capability similar to abbreviation expansion discussed in the last section but which does not use abbreviations To use this feature you must turn on the Sentence Prediction option found on the Options page of REACH Settings see section 2 11 10 4 Settings Word Prediction Options In order to successfully use the Sentence Prediction option you must have a dictionary open that contains sentences To add sentences to one of your user dictionaries type the sentence in the Word text box of the Dictionary Editor notice that the label of the text entry box changes from Word to Sentence when you type the first space Later when using REACH to type this sentence simply type the sentenc
346. rds Task 12 12 words Wobble Task 4 4 directions up down left right Note The Assess tasks are included as an aid for selecting and adjusting switches pointers keyboards etc They must not be used for any other purpose because the appropriate validation tests and normative data required for any other purpose are not available Also the Assess data provide only part of the information required to 105 make good decisions about the best switch pointer keyboard etc for an individual Other obvious factors include price comfort medical considerations as well as input from a professional experienced in making computer adaptations The Assess tasks are intended to be used within subject in other words to help decide which of several alternatives is better for a specific user They are NOT intended to decide how a specific user compares with other users or populations 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks After selecting the desired task and the number of trials from the Assessment Tasks dialog box press the Begin button and instructions are presented Next the selected number of trials are conducted For all tasks a typical trial involves the following series of events 1 An initial rest period during which the word Rest appears on the screen This period 1s provided to insure that some standard minimum rest period is provided between trials The rest period is set at 7 sec and cannot be adjusted
347. ready have built in links to other keyboards e g typing speech etc Note While you can customize any of the home keyboards or create your own new home keyboard using the Keyboard Author all home keyboards should be located in the Home folder and the name of the keyboard should begin with the word home 2 11 9 Settings Favorite Programs Click on the Favorites category of Settings and the Favorites page of Settings is displayed see Figure 42 Here you can decide which application programs you would like to be presented on your Favorite Programs keyboard When this window is opened REACH searches your computer for different programs and lists them in the Applications box on the left side To add a program to your current list of favorite programs locate it in the list click FAI REACH Startup Customize your Favorite Programs Keyboard Keyboards Programs Your Favorite Programs Keyboard allows you to quickly run your ate i favorite programs To get to your Favorite Programs Keyboard go to Es Scanning your home keyboard and click Favorite Programs To customize your Favorite Programs Keyboard find and click on a program from the Programs list below Then press the add button Application idad f Application A Smart Keys 2 help magician elite e alerts a Smart Lists E accessibility wizard A Home Keyboard A acrobat assistant H Favorites E acrobat distiller 5 Word Pred
348. rent button option that when selected makes the background color invisible so that your label appears to be on the surface of the key rather than on a rectangle that is on the surface of the key When you have selected the background color you want press the OK button to make the color change or the Cancel button to ignore any changes you made 3 The Label Justification Be Button Option When you click on this button a menu appears with four options Select the Left Justify option if you want your label to start at the extreme left side of the text entry text background box Select the Center Text option if you want your label to be centered in the text background box Select the Right Justify option if you want your label to appear on the extreme right side of the text background box Finally select the Cancel option if you decide to not make any changes Note These justification options adjust the text label inside the surrounding text background box Aj gt The Use Normal State Label ME Button Option The fifth button on the Key Label tool bar lets you copy the text label currently assigned to the Normal key state to the Pointed At key state if you are using the Key Label Pointed tool bar or to the Pressed key state if you are using the Key Label Pressed tool bar Fi The Label Location Button Option The sixth button on the Key Label tool bar lets you assign a location to the selected label Click on this button
349. resented see Figure 34 If you select the first option Nothing then Smart Keys is turned off and nothing will happen to keys that are unlikely to follow the letters you have already typed With the second option Remove them Smart Keys literally removes the keys for those characters not found to follow the current sequence of letters you have typed FI REACH Startup Keyboards Programs re Scanning 7a Dwell Remove them Wobble A view fel Smart Keys fa How They Di En w O Change their Colors gt Smart Lists 3 al Home Keyboard 5 Favorites Word Predict cn ord Prediction y Choose what Smart Keys should do with unlikely keys O Nothing Turn Off Smart Keys O Make them Gray and Inactive O Make them Gray and Active Swap Label and Background Colors i E Figure 34 The Smart Keys How They Display page of Settings If you are typing and the key you want is not there this is because you are typing a word that is not in any of the currently loaded dictionaries When that happens press the Escape key which has been labeled Restore on several REACH keyboards and all keys are returned When you finish typing the novel word it is highly recommended that N you press the Add word to dictionary button so Smart KeysTM knows about that word the next time Removing all unlikely keys can dramatically help you locate the next key However 1t might b
350. ress the key or No don t press the key whether that picture could have been taken at the same moment as the one on the presentation keyboard 178 Figure 124 The Memory Spatial Stimulus keyboard is an example presentation keyboard which displays a picture stimulus of a person wearing one earring Feedback about correct or incorrect answers is provided This is done by associating Correct or Incorrect feedback with the Pressed key state as appropriate Figure 125 The Memory Spatial Test keyboard is an example test keyboard which displays different alternative picture stimuli Your task is to press those keys that have a picture that could have been taken at the same moment is the picture just shown displayed by the Memory Spatial Stimulus keyboard e g see Figure 124 To make your own version of a Memory Assessment Keyboard that uses the same general format as the Memory Spatial 1 presentation keyboard load the template keyboard Template Memory Spatial Stimulus into the Keyboard Author and add your own pictures Similarly use the Template Memory Spatial Test Template Keyboard to make a keyboard like the test keyboard in Figure 125 For another example of how you can use REACH to test memory load the Memory Numbers Stimulus keyboard that comes with REACH and then turn on the Single Switch Scanning option in the Keyboard Menu On the resulting presentation keyboard a nine digit number is presented one digit at
351. results in increased typing speed Speed increases are much greater for longer words than shorter words 3 Reduced Visual Scanning and Head Movement Reason The Smart List is presented at the site of the last key selected on the keyboard 1 e where you were just looking After that everything the user needs to complete the word is presented in the Smart Lists no need to continually visually search the keyboard the application you are typing to or the word prediction window 4 Reduced Number of Mental Tasks 23 Rationale When using a standard on screen keyboard users must perform a number of different mental tasks e g remember the letter s already typed determine the next letter search for and recognize the new target letter occasionally check the application to see where they are in the word or if the last letter they intended to type made it to the application and occasionally check the word prediction windows to see if the target word is presented In addition the act of changing from one task to another task can itself be thought of as a task and takes time With Smart Lists once a list is shown the user s task remains the same recognize the option that is most similar to the beginning of the word being typed While Smart Lists Technology is extremely important for persons using scanning see above it also can be important for persons using point and click input Unlike using Smart Lists while scann
352. rmation on making adjustments to the scanning pattern see section 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructions and section 5 2 12 8 Scan Expert Button There are three scanning options offered These are described in the following paragraphs Note Scanning keyboards should not be used with any Assess Tasks see section 4 7 Options Menu Assess 1 4 1 First Scanning Option Single Switch Scanning Single switch scanning is the approach described in the general section on scanning just above In single switch scanning the computer offers options for a specified time period and you wait until the desired option is offered and then select it by clicking your switch For example the top row of keys on a keyboard is highlighted for 2 seconds and if the key you want to type is in the top row you click your switch Next the first key in that row is offered then the second etc and when the key you are after is offered you click your switch and it is typed To use this option select Single button on the button bar ae afoo To stop scanning use the mouse and click the Stop scanning button on the button bar To turn single switch scanning off pause scanning and then select No Scanning from the Scanning menu 1 4 2 Second Scanning Option Dual Switch Scanning Dual switch scanning is very similar to single switch scanning see above except the computer does not offer the different row and column options Instead you use one switch
353. rst installed The Standard Button Bar will look different and have a different order of buttons if you are using scanning or have used the button authoring feature to rearrange the buttons see next section Note The Standard Button Bar automatically changes to the Scanning Button Bar if you turn on one of the scanning options so that only buttons that make sense for scanning are available for scanning see section 2 11 2 Settings Scanning for more information The REACH Button Bar see Figure 15 was designed to provide quick access to some of the REACH features that you might use frequently When you first use REACH it will appear at the bottom of your computer s display However its location can be changed to the top of your display by using the Move REACH to Top option in the View menu To hide the REACH Button Bar along with the Menu press the Ctrl and Alt and h hide keys if using a hardware keyboard you must hold the Ctrl and Alt key down while pressing the h key To show the Button Bar again press the Ctrl and Alt and h again This can be used to create more room on your display or to keep young users from playing with various options You also can author keys on a keyboard so that one key executes the button bar hide control function and the second executes the button bar show function However whenever allowing the button bar to be hidden be careful because you might be cutting off some users from val
354. s Programs then Accessories then Entertainment and then Volume Control also check any external volume speaker controls if your system has any Note The speak Word ard button changes to the Stop speech PF button while REACH is speaking or playing a sound If you want speech to stop immediately press the Stop button and speech will be stopped Note If you want to stop all sounds coming from REACH e g during a lecture select the Turn Sounds Off option in the Options Menu REACH comes with Microsoft s Text to Speech Engine courtesy of Microsoft Corporation REACH can utilize other speech engines as long as they are Microsoft SAPI compliant SAPI stands for speech application programming interface With speech output REACH offers four important types of assistance First feedback about what you are typing can be provided because letters words and sentences can be spoken automatically as you type or on demand This feature can be useful for any typist but is especially useful for persons with vision impairment Second REACH can be used to provide users aural previews of letters before they are typed Third REACH can be used to preview words or sentences These two options can be very useful for some persons with low vision persons who are still learning the language e g children or persons learning English as a second language and for persons who have learning disabilities th
355. s you can make 93 Please select the choices below that best describe your click style check all that apply I don t need any help with clicking restore to default setting I miss the target when I push the button down but I am able to litt up on the target E Favorites cd Word Predictior Speech I make multiple clicks and then I push the button down for some Sh Sounds time and litt peat ClickAssist If I hold the switch down for 1 00 seconds then it is areal click pee Keys mM fal Ta Repeat key I make another accidental click after a good click so wait a while Change Lab before allowing another click ae eee Wait 1 00 seconds then allow me to click again Cancel Figure 63 Picture of the Keys ClickAssist Settings page of Settings First Check Box The first option indicates ClickAssist is turned on no checkmark or currently not selected a checkmark To start ClickAssist select one of the other options to turn it off click on this option Second Check Box If you are more accurate releasing your switch on the target than pressing your switch on the target ClickAssist can deliver the click at the location where you released your switch To turn this option on click on the box in front of I miss the target when I push the button down but I am able to lift up on the target option Third Check Box If you tend to bounce the switch when using it so that several clicks are
356. s and select the option that shows labels on the top 1 2 2 New Features in REACH 5 The four primary changes for REACH 5 are 1 REACH 5 can be licensed and in the Windows Vista operating system 2 the new REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard add on is available 3 the Help system has been updated to be compatible with Vista and 4 starting with Version 5 the various major add ons available for REACH Smart Keys Smart Lists the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard and Smart Speech can be added independently For example in version 5 you can purchase the REACH Interface Author basic platform and add only the Smart Lists add on without having to purchase the Smart Keys add on in version 4 0 for technical reasons both Smart Keys and Smart Lists had to be purchased in order to get the Smart Lists features Other relatively new features which were added in version 4 are available in REACH 5 are described in the following sections 1 2 2 1 ClickAssist Technology ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 Repeatedly pointing your mouse cursor at a target and then using a switch to click on it can be tiring and difficult ClickAssist can help you increase your accuracy when pointing and clicking and can reduce the number of times you accidentally select the wrong thing To help eliminate such unintentional switch closures use ClickAssist to define how you Click when using either s
357. s can be created 1f you have messages you want to encode for privacy This can be fun when communicating with friends or useful when sending information over the Internet You can use the Secret Code Keyboard that comes with REACH or create your own When you type a letter with the Secret Code keyboard a different character will be printed because pairs of letters have been swapped For example the letter G might be swapped with the letter A Hence when you type a sentence it will not look much like a sentence forget using a spelling checker The person receiving your message must have the same Secret Code Keyboard to decode the message This is done by typing the letters in the message back through the same Secret Code Keyboard In the above example the letter A would be returned to the letter G and the message gets unscrambled Note This is a very simplistic encryption technique and easily broken so don t assume that no one else will read your messages Hint Include some non text characters in your keyboard to make the message look more bizarre e g etc Below are the key assignments used in the example Secret Code Keyboard 176 Key Label Key Typed Key Label Key Typed q v k 1 W m l O e Space Bar t r y sde t Z S y r X d u c f 1 k V q O l b g p a n J m W T J f n a p lt N S Z h d X gt H f c u g b ps U h Space Bar e j 5 2 13 18 Puzzle Keyboard Keyboards Puzzle K
358. s pressed by the user clicking a mouse button or by a user operating a switch to select it during scanning When you author a key you can only work on one of these three key states at a time In most cases REACH attempts to help you so that you do not have to enter the same information more than once For example 1f you are creating a simple key that has the label A and types A when it is pressed you probably want the label A to appear on all three key states and the key to type A when you press it REACH does this automatically for you However there are times when you might want the key to have a different label or different picture when you point at it and yet another label or picture when the key is pressed For those situations press the Key State Pal button and move to the key state you want and then add or change its label or picture For example the Quiz Keyboards that come with REACH typically provide part of a question in the Normal key state more of the question in the Pointed At key state and the answer in the Pressed key state The left side of Figure 76 shows the Normal Key State for one of the keys on the States keyboard that comes with REACH The middle frame shows what the key looks like when pointed at and the right frame shows how it appears when it is pressed A t A t Normal Fomted At Pressed Figure 76 Example of the different appearances that can be created for the Normal lef
359. s strongly recommended that you do not move your mouse while scanning The one major exception is the Stop scanning button which you can point at and click on to stop the scanning process see next section Just pointing at the Stop button pauses scanning If you are using a joystick you can point and click as normal Important Note If you exit REACH while one of the scanning options 1s still active 1 e the button bar still contains the Start and Stop scanning buttons then the next time you start REACH it will start in scanning mode and will operate accordingly any switch will be interpreted as a scanning selection 2 17 Button Stop Scanning L ber LILI A To stop scanning press the Stop scanning button see previous section for more information After scanning stops your mouse operation 1s returned to normal 1 e you can click anywhere on the display Important Note If you exit REACH while one of the scanning options is still active 1 e the button bar still contains the Start and Stop scanning buttons then the next time you start REACH it will start in scanning mode and will operate accordingly any switch will be interpreted as a scanning selection 97 98 3 0 REACH Menu Bar Programs Many of the more powerful REACH options are found in the menu system The Menu Bar is located just above the REACH Button Bar If you cannot see the Menu Bar press the Menu Menu button and it wil
360. s version of REACH This approach has been replaced by the Home Keyboard approach puff and sip switch A special switch that can be activated by a user who either blows or sucks air often through a tube Puzzle Keyboard A term describing a keyboard that can be created with REACH which allows the user to select one piece at a time revealing an underlying picture QuickWords In REACH the words or sentences that appear in between words 1 e after a space or Enter key are typed Quiz Keyboard A term describing any keyboard or keyboard system designed to ask questions and provide feedback to the user used for educational tests quizzes etc QWERTY keyboard The most common keyboard configuration in the United States Named after its top left row of letter keys REACH An acronym standing for Remote Access to a Computer Without Using Hands REACH Keyboard Author The software module in REACH that allows you to modify existing keyboards or make new keyboards REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard A new approach to typing developed by AHF Patent Pending in which the user types phonetically by selecting the sounds in a word instead of the letters REACH Speech Keyboard System A term describing an example keyboard system provided with REACH designed to help augment speech Reading Assistance Keyboard A term describing any keyboard or keyboard system designed to help a person learn how
361. scribed below to perform other operations on the picture 1 e resize it return it to its original size stretch it to fill the key or tile it Grab a Picture Select this option and REACH allows you to capture a picture directly from what is being displayed on your computer monitor When selected the Grab a Picture window appears on your display Figure 88 gi Figure 88 The Grab a Picture Window To capture a picture and use it in the Keyboard Author for a key face move the rectangular box to the location of the picture you want by dragging one of the four black sides a mouse cursor with two double arrows will appear when you are in a location that can be used to move the box Next change the size of the rectangle to the desired size by pointing at one of the four corners and dragging it the mouse cursor will change to a double arrow to depict that you are in an area that can be resized Using the above procedures move and size the box until you are happy with the picture that will be taken 1 e the area inside the box When you are satisfied click on the camera icon Next the Picture Gallery Choose a name for this picture dialog box appears Here you must give the picture a name and indicate where you want the picture stored by selecting the proper category on the left side of the Picture Gallery Type the name of the picture in the text box at the top of the dialog box You do not have to enter an extension because
362. se and results from the use of this program Because this product is intended to assist persons with disabilities gain access to and provide input to other software programs there is absolutely no guarantee that this program will work with all other programs because AHF has no control over how programs from other sources are written AHF strongly recommends that prior to purchasing this product You download and try this program in demonstration mode with the programs that You intend to use in order to make sure that it works properly with those programs LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE License Agreement continued C This Product is Copy Protected REACH INTERFACE AUTHOR SOFTWARE IS COPY PROTECTED Illegally giving away or selling copies of software results in higher cost for the average honest consumer Using copy protection assures that our customers receive the lowest price and best value possible Copy protected means the following After purchasing this product select the Licensing button option on the opening window On the resulting Enter Key window obtain the Fingerprint number provided there You then must provide AHF the following information the Fingerprint code product name Your name contact information as requested and Serial Number The Serial Number is stamped on the CD and the bottom of the back cover of the REACH User s Manual If You purchased this product by phone or Internet and were not s
363. se Code Here again we strongly recommend that you copy and paste the License Code from the email Note Ifyou have trouble entering the Name or License Code in this window there is another way you can license the product Exit REACH and press the Windows Start button Select All Programs find the REACH Interface Author 5 program group and click on it Click on REACH Interface Author Licensor and a simple window will appear in which you can enter the Name and License Code 14 Finally to license the product you purchased press the Enter License button Now your new REACH program will run each time you launch it 15 If installing this software on other computers for use only by the same individual see the License Agreement follow the above procedure for each computer Note Ifyou are upgrading from a previous version of REACH after you have moved all the keyboards dictionaries etc you want to save from the earlier REACH folders to the corresponding REACHS folders use the Windows Uninstall option in the Control Panel Add or Remove Programs to uninstall the earlier version of REACH Microsoft Text to Speech Installation When installing the purchased version demo versions are a little different you are given the option of installing Microsoft Text to Speech This requires an additional 24MB of space on your computer s c hard drive You also will be given the option of adding REACH to the Start Men
364. se the list of key words provided When you find the key word you are looking for press the Display button and you are taken to the relevant page of information Ifthe first key word you try doesn t result in the information you are seeking try other related topics and other key words until you find what you are looking for 10 5 Help Menu Glossary If you find a word or term that you are not familiar with select Glossary at the top of the Help Contents page In the resulting Glossary dialog box browse the list of key terms until you find the one you are looking for When you click on it a definition 1s provided 10 6 Help Menu About REACH Interface Author Click on the About REACH option in the Help Menu to find out more information about the version of REACH you currently have installed For example you can find the exact version number of your program and compare 1t with the current version number as posted on the AHF web site www ahf net com to see if it is time to upgrade You also can find out more about the people who contributed to REACH e g computer scientists graphics artists etc 216 11 0Using the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Note This information is for anyone interested in phonetic typing However you must have either a functioning demonstration version of REACH or a purchased licensed copy of the Sound It Out Keyboard to apply the information contained in this supplement Note
365. sec for all three settings and a standard deviation of 0 17 This difference was not statistically significant The mean preferred settings for non disabled adolescents and children were 0 40 sec and 0 53 sec respectively In Step 4 you can adjust how steady the mouse cursor must be before Dwell starts If you are not able to hold your pointer very steady then try a lower value for Steadiness If you have the Pause after Dwell option turned on see following section then the Steadiness setting has an effect on its performance Specifically the higher you set Steadiness the less you have to move to restart Dwell As usual try different values to see what works best for you 2 11 3 2Settings Dwell Pause Options When you click on the Pause Options topic on the left side of the Settings dialog box the Pause Options page is displayed see Figure 28 and you can select from two different options for pausing the dwell switch FR REACH Startup Keyboards Customize how Dwell Pauses Programs When using Dwell it is important that you have an option to pause ei oe because often you don t want Dwell to keep clicking when you have at E stopped moving the mouse 9 Dwell l Se Timing Offer the Dwell Pause Window Pause Optir The Dwell Pause Window is a small window that appears on the right hand side of the screen When you move near this window it will expand and dwelling on this window will pause or restart Dwell Paus
366. select the P sound the Say It window changes as shown in the Frame 3 At any point if you click on the T icon the sound you have selected to be played when you point at that key will be played to cue you about the sound of that key see the preceding Section 11 4 2 Selecting a Phonetic Sounds Theme for Sounds Played when Pointing at a Key The same is true for the other selected keys shown on the left side of the Say It window If you click on the Say It portion of the window your speech synthesizer will attempt to blend pronounce as one word all the sounds you have selected This might not work very well when certain combinations of sounds are selected or when only one or two sounds have been selected at such times you might be better off just clicking on the key icons to remind yourself of where you are in the word However if a sufficient number of sounds have been selected clicking on Say It can provide you with a useful cue about where you are in the word you are typing 11 4 4 Speech Cues about Word Prediction Words Provided when Pointed At When you point at one of the words in the word prediction windows your speech synthesizer will read that word aloud to help you identify the word For example when pointing at the word tape which will appear in the first word prediction window with a yellow background after entering the T sound long A sound and P sound the synthesizer will say tape If the word
367. selected 4 7 4 4 Point Task This task is intended to help determine your ability to use a pointer such as a mouse track ball joy stick light pen In order for the pointer to work with REACH it must simulate a mouse pointer in Microsoft Windows The Point Task provides a good way to compare your pointing performance when using different pointer alternatives For example if a mouse track ball and light pen are all reasonable candidates for you then you can test to see which one of these pointers yields the fastest speed and highest accuracy However before deciding on a pointer it is recommended that some of the other Assess tasks also be administered especially Point and Click Drag Letters Numbers Words and Wobble because there is more to Windows operations than simply pointing with a pointer Also other factors besides speed should be considered expense availability subjective feelings about ease of use and comfort medical considerations input from an expert etc See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for the procedure once the Point Task 1s selected 4 7 4 5 Point and Click Task This task is intended to help determine your ability to use a pointer when both pointing and clicking In order for the pointer to work with REACH it must simulate a mouse pointer and the switch being used must emulate a left mouse button click in Microsoft Windows The Point and Click Task
368. sent instead of the one you intended then select the option I make multiple clicks and then I push the button down for some time and lift With this option active the first few times you operate the switch will not be treated as clicks Rather a click will only be generated if you hold the switch closed for the amount of time that you specify in the If I hold the switch option For example if you do not want a click sent unless you have held the switch for 2 00 seconds then enter 2 00 for X in the statement If I hold the switch down for X seconds then it is a real click so that it says If I hold the switch down for 2 00 seconds then it is a real click Fourth Check Box After making a good click if you tend to accidentally bounce the switch again you can have ClickAssist help by checking the fourth check box I make another accidental click after a good click so wait a while before allowing another click After selecting it enter the amount of time you want ClickAssist to wait before allowing another click in the sentence just below this option For example if you want to wait at least 3 00 seconds before allowing another click enter 3 00 so that the statement now reads Wait 3 00 seconds then allow me to click again Note Different ClickAssist settings are available if you are using scanning go to the ClickAssist page of Settings under the Scanning category Note The ClickAssist feature works everyw
369. showing these homophone hints all the time showing them only when you point at the word with your mouse or not showing these phrases at all For more information on using homophone hints see Section 11 1 How to Use a Phonetic Keyboard If you do not want to hear the words and homophone hints read aloud see Section 11 4 4 Speech Cues about Word Prediction Words Provided when Pointed At 210 9 0 REACH Menu Bar Scanning W MHo Scanning Single Switch Scanning Dual Switch Scanning Inverse Single Switch Scanning Prompts and Timing Figure 144 The Scanning menu in the REACH Menu Bar If you are currently using a keyboard that has scanning instructions see section 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructions and select one of the three Scanning options in the Scanning Menu see Figure 144 then scanning is ready to begin you can then start scanning by pressing the Start scanning button on the REACH Button Bar During scanning your mouse clicks are used to signal selections so you cannot click on anything on your display except the Stop scanning __ _ button on the Button Bar look on the right end of the Button Bar With Single Switch Scanning you can use a single switch left mouse button to select the correct row and then the key In Dual Switch Scanning you use the left mouse button to move from row to row and key to key and you use the right mouse button to make your selection Inverse Single Switch
370. sing this button you will be returned to this Settings page when you exit the Dictionary Manager 74 e Dictionary Manager Dictionar Options d Graduated Dictionary Editor The REACH Main Dictionary can be adjusted for different levels of vocabulary Based on the descriptions provided below select the level that seems best for you Then try it For a while to see how it works IF words that you use a lot are not available come back and raise the level if there are many words that you never use come back and lower gt ae Ey the level speech sounds like user sounds like speech i Level 1 Core vocabulary 7 300 Words f Level 2 Intermediate 18 600 Words Level 3 Advanced 34 000 Words Level 4 College 45 500 Words WAAL aht net com Figure 44 Pictures of the Dictionary Manager left and the Graduated Dictionary Editor dialog boxes After installation six dictionaries are available The Main Dictionary has different vocabulary levels available Click on the main dictionary icon then the Edit button and the Graduated Dictionary Editor dialog box is presented see right side of Figure 44 which allows you to select the best vocabulary size for your situation For more information on the graduated dictionary see section 1 2 2 2 Graduated Dictionary Notice that the icon for the main dictionary is distinguished from the other dictionaries by the color of its cover and Y
371. sound keys offered and try to find the one that represents the first sound in the word light the L sound After you locate and click on the L sound key three things happen compare Figure 146 above with Figure 147 Will you turn on the b E Z 4 Page 1 Sec 1 111 At 1 3 Ln 2 coll like little long Figure 147 The phonetic keyboard shown above in Figure 146 changes after you select the initial L sound in the target word light Keys representing sounds which do not follow an initial L sound have been removed the word prediction windows show common words that begin with the L sound and a Say It replay window 1s shown in application you are typing into 1 Inthe word prediction windows located just above the keyboard the most frequently used words which begin with the L sound are displayed If you are not sure what those words are you can point at them and REACH will read the word aloud If you see hear the target word you type it by clicking on it 2 Another thing that happens is that a feature similar to Applied Human Factors Smart Keys goes to work showing you only the sounds that immediately follow the sequence you have selected based on the words in the currently loaded dictionary For example Figure 147 shows that after selecting an initial L sound all of the consonant sounds are removed leaving most of the vowel sounds There apparently are no words in the currently loaded phonetic dict
372. sound or change the current sound first select the event and then press the Browse BI0wse button Locate the name of the sound file you want and click on it When finished adding changing sounds press the Done button You also can silence an event by first clicking on the event and then click on the Nothing button If you don t like any of the sounds that come with REACH and you have a microphone that works with your sound card you can create your own sound file and attach 1t to a REACH event To create a sound file and attach it to a REACH event first click on the REACH event you want to attach the sound to Next press the Record 4 laca button and the Sound Recorder dialog box will appear see Figure 57 To record a sound follow the four steps listed in the Sound Recorder dialog box 1 Enter the name 2 Select the quality of the recording 3 Make the recording press the Record end the recording 4 Save the resulting file when you are happy with it you also can press the Play sound you have created If you change your mind press the Cancel Cancel button 88 Sound Recorder Choose a name for your recording Select the quality of pour recording High Fidelity Stereo Size Estimate for 3 sec recording 32KB Record your sound file by pressing the Record button Then preview the sound by pressing Play Repeat if necessary Record Play 5 top To
373. ss that key to load the standard keyboard type the word and then press a similar key on that keyboard to return to the phonetic keyboard But what if you want to stay on the phonetic keyboard and type the missing word phonetically For situations like that an Add Word key is included on each phonetic keyboard for example see Figures 146 149 above Let s say that the name of your friend Tammy is not in the phonetic dictionary To add the word Tammy to the phonetic dictionary press the Add Word key and the Sound It Out Add Word Wizard dialog box appears above the phonetic keyboard that you are using see Figure 155 below Following the instructions on that dialog box your next task is to enter the sounds for the word you are adding aj a as See el a Th Im P il h Wt as L Es es m P N m Af pa a ie gt f p Adfa ar amh Fe m N does the word sound Using the phonetic keybo ard kp ol ela gt WE oe er Ji r a i F j toed DULG 1 E ne VW Ort YE i A W 5 H TO AUL click the Say It button to hear your word When the word sounds right press the Next button Figure 155 Picture of REACH s Sound It Out Add Word Wizard dialog box prompting you to enter the pronunciation for the new word As you enter the T sound the short A sound etc pictures of the keys you have selected are displayed in the dialog box very similar to the way they are added to the Say It replay window when you ar
374. starts Keyboards Programs Find and click on the program you want to automatically start Then press the add button Application y Application accessibility wizard a activate product i ad aware se personal wad address book k adobe gamma loader s adobe photoshop elem adobe premiere 6 le A adobe premiere 6 le re El aol instant messenger de backing up audio cds AM IT 121 To remove a selected program click on 1t and then press the Remove button Depending on your computer and the number of startup programs you have on your computer it might take a while to present all the programs especially the icons which are displayed last You can select the program as soon as you see 1t you do not have to wait for all programs to be displayed REACH only lists programs found in menus If you cannot find the program you want use the Browse button to locate and select it 2 11 2 Settings Scanning Note Foran overview of scanning keyboards and how to use the different options see section 1 4 Using Scanning Keyboards On the Scanning page of Settings you can turn scanning on by selecting which type of scanning procedure you want to use Single Switch Dual Switch or Inverse Single Switch or you can turn scanning off by selecting No Scanning see Figure 19 Note You also can select scanning options or turn it off in the Scanning
375. synthesis hardware and software Figure 119 Sample Musical Keyboard with a key being pressed questions and answers can be read to the student in addition to or instead of simply printed in text This multimedia approach to learning can be helpful when testing special children or when testing under special situations 12 Using the REACH Keyboard Author feature a teacher can make a key that has the written question general topic label or a representative picture on the key face as defined in the Normal key state When the student points at it the question 1s read aloud by REACH as defined in the Pointed At key state When the key is pressed REACH can print the answer and read it aloud as defined in the Pressed key state This multimedia approach combines redundant visual text and auditory speech information to provide immediate feedback and helps keep the student s attention These characteristics can be useful for students with attention deficit disorder or learning disabilities To see an example Quiz Keyboard keyboard load the State Capitols keyboard The State Capitols keyboard presents two levels of information see Figure 120 In the Normal key state two letter state abbreviations are presented e g NM New Mexico When that key is pointed at the name of the state appears along with an abbreviated question e g New Mexico Capitol is meaning what is this state s capitol Finally wh
376. t option discussed in section 2 11 11 Settings Speech For example in some game keyboards you might want to have a long delay before a clue is spoken or in some performance keyboards you might want the information presented immediately If you want to use the AHF default settings for Keyboard Details click on the Use Defaults button at the bottom of the Setup how Authoring should create keys dialog box When you have selected the options that you want press the OK button 5 2 5 Laying Out Keys on the Keyboard The next general recommended step is to select the keys that you want and position them on the keyboard The following sections provide information and suggestions for how to lay out your keyboard 128 5 2 5 1 Using the Key Palette When you are ready to add a key to your keyboard click on the Key Palette Lew Palette button and the Key Palette will appear see Figure 74 Different keys are presented representing different shapes sizes you might want to use Y ou also can reshape resize any of these keys after it is dropped onto the keyboard To move a key to the keyboard click on 1t with your mouse and then move your mouse cursor to the keyboard When on the keyboard you will find that the selected key automatically is shown and dragged by the mouse cursor Just move the key to the desired location and then drop 1t onto the keyboard by clicking your mouse If you don t like the keys that come on the Key Pa
377. t Pointed At center and Pressed right key states for one of the educational keyboards that comes with REACH M The next section provides an overview of the variables that can be modified for the different Key States 5 2 1 8 Key Variables Following is a brief summary of the different variables that can be independently defined for each Key State for any REACH key along with the manual section where you can get more information 119 Key State Variable that Can Be Defined Section in Manual Normal Top Label 5 2 6 1 Font Size Location Justification Color Top Label Background 5 2 6 1 Color Size Location Bottom Label 5 2 6 1 Font Size Location Justification Color Bottom Label Background 5 2 6 1 Color Size Location Key Face Color including transparency 5 2 6 2 Picture 5 2 6 3 Size Location One Transparent Color Picture Layout 5 2 6 3 Tiled Stretched to Fit Sizable Pointed At All of the variables listed above for Normal Key Sound 5 2 6 4 Key Speech 5 2 6 4 Pressed All of the variables listed above for Pointed At Key Action 5 2 6 5 Type Text Perform Functions Execute Macros Load Another Keyboard a Keyboard Link 5 2 1 9 Key Actions The term Key Action is used to refer to what function s the key performs when it is pressed This is in addition to any changes in its appearance see previous section The most primary Key Action for any keyboard is to type a character or perform some k
378. t REACH reads all the words you have typed since the last sentence ended for example since you last typed a period For users having trouble with reading this can provide a reminder about where you are in the sentence being typed 11 4 7 Speech Cues about Any Highlighted Text provided by the Speak Highlighted Button Perhaps one of the more important tools for any user who has trouble reading or has trouble seeing text because it is too small is the speak Highlighted button on the REACH button bar First you should highlight the text you want to hear read aloud by for example dragging over it with your mouse pointer Some programs will highlight a line of text if you click in the margin next to that line Similarly some programs will let you highlight the entire paragraph by clicking a second time in the margin next to the paragraph 228 When the text is highlighted it usually is displayed differently for example white letters on black background instead of the normal black letters on white background After you have highlighted the words you want to hear read press the speak Highlighted button on the REACH button bar and your speech synthesizer will read the highlighted words 11 5 Selecting a Phonetic Dictionary Two of the dictionaries include a total of 7 800 words and two of the dictionaries include 18 600 words For each of those two dictionary sizes two levels of variation are included More Variation an
379. t and then press the Find It button Only pictures with that word in their file name are then displayed If you know the format for the picture you are seeking click on the Show Me button and select from the different picture formats that are compatible with REACH 1 All Picture Types 122 2 Bitmaps 3 Windows Metafiles 4 Jpegs If there is a picture stored outside of the REACH Pictures folder press the Look In button and select from four other sources Look in the home folder this option returns you to the default Pictures folder Look on CD Look on Floppy Drive Look on Removable Drive e g Zip Advanced Look this produces a Browse type dialog box Regardless of the method you use the strategy is the same First locate and select click on the picture and then press the OK button to load it This tool is very useful for loading pictures from other sources e g clip art or other programs that provide pictures The Copy Paste button allows you to copy a picture by clicking on the picture and then selecting the Copy option You then can paste it in another location by moving to the target destination e g a different Category and selecting the Paste option The Copy Paste options combined with the Look In option described above provide yet another powerful way to bring pictures into REACH Specifically if you want to move a picture from an external source e g floppy disk into the Pi
380. t a mouse cursor dialog box see Figure 133 where you can preview and select from different shaped mouse cursors Several shapes are available The files that define the cursor shapes provided with REACH are stored in the Reach5 Cursors folder Use the scroll bar to look through the different shapes until you find the one you want Categories of cursors are shown on the left side of this dialog box Also you can enter a key word in the text box on the right and press the Find It button to help locate a cursor To change the cursor click on the new cursor and then click on the OK button To exit the dialog box without changing cursors click on the Close button 188 7 0 REACH Menu Bar View Show Keyboard Show Word Predictor Hide Menu Bar Hake Word Prediction Vertical Float Keyboard Float Word Prediction Move REACH to Top Change Keyboard Size oom Figure 134 The View menu in the REACH Menu Bar The View menu provides options related to how REACH is displayed on your computer screen see Figure 134 7 1 View Menu Hide or Show Keyboard REACH provides the Hide Keyboard option for completely hiding the REACH keyboard and REACH Word Prediction window if it is active Selecting the Hide Keyboard menu option is the same as pressing the Hide Nan keyboard Hide button When you select this option its label changes to Show Keyboard The Show Keyboard option is pr
381. t and Size Similarly you probably want all or several of the keys to be the same physical size To help with this REACH has the Size Expert To learn more about this option see section 5 2 6 6 Key Details Alignment and Size 5 2 1 6 Key Styles The term Key Style refers to the general appearance of a key In REACH there are two Key Styles the traditional three dimensional 3D button appearance and the two dimensional 2D rectangular look see Figure 75 On the Key Palette both 3D and 2D keys can be selected In addition you can select a key or group of keys and change its Key Style at any time by pressing the Key Style L button and then selecting 3D Look or 2D Look For more information on Key Style see section 5 2 6 7 Key Details Key Style 118 Mm Figure 75 On the left is a sample 3D Key Style and on the right is a 2D Key Style Note If you are changing a key from one Key Style to the other you have to change it for each of the three Key States Normal Pointed At and Pressed see the next section 5 2 1 7 Key States The concept of Key State is simple but very important in keyboard authoring All keys have three key states Key State Description Normal When a key 1s not being pointed at with the mouse not being pressed and not being offered during scanning Pointed At When a key is being pointed at with a mouse or when a key is offered for selection during scanning Pressed When a key i
382. t artwork for your REACH keyboards utilizes the Grab a Picture option This option lets you capture any picture that can be displayed on your computer screen 1 Select the Grab a Picture option and a rectangle appears that has an attached camera icon and the Keyboard Author is hidden to make it easier to get to the picture you want 2 Drag the rectangle by one of its edges to the correct location 3 Resize and reshape the rectangle drag its corners until the area inside the rectangle contains the picture you want 4 Save the selected area as a bitmap picture by clicking on the camera icon 123 5 When the Picture Gallery dialog box 1s displayed provide a name for the picture file and select a category where the picture will be stored Using the Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbol Set Optional Add On If you purchased this classic set of communication symbols have more than 6 000 pictures that they can add to any REACH key face You will find them all in a separate folder labeled Mayer Johnson Pictures in the picture gallery While this set of pictures usually comes in one single large folder AHF has assigned them to different categorical folders e g nouns verbs food etc to help you locate that picture that is perfect for your situation As a result more than one copy of a given picture might be found e g a picture of a person eating might be found in the nouns food folder and also in the verbs food fo
383. t box by dragging it Type the label you want in the text box To select a different color for the text label press the text color gt button and select the color you want in the resulting Color dialog box To change the font of the label press the font A button and the Font dialog box is displayed see Figure 109 In addition to selecting a different type and size of font you also can change the colors of the text label press the Text E button or the label background press the Background button When you press the Background 1 button the Label Background Color dialog box 1s presented see Figure 110 Notice that in addition to selecting a background color for the label you can select the Transparent option so that the background is invisible and the text label appears to be printed directly on the background of the keyboard 159 Font Lett Center Right Tr USPS Bar Code F Verdana EACH Author Colors Figure 109 The Font dialog box You also can left right or center justify the label by clicking the justify label Es button and can have the label anchored to the top middle bottom or positioned freely by pressing the anchor label L button There are no pointed at or pressed key states for the keyboard background so the key state button is grayed out When you have finished making changes to the background label click anywhere on the keyboard and you are returned to the B
384. t how to change the pronunciation of a word in general When you have finished typing in the letters Tammy press the Finished button and the new word is added to your Sound It Out User s dictionary along with its pronunciation The next time you select T short A M long E using your phonetic keyboard the word Tammy will appear in a yellow word prediction box In the following sections different options and adjustments for the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard are described in more detail 11 3 Selecting a Phonetic Keyboard Different phonetic keyboards are included with this product As with most assistive products it probably is best to try each of the keyboards and see which works best for you There are three ways you can do that The simplest way is to select the Favorite Keyboards key found on the Home Keyboard for most of the REACH themes On the resulting Favorite Keyboards keyboard there are links to the current phonetic keyboards available Click on one of them and try it out Repeat the same steps to try out the others Another method involves selecting a keyboard theme that incorporates one of the phonetic keyboards On most REACH Home Keyboards you will find a key labeled Change Keyboard Theme or Change Home Keyboard click on it One of the keys on the resulting keyboard will be labeled Sound It Out Phonetic Typing Themes click on that key The resulting Select a Sound It Out Phonetic Keyb
385. tal Time 0 00 Total Size OFB To keep and save the sound file press Done otherwise press Cancel Tj Figure 57 REACH Sound Recorder dialog box 2 11 13 Settings ClickAssist ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 Select the ClickAssist category and the Click Assist page of Settings is presented see Figure 58 This page provides a brief overview of the ClickAssist adjustments To turn on off or adjust ClickAssist for point and click input click on ClickAssist subcategory page To turn on off or adjust ClickAssist for scanning input click on the ClickAssist subcategory under the Scanning main category 2 11 13 1 Settings ClickAssist ClickAssist ClickAssist is not available for Windows 98 Select the ClickAssist subcategory of ClickAssist and the ClickAssist settings are presented which take effect when you are using point and click input see Figure 59 these are the same settings as found on the Keys ClickAssist page of Settings If you tend to accidentally click when you don t intend to when using a pointer you can set ClickAssist to ignore any click that isn t longer than a specified duration Also if you accidentally make multiple clicks right after a good click you can set ClickAssist to ignore any click that occurs before a specified amount of time after a good click The first option turns on off ClickAssist and the second third and fourth options turn on the three maj
386. te button A message box will ask you to confirm that you want to delete the selected key s 5 2 5 5 Selecting and Positioning a Group of Keys If you would like to reposition a group of keys first select the set of keys you want by dragging over the entire group While you are dragging a gray rectangle defines the area being selected Also a thin blue line appears on the border of all keys included in the group Another method of selecting a group of keys involves holding the Shift key down while clicking on the keys you want included in the group Use the following procedure 1 Select the largest group you can by dragging as described just above 2 With the Shift key pressed click on any other key you want added to the group 3 Repeat Step 2 until you have all the keys you want in the selected group Once you have selected the group of keys you want click on any key in the selected group and drag the entire group to the desired new location Regardless of how you picked your group of keys if the selected group does not contain the keys you want click anywhere off the group and the group will be deselected so that you can try again Note When you select a group of keys two or more the key state for all keys in that group will be changed to Normal Note You cannot drag a group of keys to a location where any key overlaps another existing key 5 2 5 6 Changing a Group of Keys Some changes can be made to an entire set o
387. ter Smart List Technology or Smart Lists A new approach to typing developed by AHF Patent Pending in which subsequent letters are presented in a list along with the letters already typed The list can be arranged by probability for when scanning or alphabetically software requirements The minimum computer software necessary to successfully run a program e g REACH For REACH the software requirements are specified in section at the beginning of this manual entitled Hardware Software Requirements sound REACH offers sound options if your computer has the appropriate hardware and software The Sounds page of Settings has a list of most of the events that can have sounds attached to them Also individual keys and abbreviations can have sounds attached to them sound keys Any key that contains a sound played when the key is pointed at or pressed Special Keyboard A REACH term that describes keyboards designed for special populations or uses For example the Alphabetic keyboards are designed to help persons not familiar with the key layout for the standard QWERTY keyboard speech augmentation A term used when technology is used to improve a person s ability speak to communicate In REACH the REACH Speech Dictionary and the two speech keyboard systems are intended to serve as a foundation for a speech augmentation system which you must expand to suit your conversation style speech dic The name of the file stor
388. ter In this example whether you select a T or a D for the final sound in light the word light is presented In fact both the word light and the word lied are presented along with homophone hints to help you decide which one you are looking for Similarly if your target word had been lied and you made a similar mistake of entering L long I T you also would have found your target word By allowing variation in pronunciation to lead to the same word AHF 1s increasing your chance of finding the word you are seeking 222 What if the word you are after is not in the dictionary or what if the word you are after is in the dictionary but the pronunciation that you use for that word 1s not included In either case the solution is to add that word to your REACH Sound It Out User Dictionary and provide your pronunciation of that word so that you can find it again 11 2 Adding Words to the REACH Sound It Out User Dictionary While the larger phonetic dictionary includes over 18 600 common words that number still is relatively small compared to all the words you might want to write In addition many words that you might use frequently are proper nouns like people s names or the names of places and very few of those are included in the Sound It Out main dictionaries How do you type words like that All of the phonetic keyboards contain a key that loads a standard typing keyboard so if you know how the word is spelled you can pre
389. test to see which one of these pointers yields the fastest dragging speed and highest accuracy However before deciding on a pointer and switch combination it is recommended that some of the other Assess tasks also be administered especially Click Double Click Release Point Point and Click Letters Numbers Words and Wobble because there is more to Windows operations than simply dragging Also other factors besides speed and accuracy should be considered expense availability subjective feelings about ease of use and comfort medical considerations input from an expert etc See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Drag Task is selected 4 7 4 7 Letters Task Most of the Assess tasks described above are intended to determine your ability to point or to click with different hardware configurations The Letters Task is intended to help assess your ability to use a pointer and switch combination with a REACH keyboard or to assess your ability to use a standard computer keyboard In this task single letters are presented in the area above the REACH keyboard and you are instructed to enter that key as quickly and accurately as possible This task can be used to test different pointer and switch combinations in a more realistic typing environment Also it can be used to determine which keyboard is best for your situation For example the Letters Task can help deter
390. that represents the main action verb in the sentence you are speaking The categories and their corresponding abbreviations are Key Abbreviation 1s are was were will vis physical act lifting running etc vph think mental cognitive activities vth hold contain possess etc vhd see look vse hear listen vhr feel touch vil smell vsm taste vts find locate search vid talk chat discuss argue etc vtk move give take position lift etc vmo help assist vhp eat cook consume vet drink vdk mental emotional act vem like love hate etc 170 When you press one of these keys the corresponding abbreviation is typed This portion of the abbreviation is added to the overall abbreviation being constructed 5 At this point you have identified a set of abbreviations for a particular subject and verb category and question also if there is a question involved There will be a corresponding set of abbreviations displayed in the word prediction word boxes and you might find the one you are after providing that it came along with the speech2 dic or you added it Ifitis present just click on it and it will be spoken 6 You can go further with this system For example if there is a second major noun direct object or predicate nominative you can go back to the Noun yellow background keys and further refine your abbreviation Also if there is a negative in the sentence no none not never etc you can hit the Not
391. that you want REACH to speak when the first row 1s offered during scanning you can skip this step if you do not want specific speech or sound for this row Type the text in the text entry box to the right of Say The speech synthesizer is used to speak this text Similarly if you want REACH to play a sound when the first row is offered click the Choose button to the right of Sound When you do the Sound Gallery Find the Sound You Want to Load dialog box is presented see Figure 131 Here you can select the sound you want or press the Record button to create a new sound file for example your voice saying Row A to G Press the No Sound button to remove the currently selected sound file Whichever speech or sound file you choose in Step 2 will be played when that row is offered during keyboard scanning unless one of the sound options in REACH is turned off 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above until all the keys are included in the rows 4 If you change your mind about the rows already defined you can remove a row at any time by clicking on one of the keys in the row the whole row will be identified with pink key borders and then press the Remove button 5 When you have finished assigning keys to rows press the Done button The newly created scanning instructions are saved in a file with the same name as the parent keyboard but with a scn file extension e g if the keyboard name is puzzle9 kbd the scanning ins
392. the 75 Please Setup Dictionary Associations Please choose which dictionaries to look in while using the home basic keyboard Next from the dictionaries you choose designate your User Dictionary Your User Dictionary is the dictionary that will receive any words you add REACH will only look in the following REACH Dictionaries dictionaries main User This keyboard currently searches all open dictionaries Vasca Sound It Qut Gem Cancel Figure 45 Picture of the Association Manager dialog box CaretTracker by clicking on the checkbox in front of Vertically as shown in Figure 46 When active CaretTracker will automatically move the REACH Word Prediction window up and down vertically so that you can see where you are typing in most applications E Favorites o Care Tracker Ata __________ i Word Fredictior REACH Word Prediction moves the word list close to where You re typing Caret Trac f a This keeps the caret text cursor from moving under Word Size Et the REACH Word Prediction window and makes it q Vi easier to find the word choices oo bey pene Move Word Distance in pixels from More Optio Prediction Window Word Prediction Window 5 i d 0 Punctuation E vertical 1 3 Numbering F ES Words Horizontally ul Ca P a SWICK Word The current window view is Hor
393. the Key Palette will appear see Figure 105 Here six different keys are presented with representative shapes you also can resize reshape any of these keys to a different size after it is dropped onto the keyboard To move a key to the keyboard click on it with your mouse and then move your mouse cursor to the keyboard When your mouse moves onto the keyboard the selected key will appear and is dragged by the mouse cursor automatically Then move the key to the desired location and then drop it onto the keyboard by clicking your mouse Figure 105 Sample Key Palette 156 Note The Key Palette can be customized to contain your favorite key sizes shapes Just load it into the Keyboard Author the Key Palette is a keyboard named palette make the changes and save it The next time you start the Keyboard Author your Key Palette will appear when you click on the Key Palette button 5 2 12 2 Full Screen Button When you start authoring a new keyboard it will first appear in the default REACH keyboard size You can resize this keyboard window to any size you want but if you want to create a keyboard that will fill the entire display click on the Full Screen EulScreenl button When you do REACH attempts to enlarge the keyboard to fill the entire display If you change your mind you still can resize the keyboard by dragging its edges Of course you cannot make a keyboard larger than the display Hint While the
394. the general use of REACH using the Assess module using the Keyboard Author option and a variety of other REACH features 10 3 Help Menu How Dol The REACH Help System provides a goal directed method of providing help If you have a specific goal in mind but do not know how to accomplish it or what the important keywords are the How Do I help option might be the answer When you select this option a list of General Goals is provided that can help you accomplish your goal For example Change is one General Goal that when selected provides you with a new list of Intermediate Goals Intermediate Goals for the General Goal Change include Color Text Font Keyboards etc With each Intermediate Goal a list of Specific Goals 1s provided that specifies where when or how the change should be made For example 215 Change Colors lists a set of Specific Goals including Keyboard Face Key Face Text Font etc Picking one of these takes you to the appropriate Help Page Using this goal directed approach you should be able to quickly locate the information you are seeking 10 4 Help Menu Search For Help On If you need help on a particular task think of some key words for that task and then press the Index button at the top of the Help Table of Contents page Enter one of the key words in the text box provided in the resulting Help Topics REACH Interface Author dialog box or use the scroll bar to brow
395. the page of settings that take effect when you are using scanning The recommended settings can be quite different for scanning and point and click input Unlike when using point and click input when using Smart Lists and scanning there are definitely strong recommendations provided Step 1 Select one of the five general settings provided When scanning it is highly recommended that you move to a list as soon as possible so the fourth or fifth options are recommended try those first If you like to see a list of words as soon as possible then try increasing the number of words shown in the Always display a list when line at the bottom of Step 1 69 Rl REACH Startup Y Smart Lists for Scanning Keyboards Step 1 Select the option that best describes your preference P a CA tae Always on keyboard unless there is one list Seana More Keyboard Fewer Lists AR Dwell ere O Medium Keyboard Medium Lists H Wobble View Less Keyboard More Lists Few Clicks recommended fa Smart Keys Less Keyboard More Lists Shorter Lists recommended El Smart Lists Always display a list when there are words or less in a list fa Point And Step 2 Select how words appear in the list fa Scanning Alphabetically fa Appearance More likely words first recommended Dynamic La Step 3 Select the type of list that you prefer Home Keyboard 3 Show longer lists in two columns a al O Always show the list in one co
396. tice memory skills memory requirements The minimum amount of computer memory necessary to successfully run a program e g REACH M For REACH the memory requirements are specified in section at the beginning of this manual entitled Hardware Software Requirements menu bar The window that contains menu options usually located near the top of an application In REACH it is just above the REACH Button Bar and can be displayed or removed by pressing the Menu button on the REACH Button Bar minimize A window is minimized when it has been removed from the display and replaced with a small icon This is done by clicking on the Minimize button in the top right corner of most application windows 238 mouse cursor The picture or icon used to show where the pointer is currently aimed The appearance of this cursor when pointed at the REACH keyboard window can be changed with the Cursor option in the Pointer Menu mouse emulator Any pointer switch or other device that simulates a mouse s pointing or clicking behaviors in Microsoft Windows Musical Keyboard A keyboard designed to allow a user to play musical notes Normal key state For a key ona REACH keyboard the Normal key state refers to the appearance of a key when it is not being pointed at with a pointer and not pressed palette key palette In the REACH Keyboard Author program users are provided a keyboard palette that contains keys with differ
397. ting device switch device keyboard etc are likely to be the best for an individual user associated dictionary ies A new approach developed by AHF in which one or more dictionaries are associated with a specific keyboard Using this approach a custom dictionary e g accounting terms can complement a custom keyboard accounting keyboard author a keyboard In REACH creating making or changing a keyboard is called authoring a keyboard To load the REACH Keyboard Author program select the Make option from the Keyboard Menu AutoEdit The feature that automatically corrects common typing spelling errors AutoType The REACH feature that automatically types letters for you if it detects that only one letter follows the current text string avi file format An animated movie file format that has an avi file extension and can be used by REACH ona key face balloon text balloon The small text windows that show candidate words when the Word Tips option is active 233 Bin A folder Reach5 bin that contains the executable files necessary to run REACH as well as the main dictionary for REACH Word Prediction feature main dic bitmap file A file that contains information about a picture that has been stored using a special bitmap or bmp format Such files all have bmp extensions The REACH Interface Author program can use bitmaps for the keys or keyboard backgrounds bmp f
398. tion More Options Three useful features are offered on the More Options page of Settings dialog box see Figure 49 Favorites Learning ra i Word Predictior Determine how quickly words should appear based on your typing style Caret Track W Look at the words that you select M Look at the words that you ype fi Word Size SAS M l AutoAdd De lew Automatically add any typed word that is not in the e dictionary Options E sii T Auto dd Words to a user dictionary iy R pro Warning this feature will allow misspellings to be Parra added to the dictionary 0 Punctuation Ta l Autos hor Mumber ing Only show words when enough letters are typed it ter now many letters nd paused for 0 0 secs Ward ips After h 10 And d for 0 0 mh ss Quick ord e Hot Keys Be Sneech 4 Cancel Figure 49 The word prediction More Options page of the Settings dialog box The two options at the top of the page are related to the REACH Word Prediction s ability to learn your use of words or typing style The AutoAdd option automatically adds any words to a user dictionary 1f they are not in any open 19 dictionaries The AutoShow option keeps the REACH Word Prediction window hidden until a criterion is met based on number of keys typed time or both Learning Word Usage When you first install REACH the REACH Word Prediction engine attempts to determine which words you are trying
399. tions are presented alphabetically However when scanning it is highly recommended that they be listed in the order of their probability No need to search the keyboard search word prediction or search the application to see where you are in the word just pick the option that best shows the way your target word begins E ka ke ki Kleenex Figure 2 Picture of the K key before left after right it is selected showing a Smart List containing the options for the next letter s Using Smart Lists Technology when Scanning If you are using one of the scanning input techniques you should select one of the two recommended Less keyboard settings because with those settings you are taken to a list very quickly Also you should select the more likely words first option If you do not like long vertical lists select the Show longer lists in two columns option Below are four potential benefits of using Smart Lists when scanning 1 Decreased Work number of clicks required Reason Row column scanning is used to select first letter 2 clicks but after that scanning is linear down the list so the user operates the switch once per selection instead of twice as in row column scanning Work reduction is greater for longer words than for shorter words 2 Increased Typing Speed Reason Candidate extensions which are presented in the list are ordered by their probability Overall as many words are typed this
400. to read This means that larger text strings sentences can be broken down into words sounds and characters or characters built into sounds words and sentences resize A term used to describe changing the size of a window For example when REACH is in a horizontal orientation the left and right edges of the window can be dragged to the desired size vertical changes cannot be made When in a vertical orientation both the width and height can be changed by dragging the edges Say It replay window When using the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard the Say It replay window shows you which sounds you already have selected When clicked the Say It button blends the sounds you have selected so you hear the speech synthesizer attempt to pronounce them together as a single word Scanning Expert An option in the Keyboard Author feature that allows you to add or change scanning instructions that is the scanning pattern used by a scanning keyboard scanning instructions Instructions created by the Scanning Expert that determine the pattern of scanning for scanning keyboards These instructions are saved in a scn file with the same name as the keyboard being authored 240 Scanning Keyboard Any keyboard that has been provided scanning instructions When the Scanning option is active such keyboards allow users to make key selections with a single switch by first selecting the row where the desired key is located and then sel
401. to scanning times or prompts available click on the Prompts amp Timing page of Settings under Scanning The resulting page lists all available scan time adjustments see Figure 20 Different scanning events e g moving from one row to the next moving from one key to the next showing a prompt etc have been divided into four groups Keyboard when scanning the keyboard Words when scanning the word prediction bar Buttons when scanning the Button Bar and General other scanning events When the Prompts amp Timing page of Settings 1s first displayed the Keyboard options are shown but you can change to a different group by pressing the appropriate button above the window that lists the events Note that you also can select a sound to be played or assign text to be spoken for each event Prompts and Timing for Keyboard Scanning This page of Settings lets you change how long different keyboard items are scanned Also different scanning prompts can be turned on or off and you can determine how long a prompt 1s presented Rl REACH Startup Customize the Timing and Prompts for Your Scanning Environment Keyboards Programs Use the four buttons below to select a scanning category Then Te select the event you want and make the adjustment 24 Scanning Prompts d Kybd _ _words Buttons Generos Switches a Highlight the first row for 1 00 seconds i E ClickAssist 8 a Highlight all other rows for 1 00
402. to type based on research that has shown which words are most frequently used in English Specifically the REACH Main Dictionary contains from 7 000 to 45 000 English words depending on the vocabulary level you have selected in the Main Dictionary For each word a word frequency value is included that is a measure of how frequently that word is used The initial values range from relatively high values for high frequency words 1 e the to relatively low values for low frequency words e g accompanying The initial frequency values provide a reasonable starting point for predicting the words you are typing In the REACH Word Prediction window candidate words are presented from left to right in the horizontal orientation or top to bottom in the vertical orientation in the order of their word frequency value more frequently used words are on the left or top Because your word usage can vary widely from the average word usage REACH provides options for automatically adjusting word frequency values to better fit your use of words This is accomplished by the two Learning options found on this page When either of these options is active your word usage pattern is learned so that more frequently used words appear more quickly Learning can be based on The number of times you select a word 1 e select Look at the words that you select The number of times you type a word 1 e select the Look at the words that you
403. ton down for some O time and litt If I hold the switch down for 1 00 seconds then it is a real click I make another accidental click after a good click so wait awhile before allowing another click p Wait 200 seconds then allow me to click again If you tend to litt your switch more accurately than clicking consider using Inverse Single Switch Scanning Es E Figure 25 The Scanning ClickAssist page of Settings Cancel If you are using scanning and have trouble operating your switch as accurately as you would like then you should try AHF s ClickAssist technology With this option you can define your own switch action to get rid of some of those unintentional selections that can occur before or after the switch action you wanted to make The first option turns off ClickAssist and the second and third options represent the two major corrections you can make First if you tend to bounce the switch when using it you can select the second option I make multiple clicks and then I push the button down for some time and lift With this option the first few times you operate the switch will not be counted as clicks Rather a click will only be generated if you hold the switch closed for the amount of time that you specify in the next statement For example if you do not want a click sent unless you have held the switch for 2 00 seconds then enter 2 00 for X in the statement If I hold the switch dow
404. tructions are saved in puzzle9 scn The order that you define rows is important Later when the keyboard is scanning the row that you defined as row 1 is the first row highlighted during the scanning cycle row 2 is the second row highlighted etc This can be important For example if you prefer your scanning rows to go from the top downward then you should define the top row of keys as row 1 the second from the top row of keys as row 2 etc On the other hand if you prefer the scanning pattern to proceed from the bottom upward then define the bottom row of keys as row 1 the next to the bottom row of keys as row 2 etc If you prefer that your scanning pattern moves through vertical columns first instead of horizontal rows simply define your vertical columns as rows The term row in the Scanning Expert is arbitrary You can define a horizontal row of keys a vertical column of keys some diagonal sets of keys and even a single key as a row Diagonal and other unusual rows can be selected by clicking the first key then with the Shift key pressed clicking on other keys until finished If you define vertical columns of keys as rows they are scanned first in the order you assigned them as rows When a column is selected by using your switch the individual keys in that column are highlighted individually The order in which those keys are highlighted depends on their relative horizontal position and vertical position Specifically
405. tton E allows you to replace the current background picture with another picture Pressing this button produces the Picture Gallery Choose a picture for the key dialog box where you can select a different picture The second transparency 8 button allows you to select a color on the key s picture to be transparent Press this button and two things happen First the appearance of this button changes to x This is to remind you to click on this button again when you are through selecting the transparent color if you want to continue editing the picture Second the mouse cursor changes to an eyedropper shape when you point at the background picture Point at the color that you want transparent and click your mouse The color that you click on immediately becomes transparent so you can see through the picture to the color on the face of the key If you have made the key color transparent you will be able to see through the picture to the keyboard background color or picture When you have selected the transparent color that you want click on the finished transparent color E button to continue editing the key picture or key or click on the finished key picture 158 button 1f you are finished editing the key s picture The third use picture from Normal key state button is available if you are in the Pointed At or Pressed key states Pressing this button instructs REACH to use the picture that you have assigned to the Normal key state to
406. tton appears to have no effect In fact it is activating programs that do not come to the top Hint If a window especially dialog boxes was visible and then it disappeared probably when you moved the mouse onto the keyboard it probably is being hidden by the keyboard You can try bringing it back by pointing above the keyboard which will pop it back to the top or hiding the keyboard see next section Hint Ifyou think a program should be on top but you cannot see it and the keyboard you have loaded is large you might have to hide the keyboard select a smaller keyboard or resize the large keyboard to make it smaller so that you can see the application Hint If your keyboard is docked maximize all the running applications to minimize the effort required to resize windows If your keyboard is floating you might not want to maximize the programs but instead use the Restore El button so that you can resize and position the application so that it does not overlap the REACH keyboard Note IfREACH maximizes a program that you do not want maximized click on the Restore El button in the top right corner of the maximized window 2 13 Button Hide or Show Keyboard As discussed throughout this manual the real estate available on the computer s display often is very limited Because there are times when you might want to display a larger portion of the application program or times when text entry 1s Nan 0 not
407. turn to this screen at a later time to enter your license code From AHF s s email popi 5 pon re ne 10 If you fill in the Name and Serial Number and press the Email for License button an email is composed for 11 you to send this information to AHF Ifthe Email for License button doesn t work on your computer then copy and paste the Fingerprint code to an email message and send it along with the Name and Serial Number to AHF at license ahf net com While email is preferred other contact information is provided at the beginning of this User s Manual if you do not have email As shown in Step 2 of the picture above Applied Human Factors Inc will then email you the 1 the Name usually the same as the one you provided and 2 a License Code You probably want to Exit this window the Exit button is in the lower right corner of the window until you receive the license code from AHF When you exit this window REACH will start automatically 12 After you receive your License Code from AHF start REACH again and select Licensing at the bottom of the opening window Skip to Step 3 and paste the Name into the text entry box labeled Paste Name Here exactly as it is typed in the email from AHF we strongly recommend that you copy and paste it from the email message 13 Also in Step 3 enter the License Code provided in the email from AHF into the text entry box labeled Paste Licen
408. ty subjective feelings about ease of use and comfort medical considerations input from an expert etc See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Button Click Task 1s selected 4 7 4 2 Button Double Click Task This task is intended to help determine your ability to double click using a switch such as those provided by a mouse track ball joy stick or other special switches In order for the switch to work with REACH it must simulate a left button mouse click in Windows The Button Double Click Task provides a good way to assess your double click performance when using different switch alternatives For example if a mechanical switch eye blink switch and puff sip switch are all reasonable candidates for you then you can test to see which switch yields the fastest double click speed 108 However before deciding on a switch it is recommended that some of the other Assess tasks also be administered especially Click Release Point and Click and Drag because there is more to Windows operations than simply double clicking a switch Also other factors besides speed should be considered expense availability subjective feelings about ease of use and comfort medical considerations input from an expert etc See section 4 7 1 General Procedure for Conducting Assessment Tasks for details of the procedure once the Button Double Click Task is selected
409. u Directory Structure When REACH is installed a main folder called Reach5 is created on your hard drive located in a folder labeled Applied Human Factors located in the Program Files folder on your hard drive e g c Program Files Applied Human Factors ReachS In addition the following subfolders also are created in the Reach5 folder bin This folder contains the executable files necessary to run REACH cursors This folder contains the files which define the various optional cursors data Note this file will not appear on your system until you run one of the Assess tasks and save the data This folder contains the results of any Assess tasks log which you have saved documents This folder contains copies of the REACH 5 User s Manual the license agreement and a readme file keyboard This folder contains keyboard files and subfolders containing keyboard files that are provided with this software or which you have created or imported macros This folder contains macro functions that you can assign to keys when authoring your REACH keyboards see Section 1 5 Using REACH s Hot Authoring Features and if using the Keyboard Author see Section 5 2 6 5 Key Details Key Action on the Keyboard Author Five subfolders are located in the macros folders containing 1 general Windows macros 2 macros for the Windows Notepad program 3 macros for the Windows WordPad program 4 macros for the popul
410. u must use the REACH Keyboard Author to make major changes to a keyboard like adding deleting keys changing the scanning pattern etc you can use Hot Authoring to very quickly make changes to the appearance or primary function of a key For example you can change the label the size of the label or color of a single key or all keys For a selected key you also can quickly add or change a sound or picture create or change a keyboard link or change the key s action what it does when it is pressed To use this feature point at the key and click your right mouse switch This produces the REACH Hot Authoring dialog box shown in Figure 12 REACH Hot Authoring A Change this key s or all keys Color Font Size Welcome to Hot Authoring LAJ Change this key s Label Hot Authoring lets you customize one key or many keys quickly and easily ne Change this key s Picture Point at each button to learn more about that option 4 Change this key s Sound If you want to do something more than what is aby Aenea tale bears Seiten offered here try the Keyboard Author Run Keyboard Author a Geta keyboard when this key is clicked Ae Dong X Cancel Figure 12 Hot Authoring dialog box used for making quick changes to a key or keys Ifyou select the first option you can make changes in a key s appearance which can be applied to the selected key or to all the keys Most of the time you probably only want to change something about the
411. u purchased Smart Lists Pa El REACH Startup E How should REACH display dynamic labels Keyboards P a E For Normal Keys keys not pressed or pointed at Scanning I don t want Dynamic Labeling O Replace the top label of the key with the Dynamic Label Add a bottom label to the key with the Dynamic Label Smart Keys O Only Dynamically Label a key if that key will produce an AutaType For Pointed At Keys Boa Point anac OO eys fa Scanning I don t want Dynamic Labeling Appearance Replace the top label of the key with the Dynamic Label Add a bottom label to the key with the Dynamic Label Home Keyboard i O Only Dynamically Label a key if that key will produce an AutoType x il gt Cancel Figure 40 The Smart Lists Dynamic Labeling page of Settings If you prefer to stay on a keyboard e g using Smart Keys but you are better at recognizing the beginning of the word you are typing than you are at picking the next letter as in standard typing try the Dynamic Labeling feature Patent Pending To try this option go to the Dynamic Labeling page of Settings see Figure 40 71 For more information on this feature click on Dynamic Labeling select Dynamic Labeling in the REACH Tour a link is provided on most REACH Home Keyboards or if you are running the program as a demonstration copy select one of the Dynamic Labeling demonstration keys found o
412. u to the most likely letters When scanning unlikely keys are skipped or are offered after likely letters depending on the options you have selected Figure 1 shows an example of how Smart Keys works when typing the word Lucky Frame 1 shows a REACH M alphabetic keyboard after another word has just been completed In Frame 2 the user has just typed the L key and Smart Keys has removed those letters that do not follow L Note that if you were using scanning it would not take you as long to get to the next u key because you skip over the q r s and u keys saving you a considerable amount of time Frame 3 shows what pi keyboard looks like after Lu has been typed Frame 1 Initial alphabetic ke board Escape Y Escape y Spacebar Figure 1 REACH with Smart Keys removing unlikely keys as a user types Lucky 22 1 2 1 2 Smart Lists Technology Add On Smart Lists Technology Patent Pending uses a new approach to typing called List Based Typing Developed by AHF Smart Lists technology can be very useful for some people because it can dramatically reduce the number of switch operations required for both scanning and point and click and also increase typing speed Click on the K key and it opens up showing a list of possible word beginnings Stay right on the K key until you complete your word Figure 2 below shows how the K key looks after selected Here the op
413. u want to change to transparent in our example the light blue background that is surrounding the bird and click the mouse button Notice that the original light blue color disappears and becomes transparent you can see through it to the background color or scene If you change your mind about which part of the key you want transparent or if you accidentally clicked the eyedropper on the wrong color click again on the desired color 9 When you are happy with the transparency effect click on the finished transparent color button on the Key Picture tool bar Note Be sure to press the finished transparent color button when you are finished Note For each key you can select one and only one color to be transparent 5 2 9 Previewing Keys Using REACH and the Keyboard Author An even more realistic preview is possible for the keyboard you are authoring After you have named and saved the keyboard load it into REACH while the Author is still running There you can check out the appearance sounds and functions of the keys in a real world test If you find something that needs changing move back to the Keyboard Author make the change and save the keyboard again Every time the keyboard is saved REACH automatically updates the keyboard so you can test your change immediately 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructions When REACH is in scanning mode the keys can be selected by using one single or inverse single switch scanni
414. uable options Button Bar Authoring You can change the locations of the buttons on the standard REACH Button Bar by using your right mouse button and dragging one of the buttons or one of the dividers the spaces between sets of keys to the desired location You also can modify the scanning REACH Button Bar but 1 some changes are not allowed and 2 the new arrangement could affect what gets scanned 1 e only the buttons that are located between the Start button and the Stop button are scanned 2 1 Button Menu The Menu Bar provides a gateway to many of the more powerful REACH options However it takes up room and you might want to hide it on different occasions to save space If the Menu Bar is not present above the Button Bar it can be produced by pressing the Menu Menu button Press it again and the Menu Bar disappears Notice that any maximized applications are automatically resized to fill the area available 45 2 2 Button Double Click REACH provides a smart mouse mouse button emulator that simulates a double click When the Double button is pressed once the button s appearance changes to The next time you point and click anywhere in the application three things happen 1 A double click is simulated instead of a single click 2 The Once label returns to Double 3 The system returns to the standard single click mode If this button is pressed twice in a row its appearance changes
415. uce the Loading amp Saving Dictionaries dialog box 3 Press the Save 338 dialog box will appear 4 Specify the location where you want the selected dictionary to be copied e g specify the A drive if saving to a disk 5 Press the Save button and the dictionary will be copied to the specified location button in the Loading Saving Dictionaries dialog box and the Choose a location Note You should use the Save procedure described above to make periodic backups of dictionaries you are using or changing frequently That way if something happens to a user dictionary you have created you can load it 206 using the Load option from a backup copy Also 1t might be smart to store some backup copies on diskettes in case something happens to your hard drive 8 3 9 Using the REACH Speech Dictionary Feature With REACH Word Prediction words or sentences can be spoken when either pointed at or selected see section 1 7 Using Speech Options with REACH Also recordings of spoken text can be attached to abbreviations To encourage the use of REACH to augment speech REACH word prediction comes with a basic Speech Dictionary file speech dic This dictionary is not intended to be a complete collection of all possible phrases or sentences that you might want to speak but a foundation on which you can build by adding any of your favorite expressions To open the REACH Speech Dictionary file click on Diction
416. umber of letters and pause The default values are O letters and 0 seconds 1 e word prediction is always visible if you have selected Show Word Prediction Note This option is only available if Word Prediction is set to Floating e g in the View menu 80 2 11 10 6 Settings Word Prediction Punctuation S Smart Lists Tell REACH how to deal with punctuation marks ah Home Keyboard AMES we l id Keyboard Es y Panels Check this box if you want REACH to automatically space 1 Word Predictior and if appropriate capitalize the next word when you ane ara type punctuation from the keyboard Fica Word Size Y In Word Gres ue Prediction l l l i eck this box IT you want punctuation marks to appear aoe Options Check this box if y F k PF BR More Ootio in word prediction after you ve completed a word y ore Optio 55 Puretuation When you click on these punctuation marks REACH will A automatically space and if appropriate capitalize the 9 next word Word Tips a GuickWord ef Hot Keys E Ah Cancel Figure 50 The word prediction Punctuation page of the Settings dialog box Click on the Punctuation category and REACH options involving punctuation are presented see Figure 50 REACH offers two different punctuation options which can each save you up to four key strokes at a time If you select the From the Keyboard option by clicking on the checkbox on the Punctuation page then when y
417. umbers addresses etc Later when the keyboard is used it can provide quick information on services friends etc 5 2 13 16 Scanning Keyboards Scanning Keyboards are intended to help anyone who has difficulty using a pointer but can operate a switch Three scanning options are available single switch inverse single switch and dual switch In single switch scanning the switch must be one that emulates a left mouse button In dual switch scanning the two switches must emulate a left and right mouse button click Regardless of the scanning mode REACH scanning keyboards allow you to select a key by first indicating which row the desired key is in and then which key in that row Most REACH keyboards can be turned into a Scanning Keyboard by selecting one of the three scanning options in the Scanning menu Also existing scanning instructions can be changed or scanning instructions added to new keyboards using the Keyboard Author see section 5 2 10 Creating Scanning Instructions 175 To see which keyboards have scanning instructions click on the Select option in the Keyboard Menu Those keyboards that are shown in the resulting Keyboard Gallery Select a keyboard to load dialog box with colored keys can be scanned To see what a keyboard looks like click on 1ts name To try one out load 1t by selecting 1t and then clicking on the OK button To start the scanning cycle click on one of the three scanning options in the Scann
418. und 77 78 color font 77 78 Copy 116 123 125 129 143 144 155 157 181 182 cursor 60 62 64 75 107 118 129 136 151 156 175 187 188 191 192 199 234 239 242 243 data 105 106 107 163 deleting key 39 dic 234 238 241 dic files 207 234 238 241 dictionary 10 32 43 44 66 79 80 88 168 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 234 235 238 241 242 243 dictionary saving 206 Dictionary Editor 171 175 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 238 Dictionary Manager 74 171 193 194 195 196 197 204 205 206 207 dictionary options 194 196 197 204 Drag Task 105 107 108 110 Dual Switch Scanning 37 211 212 Dwell 32 33 59 60 61 62 106 111 117 186 187 Dynamic Labeling 21 25 26 38 68 71 72 235 exit REACH 10 97 100 Exit REACH 100 Exploratory Keyboard 33 164 165 235 extinction word 80 extinction rate 235 Favorite Program 73 74 File Menu 126 127 153 find a user dictionary 194 196 197 204 206 find a word in a user dictionary 198 find sentence in user dictionary 202 float 190 folder 6 41 54 73 107 113 116 121 122 123 125 135 138 150 153 163 178 182 188 201 234 238 241 242 font 77 78 124 127 130 133 159 236 font color 77 78 font size 77 font type 77 236 Foreground 117 121 158 161 177 frequency value 80 235 238 239 243 get keyboard 173
419. und played can be selected from any available wav file on your system spelling monitor REACH offers an option in which your spelling can be monitored for possible errors Specifically when the option is active and a word is typed that is not found in the currently open dictionary 1es then an audible spelling alarm is sounded standard deviation A measure of the variability in a set of scores In this case the unbiased estimate of the population standard deviation startup The period of time when a computer or a program is first initialized REACH offers different startup options e g whether REACH starts when your computer starts whether another application program starts when REACH starts etc These are available on the Startup page of Settings Storybook Keyboard A term describing a REACH keyboard or keyboard system designed to help simulate a book for children except that unlike most books they can contain sounds animated keys and read themselves to the user Template Keyboards A term describing a REACH keyboard that has keys already laid out but for which the keys have not yet been defined A set of Template Keyboards are provided with REACH to save you time when you author create a new keyboard text caret The small blinking text cursor in most applications requiring text entry text entry box A text entry box is a small window usually found in a windows dialog box where the us
420. ur job now 1s to find and select the second sound in the target word light the long I sound After you find and click on the long I sound key the Sound It Out keyboard changes again as shown in Figure 148 The word prediction words have changed They now show the most likely words to begin with the sound formed by combining the L phoneme and the long I phoneme Notice that the first word on the left lie has a yellow background while all the other words have the same gray background as before The yellow background 1s a cue to you indicating that word is now completed If you had been seeking the target word lie then you would know that you have entered all the sounds and so you should check any word in yellow to see if it is the target word by pointing at it and listening to 1t Will you turn on the 5 G E al Page 1 Sec 1 111 At 1 3 lmz2 Col i English 11 5 like life 2 tignt line Figure 148 After clicking on the key for the long I sound the keyboard shows the most likely words beginning with the L long I sound the keyboard shows those sounds likely to come next and the Say It window shows both sounds selected Of course depending on your reading ability and familiarity with seeing the word lie you might recognize it and not need to hear it to know that it is the word you are after Also if you are familiar enough with our actual target word light you might notice that it is one of the words already of
421. ure press the Cancel button If you want to return to the original keyboard size 1 e the size that keyboard was the last time 1t was saved in the Keyboard Author press the Default button If you have trouble dragging your pointer you can press the Drag button and REACH will initiate a drag procedure the first time you click your switch and complete the drag procedure the second time you click your switch 5 4 Keyboard Menu Select Key Sound sound Gallery Find the sound you want to load DE abtbellt 3 ahfbell2 ahtboo All Categories ahfchirp ahelik gt ahfclk2 ahfclk3 fi ahfdrip a ahtknock KE ahime 4 ahfoops E ahtowl Ay ahipop plz ahfpuz Show Me Al Sound Types E Z ahthonk Figure 131 The Sound Gallery where you can search for preview and select sounds REACH can play a default sound file when any key is pressed This provides auditory feedback and can be useful to let you know that a key was pressed Ifa key was specifically assigned a sound to play when the key is pressed then the default key sound will not be played Also if you have REACH set to speak keys as you type the default sound will not be played To select or change the default key sound click on the Select Key Sound option in the Keyboard menu and the Sound Gallery Find the sound you want to load dialog box is displayed see Figure 131 Here you can look for the s
422. urn to the docked state if you like 7 6 View Menu Float or Dock Word Prediction The REACH Word Prediction word bar can either be docked attached to the REACH keyboard Menu Bar or Button Bar or floating behaving like a normal window that can be dragged to various locations on your display When you first start REACH the Button Bar and Menu Bar are located at the bottom of the display the keyboard is docked to the top of the Menu Bar or Button Bar if the Menu Bar isn t showing and the word bar is docked to the top of the keyboard Selecting the Float Word Prediction option disconnects the word bar from the keyboard Menu Bar and Button Bar and puts it in a floating state so that you can drag it by its title bar to a new location Also this menu option changes to Dock Word Prediction so you can return to the docked state if you like Note When the word bar is floating some of REACH s Windows Management features will not work You will not always be able to see all parts of your application and all parts of the word bar Note Ifyou choose a vertical orientation for word prediction then the word bar will float become undocked You cannot have word prediction in a floating and docked orientation 190 7 7 View Menu Move REACH to Top or Bottom The REACH Button Bar and Menu Bar and keyboard and word bar 1f they are docked can be positioned at the bottom of your display or at the top When you
423. use if the learning features are active word frequency values will change with more frequently selected or typed words increasing and less frequently selected or typed words decreasing word prediction There is some semantic confusion about the distinction between word prediction and word completion Regardless of the term used REACH provides word and sentence options based on in order 1 the initial letters typed and 2 the word frequency values for the words sentences words sentences with higher values appear earlier Also REACH presents frequently used two letter words in between words e g when a space punctuation mark or Enter key is typed Word Tips The REACH option that presents candidate words one at a time either in text balloons close to the text caret or in the word boxes by highlighting Zoom A REACH feature that allows you to magnify the area around the mouse cursor around the text caret or around both 243 244 13 0Index abbreviation 43 44 79 83 168 169 170 171 175 198 199 200 201 202 207 233 241 243 abbreviation expansion 79 169 175 199 202 233 241 active application 95 200 233 add phonetic word 233 Add Word button 32 195 adding abbreviations 44 200 adding picture 121 adding sentences 171 203 adding sound 54 adding word 197 198 adding words 32 195 197 198 aligning labels 145 aligning pictures 147 alignment 145 146 14
424. ut this License Agreement or this software program please contact AHF P O Box 228 Helotes Texas 78023 USA Email info ahf net com Internet www ahf net com telephone 210 408 0098 Fax 210 408 0097 End of License Agreement Note Installing amp Uninstalling REACH Software Be sure to read the License Agreement and Limited Warranty before installation Hardware Software Requirements Speech Computer Intel Pentium III Compatible or Higher Based PC Environment Windows 98 2000 Me XP or Vista Hard Disk Space 80 0 MB RAM Memory 256 MB or more highly recommended Pointing Device Mouse or any mouse emulator that allows point and click Sound Any sound card that can play wav files Any speech synthesizer that uses the Windows speech application programming interface SAPT plus any sound card that plays wav files This version of REACH Interface Author comes with Microsoft Text to Speech MSTTS and requires 24MB of hard disk space Do not install MSTTS if one of the following applies 1 you already have a SAPI compliant synthesizer you and don t want MSTTS 2 you already have MSTTS or 3 you don t have 24MB of disk space on your c drive Installing REACH 1 Turn on your IBM compatible PC computer 2 Allow Windows to start normally 3 If you already have REACH on your computer read the following important notes Note Note Note Note If you are upgrading fr
425. uthoring feature 2 5 Button Last Last Keyboard The Last keyboard button loads the keyboard you were using just prior to the current keyboard This helps you quickly get back to where you were without for example having to use the Select option in the Keyboard Menu to relocate and reload a keyboard you used recently This feature is similar to the Last web page button on many Internet browsers 2 6 Button Home Home Keyboard The Home keyboard button loads the keyboard that you have defined as your Home Keyboard This keyboard typically has many key links which can get you to a large number and variety of keyboards quickly To learn more about the Home Keyboard System see section 1 6 Using REACH s Home Keyboard System To change the Home Keyboard click on the Change Keyboard Theme key found on most home keyboards or see section 2 11 8 Settings Home Keyboard 47 Ze l Button Next Next Keyboard If you are using Keyboard A and then used the Last button see section 2 5 to return to a previous keyboard Keyboard B you can use the Next ee button to return to Keyboard A This button is similar to the Next button found on many Internet browsers Using the Last and Next buttons allows you to quickly get to a keyboard you have recently used 2 8 Button Word Speak Last Word Press the Word ard button and REACH will speak the last word that you typed However REACH can
426. w many times the word list is presented before Word Tips stops Note Word Tips pauses automatically when the REACH Word Prediction window is minimized You also can pause Word Tips by pointing the mouse at the text balloon Hint If you use the Tab key a lot you might want to increase the Wait how long before showing the next word delay so that you have time to insert a Tab between Word Tips words If you rarely use the Tab key then set the delay between words to zero so you will not accidentally type a Tab when trying to select a word Hint If you want to type a Tab while Word Tips is presenting words you can type the Hot Key combination of an F2 key followed by the Tab key 83 Hint IfWord Tips is on you can pause it by typing the Hot Key combination of an F2 key followed by the letter w To resume use the same Hot Key combination You also can pause resume by pressing the Pause or Resume buttons on the Word Tips page of the REACH Word Prediction Options dialog box see Figure 52 2 11 10 9 Settings Word Prediction Quick Words a Smart Lists ol Home Keyboard GiuickvWords are words that appear in between words for example after you complete a word Favorites 1 Word Predictior Mote The number of Guick Words that will actually appear will depends on the font and window size of the word prediction Caret Track window Foe Word Size l Y l Current Number Maximum Number
427. ween word words are presented most of the two letter words It also 1s important to note that common punctuation marks are located in the extreme left windows There are no punctuation keys on the phonetic keyboard so you should use these punctuation marks to punctuate your sentences Figure 5 shows an example using a Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard designed for users who do not want or need pictures to help them with the sounds As you select the sounds in a word a Replay window is shown to remind you what Fe forj fs at fe a p e ft in fs it ojo at tam fr o Ju fs we Figure 5 Picture ofa REACH Phonetic Keyboard which does not include pictures as cues sounds you already entered as shown in Figure 6 When clicked with your mouse the Say It button shown at the right side of the Replay window attempts to blend the sounds already selected This phonetic approach to typing has been shown to significantly increase spelling accuracy in adults and children but especially for adults and children who have difficulties with spelling For a more thorough discussion of how to use the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard see Section 11 0 Using the REACH Sound It Out Phonetic Keyboard Figure 6 The Say It replay window shown while using the Children s Keyboard 1 2 1 5 Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Symbols Add On If you purchased one of the optional forms of the Mayer Johnson Picture Communication Set the Lar
428. well as links to both the Dictionary and Association Managers see Figure 43 A number of subcategories are displayed below the main Word Prediction category see following sections Smart Lists REACH Word Prediction is extremely powerful and easily customized Pe Home Keyboard Word Prediction settings are found in ten pages of settings under Word E Prediction see list of pages to the left Py Favorites gt Word Predictio With the REACH Dictionary Manager you can do the following tasks paren Tae l Add or change words in a dictionary Fica Word Size Y l Choose which dictionaries to use for word prediction Se View Options 3 Change the Auto Edit dictionary ca More Optio 7 4 Build dictionalres from text Tiles 0 Punctuation aS Dictionary a To start the REACH Dictionary Manager click the Manager Numbering button to the right WordTips Ser QuickWord REACH also allows you to associate dictionaries with Association keyboards To associate one or more dictionaries with Manager Ef HIS y the keyboard that is currently loaded click the button r Ame y ta the right Cancel Figure 43 The main Word Prediction page of Settings Click on the link to the Dictionary Manager and the Dictionary Manager dialog box 1s shown see left side of Figure 44 There you can open close create delete and build dictionaries as well as edit the contents of specific dictionaries If you load the Dictionary Manager u
429. with the dictionaries Hint If you want to create a dictionary that only contains unusual words e g Algebra terms in the above example then open all your dictionaries so REACH will not include common words in the new dictionary Hint When later using REACH to write a personal letter you might want to close the Algebra dictionary so REACH Word Prediction does not clutter the word boxes with unlikely words Similarly you will want to open the Algebra dictionary when studying math Also if you have a customized dictionary that is only used by one or two customized keyboards you should consider using AHF s Associated Dictionary feature where for a given keyboard you can specify which dictionaries to search 8 3 8 Loading Saving Dictionaries Note The graphics interface in the Dictionary Manager has been provided to make it easy to add delete open close load save and edit dictionaries It is highly recommended that you use this interface to perform these operations rather than using other methods e g the Windows Explorer mt Note See the Legal Notice in section 8 3 Word Prediction Menu Dictionary Manager for information on the limitations of loading and saving dictionaries 205 Loading amp Saving Dictionaries Here you can load a dictionary e g from a disk or save a dictionary e to a disk Choose an option below W Click the Load button to copy a dictionary w from a disk o
430. x wav files A special file that contains information used to play sounds wobble A REACH option that allows the cursor movements to be smoothed This option is useful for the user who has difficulty maintaining a steady position when using a pointer word bar In the REACH Word Prediction program the window that presents candidate words sentences or abbreviations 1s called the word bar It typically displays several word boxes each containing a candidate word word box In the REACH s word prediction the window that presents a candidate word sentence or abbreviation is called a word box Typically several such word boxes are displayed on the word bar word completion There is some semantic confusion about the distinction between word prediction and word completion Regardless of the term used REACH provides word and sentence options based on in order 1 the initial letters typed and 2 the word frequency values for the words sentences words sentences with higher values appear earlier Also REACH presents the same frequent two letter words in between words e g after a space punctuation mark or Enter key is typed word frequency value The numeric value assigned to each word in the Main or User Dictionary to reflect how often it is used In REACH word frequency values range from high very frequent i e the word the to low relatively infrequent e g the word accompanying During everyday
431. y The first step is to locate a document or other text source that is in electronic format and convert it to a standard txt format Most word processors will let you save a file in this format Welcome to the Dictionary Builder Step 7 Type in the name of your new dictionary ev Step 2 Enter the name of the tst file you wish to use to build your dictionary YY Brose Step 3 Press the Build H button a Ele fel z Cancel Figure 142 REACH Welcome to the Dictionary Builder dialog box Po Next select the Dictionary Manager option in the Word Prediction Menu and click on the Build Build I button in the Dictionary Manager dialog box The Welcome to the Dictionary Builder dialog box will open see Figure 142 showing you the three steps in building a new dictionary 204 As shown in Figure 142 the first step is to name your new dictionary Next specify the path and name of the txt file n Browse you want to use to create the new dictionary alternatively you can press the Browse button to select the WE Build It txt file Finally press the Build It button For example if you are taking a course in Algebra and want to create a dictionary containing math terms first locate a text file that contains many such math terms and convert it to a txt e g Text Only file This might be done by finding an article containing Algebra terms on the Internet check t
432. y is on your computer it will be offered after the Button Bar is offered If you operate your switch when offered ScanBuddy comes to life and allows you to perform mouse functions anywhere on the display If you do not activate ScanBuddy or when you are finished with ScanBuddy scanning automatically returns to the REACH keyboard For more discussion on how the scanning options work see section 2 11 2 Settings Scanning and section 5 2 13 16 Scanning Keyboards Note While this User s Manual emphasizes using external switches that emulate left mouse button clicks you also can have your right mouse button generate left mouse button clicks by going to the Control Panel in Windows and making the appropriate changes see your Windows User s Manual or Help System 36 You can turn on single switch scanning by selecting the Single Switch Scanning option in the Keyboard Menu However scanning does not start until you press the Start scanning Button on the button bar When scanning 1s active your mouse button clicks are used to signal your selections so you cannot click on anything on your display with your mouse except the Stop scanning button To pause scanning move the pointer to the Stop scanning button and click on 1t Scanning then will pause To resume scanning press the Start scanning button If you want scanning to stop altogether select the No Scanning option in the Keyboard Menu For more info
433. y box must be checked in Key Action dialog box for that key 2 the Turn Speech On Off option in the Keyboard Menu in REACH must be turned on so that it reads Turn Speech Off and 3 the Turn Sounds On Off option in the Options menu must be turned on so that it reads Turn Sounds Off Load Keyboard Option The When pressed which keyboard should be loaded option loads a different keyboard when the key is later pressed in REACH A good example is the REACH Speech Keyboard System feature in which the home base keyboard contains a set of keys that represent different categories of speech topics To specify which keyboard 1s to be loaded press the Choose button and the Keyboard Gallery Select the keyboard to be loaded dialog box 1s presented see Figure 95 Here you can look for the keyboard you want to be loaded when this key is pressed Use the scroll bar to move up and down the list of keyboards On the left side of the dialog box you can specify the Category where the keyboard is located You also can enter a key word or phrase in the text box on the right side of the dialog box and then press the Find It button Note The Categories that have a Family icon displayed to their left are keyboard Families 141 Keyboard Gallery Find the keyboard you want to load Look im 8838 address book they board BE alphabetic a to g no smart keys Categories All Categories Education Favor
434. y anxiety or frustration associated to writing in general making it a more positive experience and allowing them to work on developing other writing skills e How do you know if this approach will work for a specific person As with all assistive technology the best approach is to let people try it and see if it helps AHF encourages anyone interested in these products to download a free 30 day demo copy from the AHF website www ahf net com and let the candidate user try it The improvements reported above were found in half an hour so it should not take long to determine if it is likely to be useful e Why not just use a spell checker There are several reasons for believing that the phonetic typing approach is superior to using a spell checker First spell checkers do nothing to instruct the user about the relationships among sounds and letters while the user is actively involved in writing The phonetic typing approach gives the student practice in identifying and segmenting the phonemes in a word as well as providing immediate feedback when the word is found Second phonetic typing reduces the student s chances of failure because in phonetic typing many paths are available for most words and the paths are based on the student s accuracy in reporting the sounds in a word rather than the letters in a word While good spell checkers similarly provide many paths flexibility in recognizing the word all paths are based on letters something th
435. y face or on the keyboard background key style In REACH key style refers to one of three general appearances that can be assigned to a key The 3 D key style has a three dimensional appearance simulating a computer key The 2 D key style has a two dimensional appearance keyboard face In REACH the visible part of the keyboard upon which keys are positioned when a keyboard is created The keyboard face can have different colors or can display a graphic image keyboard family A folder containing keyboards that all have a similar function e g typing or speech When a folder is designated a keyboard family in the keyboard gallery most of the settings values assigned to any one keyboard in that folder are applied to any keyboard in that folder to save you time For example if you want your speech keyboards to speak when pointed at you can load one of the keyboards turn on speak when pointed at and then load any other keyboard stored in that folder and you will find that speak when pointed at is turned on Keyboard System A term describing a set of keyboards that are usually functionally related and linked together by the get keyboard option A good example is the REACH Speech Keyboard System feature 231 learning rate In the REACH Word Prediction module when either of the learning options are used the word frequency values are changed based on their rate ofuse Word frequency values increase for words that are
436. yboard load the Windows Macros keyboard which contains operations that can be used in various programs e g Cut Copy Paste etc 53 Keyboard Menu Change Keyboard Size The Change Keyboard Size option allows you to change the size of the keyboard window When you change the size of the keyboard the size of the keys on that keyboard automatically are changed so that they are proportional to their size and location on the original keyboard When you select this option a border appears along the edges of the current keyboard and a prompt appears telling you To size the keyboard drag the edges in the areas shown see Figure 130 If your keyboard is docked then such dragging edges will appear on all sides of the keyboard except the edge that is docked to the button bar If your keyboard is floating then all four edges are available to be dragged when creating a new size c program hles reach3 Piet tan chai aail basic kbd Figure 130 Keyboard during the Change Keyboard Size procedure Notice that when you adjust the width or height of the keyboard the keys are automatically updated so that you have a good idea what the keys will look like when you are finished When you have adjusted the keyboard to the size you want press the Ok button to complete this procedure 181 If you change your mind and want to return to the size of the keyboard just prior to starting the Change Keyboard Size proced
437. yboards Memory Assessment Keyboards Secret Code Keyboards Interpreter Keyboards International Keyboards Speech Keyboards Template Keyboards And because your keyboards are simple files you can create new custom keyboards and share them with friends and colleagues 1 3 Overall Strategy and Layout of the REACH Interface Author Software One of the major issues for any on screen keyboard program is the display real estate the amount of space available on the computer s display is very limited In most cases a minimum display requirements include the on screen keyboard and an application program such as word processing spreadsheet database etc Such application programs typically come with substantial real estate of their own e g title bar menu bar button bars etc Also for many users the keys on the keyboard must be relatively large in order to make accurate selections Finally working in a Windows environment can often be confusing and difficult for any user e g windows can get buried partially hidden minimized need to be resized need to be moved etc Using a human factors approach REACH was designed to make wise use of display real estate and help reduce problems associated with manipulating Windows AHF calls this capability Windows Management and REACH is the only on screen keyboard product that performs significant Windows Management As shown in Figure 10 REACH does not conform to s
438. yboards Programs Use Dwell to help click and perform other mouse functions Step O Check this box to use Dwell EEN Scanning Step Please choose a Dwell Agent a picture that lets you know the status of dwell Timing O St Pause Optic Wobble Step 3 Check this box to show Dwell State on Keys i view Step4 9 O Check this box if you re using Dwell on a Touch Screen BA Smart Keys E Hs i Steph Choose a sound to make when Dwell clicks Pe Home Keyboard ER Favorit 4 Favorites Choose Mone s re ait Ut ian More Dwell settings are shown on the Timing and Pause Options pages lt i gt of Settings Cancel Figure 26 The main Dwell page of Settings with Dwell turned on 59 When you click on the Dwell option in the list of Settings topics found on the left side of the Settings dialog box the main page of Dwell settings 1s displayed on the right side and three subtopics are displayed below the Dwell option Timing Wobble and Pause Options see Figure 26 On the main Dwell page of Settings you can turn the Dwell switch option on by clicking on the checkbox until a checkmark appears or turn Dwell off by clicking in the checkbox until the checkmark disappears found in Step 1 In Step 2 you can select a Dwell Prompt that will provide visual cues about what stage e g ready set go that the dwell switch is in If you select the Text Prompt option the word Dwell will first app
439. you don t want or use scanning 5 2 4 Authoring a New Keyboard When the Keyboard Author first starts the Keyboard Details dialog box is presented see Figure 80 It also is presented if you indicate you want to Make a new keyboard if you have been working on another keyboard and EE selected New Keyboard from the File Menu or if you have clicked on the keyboard details keyboard button Keyboard Details Stepl Select the font and colors you want to use for this keyboard Font Mame Times Mew Roman Size 12 Justification Left Step 2 Choose from the followme characteristics for the keys you create Automatically speak label when pointed at Automatically speak what is typed Use the label of the key to create the key action Step 3 In REACH there is a setting to speak or play a key s sound after some time has passed Click here to override REACH s setting and use your own Tor the keys you create sec Figure 80 The Keyboard Details dialog box The three steps shown on this dialog box are included to help save you time while you are creating the new keyboard In Step 1 1t shows the current default values for the text labels that will be displayed on the keys Specifically the current settings for the text font name size and justification whether the label appears at the left center or right ofthe key are displayed If you would like to change any of these press the Change button and the Fo
440. zontal To have tracking in both directions select the View Tab and Ef Hot Keys change it to Vertical Be Sneech asd Figure 46 The Caret Tracking page of Settings If word prediction is in the vertical orientation and word prediction is floating not docked then the CaretTracker can track the caret horizontally click on the checkbox in front of Horizontally or vertically click on the checkbox in 76 front of Vertically or both When both horizontal and vertical caret tracking are turned on CaretTracker will move the REACH Word Prediction window up down and sideways to attempt to keep out of the way 1 e so you can see where you are typing If word prediction is in the horizontal orientation and floating then CaretTracker can track the caret vertically click on the checkbox in front of Vertically Note When word prediction is presented horizontally the Horizontal caret tracking option is grayed out not available For both horizontal and vertical caret tracking you can enter the distance in pixels you want the word prediction window to stay away from the text caret use the up down scroll buttons to select the desired number of pixels 2 11 10 2 Settings Word Prediction Word Size amp Color When you click on Word Size amp Color settings are displayed that allow you to adjust the size colors and fonts of the words presented in the w

REACH Interface Author™

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

REACH Interface Author&trade;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

REACH Interface Author™